www.schneider-electric.com
Altivar Machine ATV320
Variable Speed Drives
for Asynchronous and Synchronous Motors
Programming Manual
04/2018
NVE41295
2 NVE41295 10/2017
The information provided in this documentation contains general descriptions and/or technical characteristics
of the performance of the products contained herein. This documentation is not intended as a substitute for
and is not to be used for determining suitability or reliability of these products for specific user applications. It
is the duty of any such user or integrator to perform the appropriate and complete risk analysis, evaluation and
testing of the products with respect to the relevant specific application or use thereof. Neither Schneider
Electric nor any of its affiliates or subsidiaries shall be responsible or liable for misuse of the information
contained herein. If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this
publication, please notify us.
No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including
photocopying, without express written permission of Schneider Electric.
All pertinent state, regional, and local safety regulations must be observed when installing and using this
product. For reasons of safety and to help ensure compliance with documented system data, only the
manufacturer should perform repairs to components.
When devices are used for applications with technical safety requirements, the relevant instructions must be
followed.
Failure to use Schneider Electric software or approved software with our hardware products may result in
injury, harm, or improper operating results.
Failure to observe this information can result in injury or equipment damage.
© 2017 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
NVE41295 04/2018 3
Table of Contents
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
About the Book. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Chapter 1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Factory configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Application functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Basic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Graphic display terminal option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Powering up the drive for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Remote display terminal option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Structure of the parameter tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Finding a parameter in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Description of the HMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Structure of the menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Chapter 2 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Steps for setting-up the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Initial steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Chapter 3 Reference Mode (rEF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Organization tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Chapter 4 Monitoring Mode (MOn) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Organization tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
[MONIT. MOTOR] ................................................................................................... 50
[I/O MAP] ............................................................................................................... 51
[MONIT. SAFETY] ................................................................................................... 54
[MONIT. FUN. BLOCKS] ......................................................................................... 55
[COMMUNICATION MAP] ....................................................................................... 56
[MONIT. PI] ............................................................................................................ 62
[MONIT. POWER TIME] .......................................................................................... 62
[ALARMS] .............................................................................................................. 63
[OTHER STATE] ..................................................................................................... 64
[DIAGNOSTICS] ..................................................................................................... 64
[PASSWORD] ......................................................................................................... 75
Chapter 5 Configuration Mode (ConF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Organization tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
My Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
4 NVE41295 04/2018
Factory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Macro Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
[SIMPLY START] .................................................................................................... 85
[SETTINGS] ........................................................................................................... 89
[MOTOR CONTROL] ............................................................................................. 105
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] ................................................................................... 125
[COMMAND] ........................................................................................................ 154
[FUNCTION BLOCKS] ........................................................................................... 158
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) ............................................................................. 162
REFERENCE SWITCHING .............................................................................. 167
REFERENCE OPERATIONS ............................................................................ 168
RAMP.......................................................................................................... 170
STOP CONFIGURATION................................................................................. 173
AUTO DC INJECTION..................................................................................... 176
JOG ............................................................................................................ 178
PRESET SPEEDS.......................................................................................... 180
+/- SPEED.................................................................................................... 184
+/- SPEED AROUND A REFERENCE ................................................................ 186
REFERENCE MEMORIZING ............................................................................ 188
FLUXING BY LOGIC INPUT ............................................................................. 189
BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL ............................................................................... 191
EXTERNAL WEIGHT MEASUREMENT .............................................................. 199
HIGH SPEED HOISTING................................................................................. 201
PID REGULATOR .......................................................................................... 206
PID PRESET REFERENCES............................................................................ 214
TORQUE LIMITATION .................................................................................... 215
2ND CURRENT LIMITATION............................................................................ 218
DYN CURRENT LIMIT .................................................................................... 219
LINE CONTACTOR COMMAND........................................................................ 220
OUTPUT CONTACTOR COMMAND .................................................................. 222
POSITIONING BY SENSORS ........................................................................... 224
PARAMETER SET SWITCHING........................................................................ 229
MULTIMOTORS / MULTICONFIGURATIONS ...................................................... 232
AUTO TUNING BY LOGIC INPUT ..................................................................... 236
TRAVERSE CONTROL ................................................................................... 237
[FAULT MANAGEMENT] ....................................................................................... 250
[COMMUNICATION] ............................................................................................. 275
Chapter 6 Interface (ItF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Access Level (LAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Language (LnG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Monitoring Configuration (MCF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Display configuration (dCF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Chapter 7 Open / Save as (trA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Chapter 8 Password (COd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Chapter 9 Multipoint Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Maintenance and Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Chapter 10 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Chapter 11 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Error code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Clearing the detected fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Fault detection codes which require a power reset after the detected fault is cleared 311
Fault detection codes that can be cleared with the automatic restart function after the
cause has disappeared 313
Table of Contents
NVE41295 04/2018 5
Fault detection codes that are cleared as soon as their cause disappears . . . . . . . . 316
Option card changed or removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Control block changed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Fault detection codes displayed on the remote display terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Annex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Chapter 12 Index of Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Chapter 13 Index of Parameter Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Chapter 14 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Table of Contents
6 NVE41295 04/2018
NVE41295 04/2018 7
§
Safety Information
Safety Information
Important Information
NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying
to install, operate, or maintain it. The special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the
equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure.
The addition of this symbol to a DANGER or WARNING safety label indicates that an electrical
hazard exists, which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to potential personal injury hazards. Obey all
safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid a possible injury or death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in death, serious injury, or
equipment damage.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury, or equipment damage.
NOTICE
NOTICE is used to address practices not related to physical injury.
8 NVE41295 09/2017
Safety Information
PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. No
responsibility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of electrical
equipment and its installation, and has received safety training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved.
Qualification Of Personnel
Only appropriately trained persons who are familiar with and understand the contents of this manual and all
other pertinent product documentation are authorized to work on and with this product. In addition, these
persons must have received safety training to recognize and avoid hazards involved. These persons must
have sufficient technical training, knowledge and experience and be able to foresee and detect potential
hazards that may be caused by using the product, by changing the settings and by the mechanical, electrical
and electronic equipment of the entire system in which the product is used. All persons working on and with
the product must be fully familiar with all applicable standards, directives, and accident prevention regulations
when performing such work.
Intended Use
This product is a drive for three-phase synchronous and asynchronous motors and intended for industrial use
according to this manual.The product may only be used in compliance with all applicable safety regulations
and directives, the specified requirements and the technical data.Prior to using the product, you must perform
a risk assessment in view of the planned application. Based on the results, the appropriate safety measures
must be implemented.Since the product is used as a component in an entire system, you must ensure the
safety of persons by means of the design of this entire system (for example, machine design). Any use other
than the use explicitly permitted is prohibited and can result in hazards. Electrical equipment should be
installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel.
Product related information
Read and understand these instructions before performing any procedure with this drive.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• Only appropriately trained persons who are familiar with and understand the contents of this manual and
all other pertinent product documentation and who have received safety training to recognize and avoid
hazards involved are authorized to work on and with this drive system. Installation, adjustment, repair and
maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel.
• The system integrator is responsible for compliance with all local and national electrical code
requirements as well as all other applicable regulations with respect to grounding of all equipment.
• Many components of the product, including the printed circuit boards, operate with mains voltage. Do not
touch. Use only electrically insulated tools.
• Do not touch unshielded components or terminals with voltage present.
• Motors can generate voltage when the shaft is rotated. Prior to performing any type of work on the drive
system, block the motor shaft to prevent rotation.
• AC voltage can couple voltage to unused conductors in the motor cable. Insulate both ends of unused
conductors of the motor cable.
• Do not short across the DC bus terminals or the DC bus capacitors or the braking resistor terminals.
• Before performing work on the drive system:
- Disconnect all power, including external control power that may be present.
- Place a "Do Not Turn On" label on all power switches.
- Lock all power switches in the open position.
- Wait 15 minutes to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge. The DC bus LED is not an indicator of the
absence of DC bus voltage that can exceed 800 Vdc.
Measure the voltage on the DC bus between the DC bus terminals (PA/+ and PC/-) using a properly
rated voltmeter to verify that the voltage is <42 Vdc.
- If the DC bus capacitors do not discharge properly, contact your local Schneider Electric representative.
Do not repair or operate the product.
• Install and close all covers before applying voltage.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Safety Information
NVE41295 04/2018 9
Drive systems may perform unexpected movements because of incorrect wiring, incorrect settings, incorrect
data or other errors.
Damaged products or accessories may cause electric shock or unanticipated equipment operation.
Contact your local Schneider Electric sales office if you detect any damage whatsoever.
WARNING
UNEXPECTED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Carefully install the wiring in accordance with the EMC requirements.
• Do not operate the product with unknown or unsuitable settings or data.
• Perform a comprehensive commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
DANGER
ELECTRIC SHOCK OR UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Do not use damaged products or accesssories.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
• The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control paths and, for
critical control functions, provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure. Examples
of critical control functions are emergency stop, overtravel stop, power outage and restart.
• Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions.
• System control paths may include communication links. Consideration must be given to the implications
of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of the link.
• Observe all accident prevention regulations and local safety guidelines.
1
• Each implementation of the product must be individually and thoroughly tested for proper operation before
being placed into service.
1. For USA: Additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), “Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and
Maintenance of Solid State Control” and to NEMA ICS 7.1 (latest edition), “Safety Standards for Construction and Guide for Selection,
Installation and Operation of Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems”.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
NOTICE
DESTRUCTION DUE TO INCORRECT MAINS VOLTAGE
• Before switching on and configuring the product, verify that it is approved for the mains voltage.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Safety Information
10 NVE41295 04/2018
WARNING
HOT SURFACES
• Ensure that any contact with hot surfaces is avoided.
• Do not allow flammable or heat-sensitive parts in the immediate vicinity of hot surfaces.
• Verify that the product has sufficiently cooled down before handling it.
• Verify that the heat dissipation is sufficient by performing a test run under maximum load conditions
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
WARNING
EXPLOSION HAZARD
Only use this device outside of hazardous areas (explosive atmospheres).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
NVE41295 04/2018 11
§
About the Book
About the Book
At a Glance
Document scope
The purpose of this document is to:
• help you to set-up the drive,
• show you how to program the drive,
• show you the different menus, modes and parameters,
• help you in maintenance and diagnostics.
Validity note
NOTE: The products listed in the document are not all available at the time of publication of this document
online. The data, illustrations and product specifications listed in the guide will be completed and updated as
the product availabilities evolve. Updates to the guide will be available for download once products are
released on the market.
This documentation is valid for the Altivar Machine drive.
The technical characteristics of the devices described in this document also appear online. To access this
information online:
The characteristics that are presented in this manual should be the same as those characteristics that appear
online. In line with our policy of constant improvement, we may revise content over time to improve clarity and
accuracy. If you see a difference between the manual and online information, use the online information as
your reference.
Step Action
1 Go to the Schneider Electric home page www.schneider-electric.com.
2 In the Search box type the reference of a product or the name of a product range.
• Do not include blank spaces in the reference or product range.
• To get information on grouping similar modules, use asterisks (*).
3 If you entered a reference, go to the Product Datasheets search results and click on the
reference that interests you.
If you entered the name of a product range, go to the Product Ranges search results and click
on the product range that interests you.
4 If more than one reference appears in the Products search results, click on the reference that
interests you.
5 Depending on the size of your screen, you may need to scroll down to see the data sheet.
6 To save or print a data sheet as a .pdf file, click Download XXX product datasheet.
12 NVE41295 09/2017
About the Book
Related documents
Use your tablet or your PC to quickly access detailed and comprehensive information on all our products on
www.schneider-electric.com.
The internet site provides the information you need for products and solutions
• The whole catalog for detailed characteristics and selection guides
• The CAD files to help design your installation, available in over 20 different file formats
• All software and firmware to maintain your installation up to date
• A large quantity of White Papers, Environment documents, Application solutions, Specifications... to gain a
better understanding of our electrical systems and equipment or automation
• And finally all the User Guides related to your drive, listed below:
You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website at
http://download.schneider-electric.com
Title of Documentation Reference Number
ATV320 Getting Started NVE21763 (English), NVE21771
(French), NVE21772 (German),
NVE21773 (Spanish), NVE21774
(Italian), NVE21776 (Chinese)
ATV320 Getting Started Annex (SCCR) NVE21777 (English)
ATV320 Installation manual NVE41289 (English), NVE41290
(French), NVE41291 (German),
NVE41292 (Spanish), NVE41293
(Italian), NVE41294 (Chinese)
ATV320 Programming manual NVE41295 (English), NVE41296
(French), NVE41297 (German),
NVE41298 (Spanish), NVE41299
(Italian), NVE41300 (Chinese)
ATV320 Modbus Serial Link manual NVE41308 (English)
ATV320 Ethernet IP/Modbus TCP manual NVE41313 (English)
ATV320 PROFIBUS DP manual (VW3A3607) NVE41310 (English)
ATV320 DeviceNet manual (VW3A3609) NVE41314 (English)
ATV320 CANopen manual (VW3A3608, 618, 628) NVE41309 (English)
ATV320 EtherCAT manual (VW3A3601) NVE41315 (English)
ATV320 Communication Parameters NVE41316 (English)
ATV320 Safety Functions manual NVE50467 (English), NVE50468
(French), NVE50469 (German),
NVE50470 (Spanish), NVE50472
(Italian), NVE50473 (Chinese)
About the Book
NVE41295 04/2018 13
Terminology
The technical terms, terminology, and the corresponding descriptions in this manual normally use the terms
or definitions in the relevant standards.
In the area of drive systems this includes, but is not limited to, terms such as error, error message, failure,
fault, fault reset, protection, safe state, safety function, warning, warning message, and so on.
Among others, these standards include:
• IEC 61800 series: Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems
• IEC 61508 Ed.2 series: Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related
• EN 954-1 Safety of machinery - Safety related parts of control systems
• EN ISO 13849-1 & 2 Safety of machinery - Safety related parts of control systems.
• IEC 61158 series: Industrial communication networks - Fieldbus specifications
• IEC 61784 series: Industrial communication networks - Profiles
• IEC 60204-1: Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines - Part 1: General requirements
In addition, the term zone of operation is used in conjunction with the description of specific hazards, and is
defined as it is for a hazard zone or danger zone in the EC Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC) and in ISO
12100-1.
Also see the glossary at the end of this manual.
About the Book
14 NVE41295 04/2018
16 NVE41295 04/2018
NVE41295 04/2018 17
Overview
1
Overview
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Factory configuration 18
Application functions 19
Basic functions 23
Graphic display terminal option 24
Graphic display terminal optionì 24
Powering up the drive for the first time 27
Remote display terminal option 30
Structure of the parameter tables 31
Finding a parameter in this document 32
Description of the HMI 33
Structure of the menus 35
Overview
18 NVE41295 04/2018
Factory configuration
Factory settings
The Altivar 320 is factory-set for common operating conditions:
• Display: drive ready [Ready] (rdY) when motor is ready to run and the output frequency when motor is
running.
• The LI3 to LI6 logic inputs, AI2 and AI3 analog inputs, LO1 logic output, AO1 analog output, and R2 relay
are unassigned.
• Stop mode if error is detected: freewheel.
Note: If you want to keep the drive presettings to a minimum, select the macro configuration
[Macro configuration] (CFG) = [Start/stop] (StS) followed by
[Restore config.] (FCS) = [Config. CFG] (InI). For more information, see page 82
.
Check whether the values above are compatible with the application.
Code Description Factory settings values Page
bFr [Standard mot. freq] [50Hz IEC] 86
tCC [2/3 wire control] [2 wire] (2C): 2-wire control 85
Ctt [Motor control type] [Standard] (Std): standard motor law 105
ACC [Acceleration] 3.0 seconds 87
dEC [Deceleration] 3.0 seconds 87
LSP [Low speed] 0 Hz 87
HSP [High speed] 50 Hz 87
ItH [Mot. therm. current] Nominal motor current (value depending on drive rating) 87
SdC1 [Auto DC inj. level 1] 0.7 x nominal drive current, for 0.5 seconds 93
SFr [Switching freq.] 4 kHz 94
Frd [Forward] [LI1] (LI1): Logic input LI1 126
rrS [Reverse assign.] [LI2] (LI2): Logic input LI2 126
Fr1 [Ref.1 channel] [AI1] (AI1): Analog input AI1 154
r1 [R1 Assignment] [No drive flt] (FLt): The contact opens when a fault is detected or
when the drive has been switched off
138
brA [Dec ramp adapt.] [Yes] (YES): Function active (automatic adaptation of deceleration
ramp)
172
Atr [Automatic restart] [No] (nO): Function inactive 252
Stt [Type of stop] [Ramp stop] (rMP): On ramp 173
CFG [Macro configuration] [Start/Stop] (StS) 82
Overview
NVE41295 04/2018 19
Application functions
The tables on the following pages show the combinations of functions and applications, in order to guide your
selection.
The applications in these tables relate to the following machines, in particular:
• Hoisting: cranes, overhead cranes, gantries (vertical hoisting, translation, slewing), lifting platforms
• Handling: palletizers/depalletizers, conveyors, roller tables
• Packing: carton packers, labeling machines
• Textiles: weaving looms, carding frames, washing machines, spinners, drawing frames
• Wood: automatic lathes, saws, milling
• Process
Each machine has its own special features, and the combinations listed here are neither mandatory nor
exhaustive.
Some functions are designed specifically for a particular application. In this case, the application is identified
by a tab in the margin on the relevant programming pages.
Motor control functions
Functions Page Applications
Hoisting
Handling
Packing
Textiles
Wood
Process
V/f ratio 105
bb
Sensorless flux vector control 105
bbbbbb
2-point vector control 105
bb
Open-loop synchronous motor 105
b
Output frequency up to 599 Hz 105
bb
Motor overvoltage limiting 120
bb
DC bus connection (see Installation manual) -
bb
Motor fluxing using a logic input 189
bbb
Switching frequency of up to 16 kHz 94
bb
Auto-tuning 87
bbbbbb
Overview
20 NVE41295 04/2018
Functions on speed references
Functions Page Applications
Hoisting
Handling
Packing
Textiles
Wood
Process
Differential bipolar reference 129
bbb
Reference delinearization (magnifying glass effect) 132
bb
Frequency control input 154
bb
Reference switching 167
b
Reference summing 168
b
Reference subtraction 168
b
Reference multiplication 168
b
Adjustable profile ramp 170
bb
Jog operation 178
bbb
Preset speeds 180
bbb
+ speed / - speed using single action pushbuttons
(1 step)
184
b
+ speed / - speed using double action pushbuttons
(2 steps)
184
b
+/- speed around a reference 187
bb
Save reference 188
b
Overview
NVE41295 04/2018 21
Application-Specific functions
Functions Page Applications
Hoisting
Handling
Packing
Textiles
Wood
Process
Fast stop 173
b
Brake control 191
bb
Load measurement 199
b
High-speed hoisting 201
b
Rope slack 204
b
PID regulator 206
b
Motor/generator torque limit 215
bbb
Load sharing 122
bb
Line contactor control 220
bb b
Output contactor control 223
b
Positioning by limit switches or sensors 224
bbb
Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch 226
bb
Parameter switching 229
bbbbbb
Motor or configuration switching 232
bbb
Traverse control 237
b
Stop configuration 173
bbb
Overview
22 NVE41295 04/2018
Safety functions/Fault management
Functions Page Applications
Hoisting
Handling
Packing
Textiles
Wood
Process
Safe Torque Off (STO) (Safety function, see dedicated
document)
-
bbbbbb
Deferred stop on thermal alarm 258
bb
Alarm handling 145
bbbbbb
Fault management 250
bbbbbb
IGBT tests 260
bbbbbb
Catch a spinning load 253
bb
Motor protection with PTC probes 250
bbbbbb
Undervoltage management 259
bb
4-20 mA loss 260
bb bbb
Uncontrolled output cut (output phase loss) 256
b
Automatic restart 252
b
Use of the "Pulse input" input to measure the speed of
rotation of the motor
265
bb
Load variation detection 267
b
Underload detection 270
b
Overload detection 272
b
Safety Integrated functions (see related documents page 12)
bbbbb
Overview
NVE41295 04/2018 23
Basic functions
Drive ventilation
The fan starts automatically when the drive thermal state reaches 70% of the maximum thermal state
and if
the
[Fan Mode] (FFM) is set to [Standard] (Std).
For ATV320pppppW(S), [Fan Mode] (FFM) is forced to [Always] (run), the fan is always activated.
Overview
24 NVE41295 04/2018
Graphic display terminal option
Description of the graphic display terminal
With the graphic display terminal, which works with FLASH V1.1IE26 or higher, it is possible to display more
detailed information than can be shown on the integrated display terminal.
Note: Keys 3, 4, 5 and 6 can be used to control the drive directly, if control via the graphic display terminal is
activated.
To activate the keys on the remote display terminal, you first have to configure
[Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) = [HMI] (LCC). For more information, see page 154
.
1 Graphic display
2 Function keys
F1, F2, F3, F4,
see page
157
3 STOP/RESET
key
4 RUN key
5 Jog dial:
• Press (ENT):
- To save the current value
- To enter the selected menu or parameter
• Turn +/-:
- To increment or decrement a value
- To go to the next or previous line
- To increase or decrease the reference if control via the graphic
display terminal is activated
7 ESC key: Aborts a value, a
parameter or a menu to return to
the previous selection
6 Key for reversing the direction
of rotation of the motor
Overview
NVE41295 04/2018 25
Example configuration windows:
Single selection
Multiple selection
Example configuration window for one value:
The << and >> arrows (keys F2 and F3) are used to select the digit to be modified, and the jog dial is rotated
to increase or decrease this number.
Example visualization of function blocks state:
When powering up the graphic display terminal for the first time, the user has to select
the required language.
When only one selection is possible, the selection made is indicated by .
Example: Only one language can be chosen.
When multiple selection is possible, the selections made are indicated by .
Example: A number of parameters can be chosen to form the [USER MENU].
LANGUAGE
English
Français
Deutsch
Italiano
Español
Chinese
Русский
Türkçe
PARAMETER SELECTION
SETTINGS
Ramp increment
Acceleration-- - - - - - - -
Deceleration- - - - - - - - -
Accel e ration 2 - - - - - - - - -
Deceleration 2
Edit
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
Acceleration
9 .51s
Min = 0.00 Max = 99.99
<< >> Quick
ENT
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
Acceleration
9. 5 1s
Min = 0.00 Max = 99.99
<< >> Quick
OFF light: A valid function blocks program is in the ATV320 in stop mode.
ON light: A valid function blocks program is in the ATV320 in run mode. The
drive is considered as being in running state and configuration parameters
cannot be modified.
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
Acceleration
9 .51s
Min = 0.00 Max = 99.99
<< >> Quick
Overview
26 NVE41295 04/2018
Powering up the drive with Graphic display terminal for the first time
When powering up the graphic display terminal for the first time, the user has to select the required language.
Display after the graphic display terminal has been powered up for the first time.
Select the language and press ENT.
ENT
The drive's rating details will now appear.
3 seconds
ENT
LANGUAGE
English
Français
Deutsch
Italiano
Español
Chinese
Русский
Türkçe
ATV320U15M2B
1.5kW/2HP 220V Single
Config. n°0
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
ACCESS LEVEL
Basic
Standard
Advanced
Expert
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SPEED REFERENCE
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 CONFIGURATION
Code << >> Quick
Overview
NVE41295 04/2018 27
Powering up the drive for the first time
With the integrated display terminal, when powering up the drive for the first time, the user immediately
accesses to [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) (see page 86
) in the menu (COnF > FULL > SIM).
Display after the drive has been powered up for the first time.
3 seconds
The [ACCESS LEVEL] screen follows automatically.
ENT
Automatically switches to the [1 DRIVE MENU] menu after 3 seconds.
Select the menu and press ENT.
ESC
The MAIN MENU appears on the graphic display terminal if you press the ESC key.
ATV320U15M2B
1.5kW/2HP 220V Single
Config. n°0
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
ACCESS LEVEL
Basic
Standard
Advanced
Expert
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SPEED REFERENCE
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 CONFIGURATION
Code << >> Quick
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 IDENTIFICATION
3 INTERFACE
4 OPEN / SAVE AS
5 PASSWORD
Overview
28 NVE41295 04/2018
Subsequent power-ups
With the integrated display terminal, at subsequent power-ups of the drive for the first time, the user
immediately accesses to the drive state (Same liste than [Drive state] (HS1) page 65
). Example : Ready
(rdY).
Display after powering up.
3 seconds
Automatically switches to the [1 DRIVE MENU] menu after 3 seconds.
Select the menu and press ENT.
10 seconds
Automatically switches to the monitoring screen after 10 seconds.
ATV320U15M2B
1.5kW/2HP 220V Single
Config. n°0
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SPEED REFERENCE
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 CONFIGURATION
Code << >> Quick
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
Frequency ref.
+1.3
Hz
Min =-599.0 Max = +599.0
Quick
Overview
NVE41295 04/2018 29
Identification menu
The [2 IDENTIFICATION] (OId-) menu can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal.
This is a read-only menu that cannot be configured. It enables the following information to be displayed:
• Drive reference, power rating and voltage
• Drive software version
• Drive serial number
• Safety function status and checksum
• Function blocks program and catalogue version
• Type of options present, with their software version
• Graphic display terminal type and version
ENT
RUN Term +50.0 Hz 0.0 A
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 IDENTIFICATION
3 INTERFACE
4 OPEN / SAVE AS
5 PASSWORD
RUN Term +50.0 Hz 0.0 A
2 IDENTIFICATION
ATV320U15M2B
2.2 kW / 3 HP
220 V Single
Appl. software V1.1 IE 01
MC software V1.1 IE 01
<< >> Quick
FFFFFFFFF
Product V1.1 IE 01
SAFETY FUNCTIONS
Drive Safety status Standard
Safe param. CRC 8529
FUNCTION BLOCKS
Prg. format version 1
Catalogue version 1
OPTION 1
No option
GRAPHIC TERMINAL
GRAPHIC S
V1.2IE07
00000000000000000
Overview
30 NVE41295 04/2018
Remote display terminal option
Description of the remote display terminal
This remote display terminal is a local control unit which can be mounted on the door of the wall-mounted or
floor-standing enclosure. It has a cable with connectors, which is connected to the drive serial link (see the
documentation supplied with the remote display terminal). With this remote display terminal, up and down
arrows are used for navigation rather than a jog dial.
(1) If the drive is locked by a code ([PIN code 1] (COd) page 302
), pressing the MODE key enables you to
switch from the [1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-) menu to the [1.1 SPEED REFERENCE] (rEF-) menu and
vice versa.
To activate the keys on the remote display terminal, you first have to configure [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) =
[HMI] (LCC). For more information, see page 154.
1 Four digits display
2 MODE key (1):
Used to switch
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE] (rEF-),
[1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-) and
[1.3 CONFIGURATION] (COnF-)
menus.
3 ESC key
Used to quit a menu/parameter or
remove the currently displayed value in
order to revert to the previous value
retained in the memory
4 RUN key
Executes the function
assuming it has been
configured
5 Navigation keys
6 ENT key
Used to save the current value or
access the selected menu/parameter
8 Key for reversing the direction of
rotation of the motor
7 STOP key
Used to stop the motor and perform a
reset
Overview
NVE41295 04/2018 31
Structure of the parameter tables
The parameter tables contained in the descriptions of the various menus are organized as follows.
Example:
Note: The text in square brackets [ ] indicates what you will see on the graphic display terminal.
A menu followed by the mention "(continued)" appears sometimes to locate you in the structure.
Example:
In this case, the mention "(continued)" indicates that the [APPLICATION FUNCT.] submenu is above the
[PID REGULATOR] submenu in the structure.
A parameter can contain some pictograms. Each pictogram has its legend at the end of the table.
Main mictograms:
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
PId- [PID REGULATOR]
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 162.
PIF [PID feedback ass.]
[No] (nO)
nO
A11
A12
A13
PI
AIU2
OA01
...
OA10
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[Al1] (A11): Analog input A1
[Al2] (A12): Analog input A2
[Al3] (A13): Analog input A3
[RP] (PI): Pulse input
[AI virtual 2] (AIU2): Virtual analog input 2
[OA01] (OA01): Function blocks: Analog Output 01
...
[OA10] (OA10): Function blocks: Analog Output 10
1. Way to access the parameters described in this page 5. Name of submenu on graphic display terminal
2. Submenu code on 4-digit 7-segment display 6. Name of parameter on graphic display terminal
3. Parameter code on 4-digit 7-segment display 7. Value of parameter on graphic display terminal
4. Parameter value on 4-digit 7-segment display
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
PId- [PID REGULATOR]
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 162.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
1
3
2
4
5
6
7
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
2 s
Overview
32 NVE41295 04/2018
Finding a parameter in this document
The following assistance with finding explanations on a parameter is provided:
• With the integrated display terminal and the remote display terminal: Direct use of the parameter code
index, page 323
, to find the page giving details of the displayed parameter.
• With the graphic display terminal: Select the required parameter and press F1 : [Code]. The
parameter code is displayed instead of its name while the key is held down.
Example: ACC
• Then use the parameter code index, page 323, to find the page giving details of the displayed parameter.
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
SETTINGS
Ramp increment : 0.1
Acceleration : 9.51 s
Deceleration : 9.67 s
Low speed : 0.0 Hz
High speed : 50.0 Hz
Code << >> Quick
Code
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
SETTINGS
Ramp increment : 0.1
ACC : 9.51 s
Deceleration : 9.67 s
Low speed : 0.0 Hz
High speed : 50.0 Hz
Code << >> Quick
Overview
NVE41295 04/2018 33
Description of the HMI
Normal display, with no error code displayed and no startup:
Displays the parameter selected in the [1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-) menu (default:
[Frequency ref.] (FrH)).
• InIt: Initialization sequence (only on remote display terminal)
• tUN: AutoTuning
• dCb: Injection braking
• rdY: Drive ready
• nSt: Freewheel stop control
• CLI: Current limit
• FSt: Fast stop
• FLU: Fluxing function is activated
• nLP: Control is powered on but the DC bus is not loaded
• CtL: Controlled stop
A REF mode selected (rEF-) E Dot used to display parameter value (1/10 unit)
B MON mode selected (MOn-) F Current display is parameter value
C CONF mode selected (COnF) G Current display is parameter unit
D Dot used to display parameter value (1/100 unit)
88 8
A
B
C
D
F
G
E
1
3
2
88 8 8
A
B
C
D
F
G
E
3
2
1
8
Functions of the Display and the Keys
1 The ESC key is used for menu navigation (backward) and parameters adjustment (cancel)
2 The Jog dial is used for menu navigation (up or down) and parameters adjustment (increase/decrease
value or element choice). It can be used as Virtual analogic input 1 for drive frequency reference.
3 The ENT key (push on the Jog dial) is used for menu navigation (forward) and parameters adjustment
(validate)
Overview
34 NVE41295 04/2018
• Obr: Adapted deceleration
• SOC: Stand by output cut
• USA: Undervoltage alarm
• SS1: Safety function SS1
• SLS: Safety function SLS
• StO: Safety function STO
• SMS: Safety function SMS
• GdL: Safety function GDL
In the event of a detected error, the display will flash to notify the user accordingly. If a graphic display terminal
is connected, the name of the detected error will be displayed.
Overview
NVE41295 04/2018 35
Structure of the menus
On the 7-segment display, a dash after menu and submenu codes is used to differentiate them from
parameter codes.
Example: [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu, [Acceleration] (ACC) parameter
Selection of multiple assignments for one parameter
Example: List of group 1 alarms in [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu
A number of alarms can be selected by "checking" them as follows.
The digit on the right indicates:
The same principle is used for all multiple selections.
Powering up Parameter selection
This parameter is only visible when
the drive is powered up for the first
time.
The setting can be amended
subsequently in the menu
[MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) for
[Standard mot. freq] (bFr)
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE] (rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-)
[1.3 CONFIGURATION] (COnF)
= ENT
rEF-
MOn-
COnF
bFr
ESC
= ESC
= ENT
ESC
ENT
ESC
ESC
ENT
ENT
ESC
Inr
ESC
= ESC
01
SEt-
ACC
FFM
001
001
selected not selected
Overview
36 NVE41295 04/2018
Setup
38 NVE41295 04/2018
Steps for setting-up the drive
2. Apply input power to the drive, but do not give a run
command.
3. Configure:
• The nominal frequency of the motor
[Standard mot. freq] (bFr) page 86 if this is not 50 Hz.
• The motor parameters in the [MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)
menu, page 105, only if the factory configuration of the drive is
not suitable.
• The application functions in the
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu, page 125
, the
[COMMAND] (CtL-) menu, page 154
, and the
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu, page 167
, only if the
factory configuration of the drive is not suitable.
5. Start the drive.
1. Please refer to the installation manual.
PROGRAMMING
INSTALLATION
4. In the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu, adjust
the following parameters:
• [Acceleration] (ACC), page 87 and
[Deceleration] (dEC), page 87
.
• [Low speed] (LSP), page 87 and
[High speed] (HSP), page 89
.
• [Mot. therm. current] (ItH), page 87.
Tips:
• Before beginning programming, complete the customer
setting tables, page 323
.
• Use the [Restore config.] (FCS) parameter, page 81, to
return to the factory settings at any time.
• To locate the description of a function quickly, use the index
of functions page 321
.
• Before configuring a function, read carefully the "Function
compatibility" section page 165
.
Note: The following operations must be performed for
optimum drive performance in terms of accuracy and
response time:
• Enter the values indicated on the motor rating plate in the
[MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu, page 105
.
• Perform auto-tuning with the motor cold and connected
using the [Auto-tuning] (tUn) parameter, page 87.
Setup
NVE41295 04/2018 39
Initial steps
If the drive was not connected to mains for an extended period of time, the capacitors must be restored to their
full performance before the motor is started.
If the specified procedure cannot be performed without a Run command because of internal mains contactor
control, perform this procedure with the power stage enabled, but the motor being at a standstill so that there
is no appreciable mains current in the capacitors.
Before powering up the drive
Drive locked
If a Run command such as Run forward, Run reverse, DC injection is still active during:
• l A product reset to the factory settings,
• l A manual "Fault Reset" using [Fault Reset] (RsF),
• l A manual "Fault reset" by applying a product switched off and on again,
• l A stop command given by a channel that is not the active channel command (such as Stop key of the
display terminal in 2/3 wires control).
The drive is in a blocking state and displays [Freewheel stop] (nSt). It will be necessary to deactivate all
active Run commands prior to authorizing a new Run command.
Mains contactor
NOTICE
REDUCED CAPACITOR PERFORMANCE
• Apply mains voltage to the drive for one hour before starting the motor if the drive has not been connected
to mains for the following periods of time:
- 12 months at a maximum storage temperature of +50°C (+122°F).
- 24 months at a maximum storage temperature of +45°C (+113°F)
- 36 months at a maximum storage temperature of +40°C (+104°F).
• Verify that no Run command can be applied before the period of one hour has elapsed.
• Verify the date of manufacture if the drive is commissioned for the first time and run the specified
procedure if the date of manufacture is more than 12 months in the past.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Before switching on the device, verify that no unintended signals can be applied to the digital inputs that could
cause unintended movements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
NOTICE
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE
Do not switch on the drive at intervals of less than 60 s.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Setup
40 NVE41295 04/2018
Using a motor with a lower rating or dispensing with a motor altogether
With the factory settings, motor output phase loss detection is active ([Output Phase Loss] (OPL) =
[Yes] (YES), page 256
). To avoid the usage of a motor with the same rating as the drive when testing the
drive or during a maintenance phase, deactivate the motor output phase loss detection
([Output Phase Loss] (OPL) = [No] (nO)). This can prove particularly useful if very large drives are being
tested with a small motor.
Set [Motor control type] (Ctt), page 105
, to [Standard] (Std) in [Motor control menu] (drC-).
NOTICE
MOTOR OVERHEATING
Install external thermal monitoring equipment under the following conditions:
• If a motor with a nominal current of less than 20% of the nominal current of the drive is connected.
• If you use the function Motor Switching.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
If output phase monitoring is disabled, phase loss and, by implication, accidental disconnection of cables,
are not detected.
• Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
NVE41295 04/2018 41
II
Programming
What's in this Part?
This part contains the following chapters:
Incorrect wiring, unsuitable settings or unsuitable data may trigger unanticipated movements, trigger signals
or damage parts and disable monitoring functions.
If the power stage is disabled unintentionally, for example as a result of power outage, errors or functions, the
motor is no longer decelerated in a controlled way.
Chapter Chapter Name Page
4 Reference Mode (rEF) 43
5 Monitoring Mode (MOn) 47
6 Configuration Mode (ConF) 77
7 Interface (ItF) 281
8 Open / Save as (trA) 297
9 Password (COd) 301
10 Multipoint Screen 303
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Do not operate the drive system with unknown settings or data.
• Never modify a parameter unless you fully understand the parameter and all effects of the modification.
• When commissioning the product, carefully run tests for all operating states and potential error situations.
• Verify that a functioning emergency stop push-button is within reach of all persons involved in running
tests.
• Verify the functions after replacing the product and also after making changes to the settings or data.
• Anticipate movements in unintended directions or oscillation of the motor.
• Only operate the system if there are no persons or obstructions in the zone of operation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
WARNING
MOVEMENT WITHOUT BRAKING EFFECT
Verify that movements without braking effect cannot cause injuries or equipment damage
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
42 NVE41295 04/2018
Reference Mode (rEF)
44 NVE41295 04/2018
Introduction
Use the reference mode to monitor and, if the reference channel is the analog input 1 ([Ref.1 channel] (Fr1)
page 154
set to [AI virtual 1] (AIU1)), adjust the actual reference value by modifying the analog input
voltage value.
If local control is enabled ([Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) page 154
set to [HMI] (LCC)), the jog dial on the remote
display terminal or the Up/Down Navigation keys on the remote display terminal acts as a potentiometer to
change the reference value up and down within the limits preset by other parameters ([Low speed] (LSP)
or [High speed] (HSP)).
There is no need to press the ENT key to confirm the change of the reference.
Reference Mode (rEF)
NVE41295 04/2018 45
Organization tree
(1) Depending on the active reference channel
Possible values:
(AIU1)
(LFr)
(MFr)
(rPI)
(FrH)
(rPC)
(2) 2 s or ESC
Displayed parameter value and unit of the diagram are
given as examples.
Value – Unit
ESC
ESC
ENT
ENT
(1)
(2)
= ENT
rEF
51.3 HErt
ESC
= ES
C
Reference Mode (rEF)
46 NVE41295 09/2017
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Menu
(1) It is not necessary to press the ENT key to confirm the modification of the reference.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
drI- [1 DRIVE MENU]
rEF- [1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
Displayed parameters depend on drive settings.
AIU1
g
(1)
[Image input AIV1]
0 to 100% of HSP-LSP 0%
First virtual AI value.
This parameter allows to modify the frequency reference with the embedded jog dial.
LFr
g
(1)
[HMI Frequency ref.]
-599 to +599 Hz 0 Hz
HMI frequency reference (signed value).
This parameter allows to modify the frequency reference with the remote HMI.
MFr [Multiplying coeff.]
0 to 100% 100%
g
Multiply frequency variable.
Multiplying coefficient, can be accessed if [Multiplier ref.-] (MA2,MA3) page 169
has been assigned to the graphic terminal.
rPI [Internal PID ref.]
0 to 32,767 150
g
(1)
PID: Internal reference PI.
This parameter allows to modify the PID internal reference with the jog dial.
Internal PID reference is visible if [PID feedback] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO).
FrH [Frequency ref.]
-599 to +599 Hz -
g
Frequency reference before ramp (signed value).
Actual frequency reference applied to the motor regardless of which reference channel has been selected. This parameter is in
read-only mode.
Frequency reference is visible if the command channel is not HMI or virtual AI.
rPC [PID reference]
0 to 65,535 -
g
PID: Setpoint value.
PID reference is visible if [PID feedback] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO).
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
DRI- > REF-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
48 NVE41295 04/2018
Introduction
The parameters can be accessed when the drive is running or stopped.
Some functions have numerous parameters. In order to clarify programming and avoid having to scroll through
endless parameters, these functions have been grouped in submenus. Like menus, submenus are identified
by a dash after their code.
When the drive is running, the value displayed is one of the monitoring parameters. By default, the value
displayed is the input frequency reference ([Frequency ref.] (FrH) parameter page 50
).
While the value of the new monitoring parameter required is being displayed, press a second time on the jog
dial key to display the units or press and hold down the jog dial (ENT) again (for 2 seconds) to confirm the
change of monitoring parameter and store it. From then on, it is the value of this parameter that will be
displayed during operation (even after powering down).
Unless the new choice is confirmed by pressing and holding down ENT again, the display will revert to the
previous parameter after powering down.
Note: After the drive has been turned off or following a loss of supply mains, the parameter displayed is the
drive status (example: [Ready] (rdY)). The selected parameter is displayed following a run command.
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
NVE41295 04/2018 49
Organization tree
Displayed parameters of the diagram are
given as examples.
(1) Visible only with graphic display
terminal
= ENT
ENT
ESC
Values
units
FrH
ENT
ESC
SPd
UOP
OPr
Otr
LCr
I2tM
(1)
(1)
(1)
rdY
MOn
LFr
StFr
MFr
rFr
ESC
= ESC
FqS
tHr
tHd
MMO-
IOM-
SAF-
MFB-
CMM-
MPI-
PEt-
CnFS
CFPS
ALGr
ALr-
SSt-
dGt-
COd-
ULn
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
50 NVE41295 04/2018
Menu
Code Name / Description Unit
MOn- [1.2 MONITORING]
AIU1 [Image input AIV1]
%
First virtual AI value.
This parameter is read-only. It enables you to display the speed reference applied to the motor.
FrH [Frequency ref.]
Hz
Frequency reference before ramp (signed value).
This parameter is read-only. It enables you to display the speed reference applied to the motor, regardless of which reference
channel has been selected.
StFr [Stator Frequency]
Hz
Displays the estimated stator frequency in Hz (signed value)
LFr [HMI Frequency ref.]
Hz
HMI frequency reference (signed value).
This parameter only appears if the function has been enabled. It is used to change the speed reference from the remote control.
ENT does not have to be pressed to enable a change of reference.
MFr [Multiplying coeff.]
%
g
Multiply frequency variable.
Multiplying coefficient, can be accessed if [Multiplier ref. -] (MA2,MA3) page 169
has been assigned.
MMF [Measured output fr.]
Hz
Measured motor frequency (signed value)
The measured motor speed is displayed if the speed monitoring card has been inserted. (VW3A3620)
rFr [Output frequency]
Hz
Estimated motor frequency (signed value).
FqS [Pulse in. work. freq.]
Hz
g
Measured frequency of the "Pulse input" input (see page 265).
ULn [Mains voltage]
V
Main voltage (from DC bus).
Mains voltage based on DC bus measurement, motor running or stopped.
tHr [Motor thermal state]
%
Motor thermal state.
100% = Nominal thermal state, 118% = "OLF" threshold (motor overload).
tHd [Drv.thermal state]
%
Drive thermal state.
100% = Nominal thermal state, 118% = "OHF" threshold (drive overload).
MMO- [MONIT. MOTOR]
Spd [Motor speed]
rpm
Motor speed in rpm. (Estimated value)
UOP [Motor voltage]
V
Motor voltage. (Estimated value)
Opr [Motor power]
%
Output power monitoring (100% = nominal motor power, estimated value based on current measure).
Otr [Motor torque]
%
Output torque value (100% = nominal motor torque, estimated value based on current measure).
LCr [Motor current]
A
Estimated motor current. (Value measured)
DRI- > MON-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
NVE41295 04/2018 51
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
MOn- [1.2 MONITORING] (continued)
MMO- [MONIT. MOTOR] (continued)
I2tM [I²t overload level]
%
Monitoring of I²t overload level
This parameter can be accessed if [I²t model activation] (
I2tA) is set to [Yes] (YES) see page 219
IOM- [I/O MAP]
LIA- [LOGIC INPUT CONF.]
Logic input functions.
LIA [LI1 assignment]
Read-only parameters, cannot be configured.
It displays all the functions that are assigned to the logic input in order to check for multiple assignments.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] (nO) is displayed. Use the jog dial to scroll through the functions.
The use of graphic display terminal allows to see the delay [LI1 On Delay] (L1d). Possible values are the same than in
configuration menu page 127
.
L2A
to
L6A
LA1A
LA2A
[L-- assignment]
All the logic inputs available on the drive are processed as in the example for LI1 above.
LIS1 [State of logic inputs LI1 to LI6]
Can be used to visualize the state of logic inputs LI1 to LI6 (display segment assignment: high = 1, low = 0).
Example above: LI1 and LI6 are at 1; LI2 to LI5 are at 0.
LIS2 [State of Safe Torque Off]
Can be used to visualize the state of LA1, LA2 and STO (Safe Torque Off) (display segment assignment: high = 1, low = 0).
Example above: LA1 and LA2 are at 0; STO (Safe Torque Off) is at 1.
Code Name / Description Unit
State 1
State 0
LI1 LI2 LI3 LI4 LI5 LI6
State 1
State 0
LA1 LA2 STO
DRI- > MON- > IOM- > LIA-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
52 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
AIA- [ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE]
Analog input functions.
AI1C
[AI1]
V
AI1 customer image: Value of analog input 1.
AI1A [AI1 assignment]
nO
Fr1
Fr2
SA2
PIF
tAA
dA2
PIM
FPI
SA3
Fr1b
dA3
FLOC
MA2
MA3
PES
IA01
...
IA10
AI1 functions assignment. If no functions have been assigned, [No] (nO) is displayed.
Following parameters are visible on the graphic display terminal by pressing the ENT key on the parameter.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[Ref.1 channel] (Fr1): Reference source 1
[Ref.2 channel] (Fr2): Reference source 2
[Summing ref. 2] (SA2): Summing reference 2
[PID feedback] (PIF): PI feedback (PI control)
[Torque limitation] (tAA): Torque limitation: Activation by an analog value
[Subtract. ref. 2] (dA2): Subtracting reference 2
[Manual PID ref.] (PIM): Manual speed reference of the PI(D) regulator (auto-man)
[PID speed ref.] (FPI): Speed reference of the PI(D) regulator (predictive reference)
[Summing ref. 3] (SA3): Summing reference 3
[Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b): Reference source 1B
[Subtract. ref. 3] (dA3): Subtracting reference 3
[Forced local] (FLOC): Forced local reference source
[Ref. 2 multiplier] (MA2): Multiplying reference 2
[Ref. 3 multiplier] (MA3): Multiplying reference 3
[Weight input] (PES): External weight measurement function
[IA01] (IA01): Functions blocks: Analog Input 01
...
[IA10] (IA10): Functions blocks: Analog Input 10
UIL1 [AI1 min value]
V
Voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
UIH1 [AI1 max value]
V
Voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
AI1F [AI1 filter]
s
Interference filtering cut-off time of the low-filter.
AIA- [ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE] (continued)
Analog input functions.
AI2C
[AI2]
V
AI2 customer image: Value of analog input 2.
AI2A [AI2 assignment]
AI2 functions assignment. If no functions have been assigned, [No] (nO) is displayed.
Following parameters are visible on the graphic display terminal by pressing the ENT key on the parameter.
Identical to [AI1 assignment] (AI1A) page 52
.
UIL2 [AI2 min value]
V
Voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
UIH2 [AI2 max value]
V
Voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
AI2F [AI2 filter]
s
Interference filtering cutoff time of the low-filter.
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > IOM- > AIA-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
NVE41295 04/2018 53
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
AIA- [ANALOG INPUTS IMAGE] (continued)
Analog input functions.
AI3C
[AI3]
V
AI3 customer image: Value of analog input 3.
AI3A [AI3 assignment]
AI3 functions assignment. If no functions have been assigned, [No] (nO) is displayed.
Following parameters are visible on the graphic display terminal by pressing the ENT key on the parameter.
Identical to [AI1 assignment] (AI1A) page 52
.
CrL3 [AI3 min value]
mA
Current scaling parameter of 0%.
CrH3 [AI3 max value]
mA
Current scaling parameter of 100%.
AI3F [AI3 filter]
s
Interference filtering cutoff time of the low-filter.
IOM- [I/O MAP] (continued)
AOA- [ANALOG OUTPUTS IMAGE]
Analog output functions.
Following parameters are visible on the graphic display terminal by pressing the ENT key on the parameter.
AO1C
[AO1C]
AO1 customer image: Value of analog output 1.
AO1 [AO1 assignment]
AO1 functions assignment. If no functions have been assigned, [No] (nO) is displayed.
Identical to [AO1 assignment] (AOI) page 144
.
UOL1 [AO1 min Output]
V
g
Voltage scaling parameter of 0%. Can be accessed if [AO1 Type] (AO1t) is set to [Voltage] (10U).
UOH1 [AO1 max Output]
V
g
Voltage scaling parameter of 100%. Can be accessed if [AO1 Type] (AO1t) is set to [Voltage] (10U).
AOL1 [AO1 min output]
mA
g
Current scaling parameter of 0%. Can be accessed if [AO1 Type] (AO1t) is set to [Current] (0A).
AOH1 [AO1 max output]
mA
g
Current scaling parameter of 100%. Can be accessed if [AO1 Type] (AO1t) is set to [Current] (0A).
ASL1 [Scaling AO1 max]
%
Minimum scaling value for AO1.
ASH1 [Scaling AO1 min]
%
Maximum scaling value for AO1.
AO1F [AO1 filter]
s
Cutoff time of the low-filter.
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > IOM- > AIA-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
54 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
IOM- [I/O MAP] (continued)
FSI- [FREQ. SIGNAL IMAGE]
Frequency signal image.
This menu is visible only on graphic display terminal.
PFrC
[RP input]
Hz
Filtered customer pulse input frequency reference.
Following parameters are visible on the graphic display terminal by pressing the ENT key on the parameter.
PIA [RP assignment]
Pulse input assignment. If no functions have been assigned, [No] (nO) is displayed.
Identical to [AI1 assignment] (AI1A) page 52
.
PIL [RP min value]
kHz
RP minimum value. Pulse input scaling parameter of 0%.
PFr [RP max value]
kHz
RP maximum value Pulse input scaling parameter of 100%.
PFI [RP filter]
ms
Interference filtering pulse input cutoff time of the low-filter.
MOn- [1.2 MONITORING] (continued)
SAF- [MONIT. SAFETY]
For more details on Integrated Safety Functions, please refer to dedicated Safety manual.
StOS
IdLE
StO
FLt
[STO status]
Status of the Safe Torque Off safety function.
[Idle] (IdLE): STO not in progress
[Safe stop] (StO): STO in progress
[Fault] (FLt): STO error detected
SLSS
nO
IdLE
WAIt
Strt
SS1
SLS
StO
FLt
[SLS status]
Status of the Safely-limited speed safety function.
[Not config.] (nO): SLS not configured
[Idle] (IdLE): SLS not in progress
[SLS wait time] (WAlt): SLS waiting for activation
[SLS start] (Strt): SLS in transient state
[Safe ramp] (SS1): SLS ramp in progress
[Spd limited] (SLS): SLS speed limitation in progress
[Safe stop] (StO): SLS safe torque off request in progress
[Fault] (FLt): SLS error detected
SS1S
nO
IdLE
SS1
StO
FLt
[SS1 status]
Status of the Safe Stop 1 safety function.
[Not config.] (nO): SS1 not configured
[Idle] (IdLE): SS1 not in progress
[Safe ramp] (SS1): SS1 ramp in progress
[Safe stop] (StO): SS1 safe torque off request in progress
[Fault] (FLt): SS1 error detected
SMSS
nO
oFF
Fti
Fto
[SMS status]
Status of the Safe Maximum Speed safety function.
[Not Set] (nO): SMS not set
[Active] (Off): SMS active
[Internal Err.] (Fti): SMS internal error
[Max Speed] (Fto): Maximum Speed reached
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > IOM- > FSI-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
NVE41295 04/2018 55
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
GdLS
nO
oFF
Std
LGD
oN
LFt
[GDL status]
Status of the Guard Door Locking safety function.
[Not Set] (nO): GDL not set
[Inactive] (Off): GDL inactive
[Short Delay] (Std): Short Delay In Progress
[Long Delay] (LGd): Long Delay In Progress
[Active] (LGd): GDL active
[Internal Err.] (LGd): GDL internal error
SFFE [Safety fault reg.]
Safety function error register.
Bit0 = 1: Logic inputs debounce time-out (verify value of debounce time LIDT according to the application)
Bit1 Reserved
Bit2 = 1: Motor speed sign has changed during SS1 ramp
Bit3 = 1: Motor speed has reached the frequency limit threshold during SS1 ramp.
Bit4: Reserved
Bit5: Reserved
Bit6 = 1: Motor speed sign has changed during SLS limitation
Bit7 = 1: Motor speed has reached the frequency limit threshold during SS1 ramp.
Bit8: Reserved
Bit9: Reserved
Bit10: Reserved
Bit11: Reserved
Bit12: Reserved
Bit13 = 1: Not possible to measure the motor speed (verify the motor wiring connection)
Bit14 = 1: Motor ground short-circuit detected (verify the motor wiring connection)
Bit15 = 1: Motor phase to phase short-circuit detected (verify the motor wiring connection)
MOn- [1.2 MONITORING] (continued)
MFb- [MONIT. FUN. BLOCKS]
For more details on Function Blocks, please refer to dedicated Function Blocks manual.
FbSt
IdLE
CHEC
StOP
InIt
rUn
Err
[FB status]
Function Block Status.
[Idle] (IdLE): Idle state
[Check prog.] (CHEC): Check program state
[Stop] (StOP): STOP state
[Init] (InIt): Initialization state
[Run] (rUn): RUN state
[Error] (Err): Error state
FbFt
nO
Int
bIn
InP
PAr
CAL
tOAU
tOPP
AdL
In
[FB fault]
Status of the function blocks execution.
[No] (nO): No error detected
[Internal] (Int): Internal error detected
[Binary file] (bIn): Binary error detected
[Intern para.] (InP): Internal parameter error detected
[Para. RW] (PAr): Parameter access error detected
[Calculation] (CAL): Calculation error detected
[TO AUX] (tOAU): TimeOut AUX task
[TO synch] (tOPP): TimeOut in PRE/POST task
[Bad ADLC] (AdL): ADLC with bad parameter
[Input assign.] (In): Input not configured
FbI- [FB IDENTIFICATION]
bUEr [Program version]
g
Program user version. Can be accessed if [FB status] (FbSt) is not set to [Idle] (IdLE).
bnS
g
[Program size]
Program file size. Can be accessed if [FB status] (FbSt) is not set to [Idle] (IdLE).
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > SAF-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
56 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
bnU [Prg. format version]
Binary format version of the drive. Can be accessed if [FB status] (FbSt) is not set to [Idle] (IdLE).
CtU [Catalogue version]
Catalog version of the drive.
MOn- [1.2 MONITORING] (continued)
CMM- [COMMUNICATION MAP]
This menu is visible only on graphic display terminal, except for [COM. SCANNER INPUT MAP].(ISA-) and [COM SCAN
MAP].(OSA-) menus.
CMdC
tErM
HMI
Mdb
CAn
tUd
nEt
PS
[Command channel]
Active command channel.
[Terminals] (tErM): Terminals
[HMI] (HMI): Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal
[Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
[CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen®
[+/- speed] (tUd): +/- speed command
[Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
[PC tool] (PS): PC software
CMd [Cmd value]
DRIVECOM command register value.
[Profile] (CHCF) is not set to [I/O profile] (IO), see page 154
.
Possible values in CiA402 profile, separate or not separate mode.
Bit 0: "Switch on"/Contactor command
Bit 1: "Disable voltage"/Authorization to supply AC power
Bit 2: "Quick stop"/Emergency stop
Bit 3: "Enable operation"/Run command
Bit 4 to Bit 6: Reserved (set to 0)
Bit 7: "Fault reset"/error acknowledgment active on 0 to 1 rising edge
Bit 8: Halt Stop according to the [Type of stop] (Stt) parameter without leaving the Operation enabled state
Bit 9: Reserved (set to 0)
Bit 10: Reserved (set to 0)
Bit 11 to Bit 15: Can be assigned to a command
Possible values in the I/O profile.
On state command [2 wire] (2C).
Bit 0: Forward (on state) command
= 0: No forward command
= 1: Forward command
The assignment of bit 0 cannot be modified. It corresponds to the assignment of the terminals. It can be switched. Bit 0 (Cd00)
is only active if the channel of this control word is active.
Bit 1 to Bit 15: Can be assigned to commands.
On edge command [3 wire] (3C).
Bit 0: Stop (run authorization).
= 0: Stop
= 1: Run is authorized on a forward or reverse command
Bit 1: Forward (on 0 to 1 rising edge) command
The assignment of bits 0 and 1 cannot be modified. It corresponds to the assignment of the terminals. It can be switched. Bits 0
(Cd00) and 1 (Cd01) are only active if the channel of this control word is active.
Bit 2 to Bit 15: Can be assigned to commands
rFCC
tErM
LOC
HMI
Mdb
CAn
tUd
nEt
PS
[Active ref. channel]
HMI reference channel.
[Terminals] (tErM): Terminals
[Local] (LOC): Jog dial
[HMI] (HMI): Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal
[Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
[CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen®
[tUd] (tUd): +/- speed command
[Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
[PC tool] (PS): PC software
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > FBI-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
NVE41295 04/2018 57
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
FrH [Frequency ref.]
Hz
Frequency reference before ramp.
EtA [ETA state word]
DRIVECOM status word.
Possible values in CiA402 profile, separate or not separate mode.
Bit 0: "Ready to switch on", awaiting power section supply mains
Bit 1: "Switched on", ready
Bit 2: "Operation enabled", running
Bit 3: "Fault"
= 0: No fault
= 1: Fault
Bit 4: "Voltage enabled", power section supply mains present
= 0: Power section supply mains absent
= 1: Power section supply mains present
When the drive is powered by the power section only, this bit is always at 1.
Bit 5: Quick stop/Emergency stop
Bit 6: "Switched on disabled", power section supply mains locked
Bit 7: Alarm
= 0: No alarm
= 1: Alarm
Bit 8: Reserved (= 0)
Bit 9: Remote: command or reference via the network
= 0: Command or reference via the graphic display terminal or the remote display terminal
= 1: Command or reference via the network
Bit 10: Target reference reached
= 0: The reference is not reached
= 1: The reference has been reached
When the drive is in speed mode, this is the speed reference.
Bit 11: "Internal limit active", reference outside limits
= 0: The reference is within the limits
= 1: The reference is not within the limits
When the drive is in speed mode, the limits are defined by the [Low speed] (LSP) and [High speed] (HSP) parameters.
Bit 12 and Bit 13: Reserved (= 0)
Bit 14: "Stop key", STOP via stop key
= 0: STOP key not pressed
= 1: Stop triggered by the STOP key on the graphic display terminal or the remote display terminal
Bit 15: "Direction", direction of rotation
= 0: Forward rotation at output
= 1: Reverse rotation at output
The combination of bits 0, 1, 2, 4, 5 and 6 defines the state in the DSP 402 state chart (see the Communication manuals).
Possible values in the I/O profile.
Note: The value is identical in the CiA402 profile and the I/O profile. In the I/O profile, the description of the values is simplified
and does not refer to the CiA402 (Drivecom) state chart.
Bit 0: Reserved (= 0 or 1)
Bit 1: Ready
= 0: Not ready
= 1: Ready
Bit 2: Running
= 0: The drive will not start if a reference other than zero is applied.
= 1: Running, if a reference other than zero is applied, the drive can start.
Bit 3: Fault
= 0: No fault
= 1: Fault
Bit 4: Power section supply mains present
= 0: Power section supply mains absent
= 1: Power section supply mains present
Bit 5: Reserved (= 1)
Bit 6: Reserved (= 0 or 1)
Bit 7: Alarm
= 0: No alarm
= 1: Alarm
Bit 8: Reserved (= 0)
Bit 9: Command via a network
= 0: Command via the terminals or the graphic display terminal
= 1: Command via a network
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > CMM-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
58 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Bit 10: Reference reached
= 0: The reference is not reached
= 1: The reference has been reached
Bit 11: Reference outside limits
= 0: The reference is within the limits
= 1: The reference is not within the limits
When the drive is in speed mode, the limits are defined by LSP and HSP parameters.
Bit 12 and Bit 13: Reserved (= 0)
Bit 14: Stop via STOP key
= 0: STOP key not pressed
= 1: Stop triggered by the STOP key on the graphic display terminal or the remote display terminal
Bit 15: Direction of rotation
= 0: Forward rotation at output
= 1: Reverse rotation at output
Mnd- [MODBUS NETWORK DIAG]
Modbus network diagnostic.
Mdb1 [COM LED]
View of the Modbus Communication.
M1Ct [Mb NET frames nb.]
Modbus network frame counter: Number of processed frames.
M1EC [Mb NET CRC errors]
Modbus network CRC error counter: Number of CRC errors.
CMM- [COMMUNICATION MAP] (continued)
ISA- [COM. SCANNER INPUT MAP]
Used for CANopen® and Modbus Network.
nM1 [Com Scan In1 val.]
Value of the 1st input word.
nM2 [Com Scan In2 val.]
Value of the 2nd input word.
nM3 [Com Scan In3 val.]
Value of the 3rd input word.
nM4 [Com Scan In4 val.]
Value of the 4th input word.
nM5 [Com Scan In5 val.]
Value of the 5th input word.
nM6 [Com Scan In6 val.]
Value of the 6th input word.
nM7 [Com Scan In7 val.]
Value of the 7th input word.
nM8 [Com Scan In8 val.]
Value of the 8th input word.
CMM- [COMMUNICATION MAP] (continued)
OSA- [COM SCAN MAP]
nC1 [Com Scan Out1 val.]
Value of the 1st output word.
nC2 [Com Scan Out2 val.]
Value of the 2nd output word.
nC3 [Com Scan Out3 val.]
Value of the 3rd output word.
nC4 [Com Scan Out4 val.]
Value of the 4th output word.
nC5 [Com Scan Out5 val.]
Value of the 5th output word.
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > CMM-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
NVE41295 04/2018 59
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
nC6 [Com Scan Out6 val.]
Value of the 6th output word.
nC7 [Com Scan Out7 val.]
Value of the 7th output word.
nC8 [Com Scan Out8 val.]
Value of the 8th output word.
CMM- [COMMUNICATION MAP] (continued)
CI- [CMD. WORD IMAGE]
Command word image: Only accessible via graphic display terminal.
CMd1 [Modbus cmd.]
Modbus command word image.
CMd2 [CANopen cmd.]
CANopen® command word image.
CMd3 [COM. card cmd.]
Communication card command word image.
CMM- [COMMUNICATION MAP] (continued)
rI- [FREQ. REF. WORD MAP]
Frequency reference image: Only accessible via graphic display terminal.
LFr1 [Modbus ref.]
Hz
Modbus frequency reference image.
LFr2 [CANopen ref.]
Hz
CANopen® frequency reference image.
LFr3 [Com. card ref.]
Hz
Communication card frequency reference image.
CMM- [COMMUNICATION MAP] (continued)
CnM- [CANopen MAP]
CANopen® image: Only accessible via graphic display terminal.
COn [RUN LED]
View of the CANopen® RUN Led Status.
CAnE [ERR LED]
View of the CANopen® Error Led Status.
PO1-
[PDO1 IMAGE]
View of the RPDO1 and TPDO1.
rp11 [Received PDO1-1]
g
First frame of the received PDO1.
rp12 [Received PDO1-2]
g
Second frame of the received PDO1.
rp13 [Received PDO1-3]
g
Third frame of the received PDO1.
rp14 [Received PDO1-4]
g
Fourth frame of the received PDO1.
tp11 [Transmit PDO1-1]
g
First frame of the transmit PDO1.
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > CMM- > OSA-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
60 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
tp12 [Transmit PDO1-2]
g
Second frame of the transmit PDO1.
tp13 [Transmit PDO1-3]
g
Third frame of the transmit PDO1.
tp14 [Transmit PDO1-4]
g
Fourth frame of the transmit PDO1.
CnM- [CANopen MAP] (continued)
CANopen® image: Only accessible via graphic display terminal.
PO2- [PDO2 IMAGE]
View of the RPDO2 and TPDO2: Same structure as [PDO1 IMAGE] (PO1-).
rp21 [Received PDO2-1]
g
First frame of the received PDO2.
rp22 [Received PDO2-2]
g
Second frame of the received PDO2.
rp23 [Received PDO2-3]
g
Third frame of the received PDO2.
rp24 [Received PDO2-4]
g
Fourth frame of the received PDO2.
tp21 [Transmit PDO2-1]
g
First frame of the transmit PDO2.
tp22 [Transmit PDO2-2]
g
Second frame of the transmit PDO2.
tp23 [Transmit PDO2-3]
g
Third frame of the transmit PDO2.
tp24 [Transmit PDO2-4]
g
Fourth frame of the transmit PDO2.
CnM- [CANopen MAP] (continued)
CANopen® image: Only accessible via graphic display terminal.
PO3- [PDO3 IMAGE]
View of the RPDO3 and TPDO3: Same structure as [PDO1 IMAGE] (PO1-).
rp31 [Received PDO3-1]
g
First frame of the received PDO3.
rp32 [Received PDO3-2]
g
Second frame of the received PDO3.
rp33 [Received PDO3-3]
g
Third frame of the received PDO3.
rp34 [Received PDO3-4]
g
Fourth frame of the received PDO3.
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > CMM- > CNM- > P01-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
NVE41295 04/2018 61
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
tp31 [Transmit PDO3-1]
g
First frame of the transmit PDO3.
tp32 [Transmit PDO3-2]
g
Second frame of the transmit PDO3.
tp33 [Transmit PDO3-3]
g
Third frame of the transmit PDO3.
tp34 [Transmit PDO3-4]
g
Fourth frame of the transmit PDO3.
CnM- [CANopen MAP] (continued)
CANopen® image: Only accessible via graphic display terminal.
nMtS [Canopen NMT state]
bOOt
StOP
OPE
POPE
Drive NMT State of the CANopen® slave.
[Boot] (bOOt): Bootup
[Stopped] (StOP): Stopped
[Operation] (OPE): Operational
[Pre-op] (POPE): Pre-Operational
nbtp [Number of TX PDO]
Number of transmit PDO.
nbrp [Number of RX PDO]
Number of receive PDO.
ErCO [Error code]
CANopen® error register (from 1 to 5).
rEC1 [RX Error Counter]
Controller Rx error counter (not stored at power off).
tEC1 [TX error counter]
Controller Tx error counter (not stored at power off).
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > CMM- > CNM- > P03-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
62 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
MOn- [1.2 MONITORING] (continued)
MpI-
g
[MONIT. PI]
PID management. Visible if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is not set to [No] (nO).
rPI
g
[Internal PID ref.]
Internal PID reference: As a process value.
rpE [PID error]
g
PID error value.
rpF [PID feedback]
g
PID feedback value.
rpC [PID reference]
g
PID setpoint value via graphic display terminal.
rpO [PID Output]
Hz
PID output value with limitation.
MOn- [1.2 MONITORING] (continued)
pEt- [MONIT. POWER TIME]
ApH [Consumption]
Wh, kWh, MWh
Energy consumption in Wh, kWh or MWh (accumulated consumption).
If you read this parameter via fieldbus, the unit of this parameter is given by the parameter [Unit] (UNT). See the Communication
Parameters file.
rtH [Run time]
s, min, h
Run elapsed time display (resetable) in seconds, minutes or hours (length of time the motor has been switched on).
If you read this parameter via fieldbus, the unit of this parameter is given by the parameter [Unit] (UNT). See the Communication
Parameters file.
ptH [Power on time]
s, min, h
Power elapsed time display in seconds, minutes or hours (length of time the drive has been switched on).
If you read this parameter via fieldbus, the unit of this parameter is given by the parameter [Unit] (UNT). See the Communication
Parameters file.
rpr [Operating t. reset]
Reset of run elapsed time.
nO
APH
rtH
PtH
[No] (nO): Reset operation not in progress
[Reset kWh] (APH): Clear [Reset kWh] (APH)
[rst. runtime] (rtH): Clear [rst. runtime] (rtH)
[rst. P On t.] (PtH): Clear [rst. P On t.] (PtH)
MOn- [1.2 MONITORING] (continued)
CnFS
nO
CnF0
CnF1
CnF2
[Config. active]
View of the active configuration.
[In progress] (nO): Transitory state (configuration changing)
[Config. n°0] (CnF0): Configuration 0 active
[Config. n°1] (CnF1): Configuration 1 active
[Config. n°2] (CnF2): Configuration 2 active
CFpS [Utilised param. set]
g
Configuration parameter status (can be accessed if parameter switching has been enabled, see page 229).
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > MPI-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
NVE41295 04/2018 63
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
nO
CFP1
CFP2
CFP3
[None] (nO): Not assigned
[Set N°1] (CFP1): Parameter set 1 active
[Set N°2] (CFP2): Parameter set 2 active
[Set N°3] (CFP3): Parameter set 3 active
ALGr
---
1--
-2-
12-
--3
1-3
-23
123
[Alarm groups]
Current impacted alarm group numbers.
Group of alarms could be user defined in [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) page 125
.
[---] (---): No alarm group impacted
[1--] (1--): Alarm group 1
[-2-] (-2-): Alarm group 2
[12-] (12-): Alarm group 1 and 2
[--3] (--3): Alarm group 3
[1-3] (1-3): Alarm group 1 and 3
[-23] (-23): Alarm group 2 and 3
[123] (123): Alarm group 1, 2 and 3
SPd1
or
SPd2
or
QSPd3
[Cust. output value]
[Cust. output value] (SPd1), [Cust. output value] (SPd2) or [Cust. output value] (SPd3) depending on the [Scale factor
display] (
SdS) parameter, page 104 ([Cust. output value] (SPd3) in the factory setting)
ALr- [ALARMS]
List of current alarms.
If an alarm is present, a appears on the graphic display terminal.
nOAL
PtCL
EtF
USA
CtA
FtA
F2A
SrA
tSA
tS2
tS3
UPA
FLA
tHA
AG1
AG2
AG3
PEE
PFA
AP3
SSA
tAd
tJA
bOA
ULA
OLA
rSdA
ttHA
ttLA
dLdA
FqLA
[No alarm] (nOAL)
[PTC alarm] (PtCL)
[External fault] (EtF)
[UnderV. al.] (USA)
[I attained] (CtA)
[Freq. Th. attain.] (FtA)
[Freq. Th. 2 attained] (F2A)
[Freq.ref.att] (SrA)
[Th.mot. att.] (tSA)
[Th.mot2 att.] (tS2)
[Th.mot3 att.] (tS3)
[Underv. prev.] (UPA)
[HSP attain.] (FLA)
[Al. °C drv] (tHA)
[Alarm group 1] (AG1)
[Alarm group 2] (AG2)
[Alarm group 3]
(AG3)
[PID error al] (PEE)
[PID fdbk al.] (PFA)
[AI3 Al. 4-20mA] (AP3)
[Lim T/I att.] (SSA)
[Th.drv.att.] (tAd)
[IGBT alarm] (tJA)
[Brake R. al.] (bOA)
[Underload. Proc. Al.] (ULA)
[Overload. Proc. Al.] (OLA)
[Rope slack alarm] (rSdA)
[High torque alarm] (ttHA)
[Low torque alarm] (ttLA)
[Dynamic load alarm] (dLdA)
[Freq. meter Alarm] (FqLA)
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > ALR-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
64 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
SSt- [OTHER STATE]
List of secondary states.
This menu is visible only on graphic display terminal.
FL
PtCL
FSt
CtA
FtA
F2A
SrA
tSA
EtF
AUtO
FtL
tUn
USA
CnF1
CnF2
FLA
CFP1
CFP2
CFP3
brS
dbL
ttHA
ttLA
MFrd
MrrS
FqLA
[In motor fluxing] (FL )
[PTC Alarm] (PtCL)
[Fast stop in prog.] (FSt)
[Current Th. attained] (CtA)
[Freq. Th. attained] (FtA)
[Freq. Th. 2 attained] (F2A)
[Frequency ref. att.] (SrA)
[Motor th. state att.] (tSA)
[External fault alarm] (EtF)
[Auto restart] (AUtO)
[Remote] (FtL)
[Auto-tuning] (tUn)
[Undervoltage] (USA)
[Config. 1 act.] (CnF1)
[Config. 2 act.] (CnF2)
[HSP attained] (FLA)
[Set 1 active] (
CFP1)
[Set 2 active] (CFP2)
[Set 3 active] (CFP3)
[In braking] (brS)
[DC bus loading] (dbL)
[High torque alarm] (ttHA)
[Low torque alarm] (ttLA)
[Forward] (MFrd)
[Reverse] (MrrS)
[Freq. metre Alarm] (FqLA)
dGt- [DIAGNOSTICS]
This menu is visible only on graphic display terminal.
pFH- [FAULT HISTORY]
Shows the 8 last detected faults.
dP1 [Past fault 1]
nOF
ASF
bLF
brF
CFF
CFI2
CnF
COF
CrF
CSF
dLF
EEF1
EEF2
EPF1
EPF2
FbE
FbES
FCF1
FCF2
HCF
HdF
ILF
InF1
InF2
InF3
InF4
InF6
InF9
Fault record 1 (1 is last).
[No fault] (nOF): No detected fault stored
[Angle error] (ASF): Angle setting detected fault
[Brake control] (bLF): Brake's motor 3-phases loss
[Brake feedback] (brF): Brake contactor detected error
[Incorrect config.] (CFF): Invalid configuration at power on
[Bad conf] (CFI2): Configuration transfer detected error
[Com. network] (CnF): NET option communication interruption
[CAN com.] (COF): CANopen® communication interruption
[Capa.charg] (CrF): Load relay detected fault
[Ch.sw. fault] (CSF): Channel switching detected error
[Load fault] (dLF): Dynamic load detected error
[Control EEprom] (EEF1): Control EEprom detected error
[Power Eeprom] (EEF2): Power EEprom detected error
[External fault LI/Bit]
(EPF1): External detected fault from LI or local link
[External fault com.] (EPF2): External interruption from communication board
[FB fault] (FbE): Function block detected error
[FB stop fly.] (FbES): Function block stop detected error
[Out. contact. stuck] (FCF1): Output contactor: closed contactor
[Out. contact. open.] (FCF2): Output contactor: opened contactor
[Cards pairing] (HCF): Hardware configuration detected error
[IGBT desaturation] (HdF): Hardware detected error
[Option int link] (ILF): Option internal link interruption
[Rating error] (InF1): Unknown drive rating
[PWR Calib.] (InF2): Unknown or incompatible power board
[Int.serial link] (InF3): Internal serial link communication interruption
[Int.Mfg area] (InF4): Invalid industrialization zone
[Internal-option] (InF6): Unknown or incompatible option board
[Internal- I measure] (InF9): Current measurement circuit detected error
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > SST-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
NVE41295 04/2018 65
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
InFA
InFb
InFE
LCF
LFF3
ObF
OCF
OHF
OLC
OLF
OPF1
OPF2
OSF
OtFL
PHF
PtFL
SAFF
SCF1
SCF3
SCF4
SCF5
SLF1
SLF2
SLF3
SOF
SPF
SSF
tJF
tnF
ULF
USF
[Internal-mains circuit] (InFA): Input phase loss circuit detected error
[Internal- th. sensor] (InFb): Thermal sensor detected error (OC or SC)
[Internal-CPU] (InFE): CPU detected fault (ram, flash, task ...)
[Input contactor] (LCF): Line contactor detected error
[AI3 4-20mA loss] (LFF3): AI3 4-20 mA loss
[Overbraking] (ObF): Overbraking
[Overcurrent] (OCF): Overcurrent
[Drive overheat] (OHF): Drive overheating
[Proc.Overload Flt] (OLC): Torque overload
[Motor overload] (OLF): Motor overload
[1 output phase loss] (OPF1): Motor 1-phase loss
[3out ph loss] (OPF2): Motor 3-phases loss
[Mains overvoltage]
(OSF): Oversupply detected fault
[PTC fault] (OtFL): Motor overheating detected error from PTCL: standard product
[Input phase loss] (PHF): Main input 1-phase loss
[LI6=PTC probe] (PtFL): PTCL detected error (OC or SC)
[Safety] (SAFF): Safety function
[Motor short circuit] (SCF1): Motor short circuit (hard detection)
[Ground short circuit] (SCF3): Direct ground short-circuit (hard detection)
[IGBT short circuit] (SCF4): IGBT short-circuit (hard detection)
[Motor short circuit] (SCF5): Load short-circuit during Igon load sequence (hard detection)
[Modbus com.] (SLF1): Modbus local serial communication interruption
[PC com.] (SLF2): PC Software communication interruption
[HMI com.] (SLF3): Remote terminal communication interruption
[Overspeed] (SOF): Overspeed
[Speed fdback loss] (SPF): Speed feedback loss
[Torque/current lim] (SSF): Torque current limitation detected fault
[IGBT overheat] (tJF): IGBT overheating
[Auto-tuning] (tnF): Tune detected fault
[Pr.Underload Flt] (ULF
): Torque underload
[Undervoltage] (USF): Undervoltage
HS1 [Drive state]
tUn
dCb
rdY
nSt
rUn
ACC
dEC
CLI
FSt
FLU
nLP
CtL
Obr
SOC
USA
tC
St
FA
YES
EP
FLt
SS1
SLS
StO
SMS
GdL
HMI Status of the detected fault record 1.
[Auto-tuning] (tUn): Auto-tuning
[In DC inject.] (dCb): Injection braking
[Ready] (rdY): Drive ready
[Freewheel] (nSt): Freewheel stop control
[Drv running] (rUn): Motor in steady state or run command present and zero reference
[In accel.] (ACC): Acceleration
[In decel.] (dEC): Deceleration
[Current lim.] (CLI): Current limit
(in case of using a synchronous motor, if the motor does not start, follow the procedure page 112
)
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
[Mot. fluxing] (FLU): Fluxing function is activated
[no mains V.] (nLP): Control is powered on but the DC bus is not loaded
[control.stop] (CtL): Controlled stop
[Dec. adapt.] (Obr): Adapted deceleration
[Output cut] (SOC): Stand by output cut
[UnderV. al.] (USA): Undervoltage alarm
[In mfg. test] (tC): TC indus mode activated
[in autotest] (St): Self test in progress
[autotest err] (FA): Self test detected error
[Autotest OK] (YES): Self test OK
[eeprom test] (EP): Self test Eeprom detected error
[In fault] (FLt): Product has detected a fault
[SS1 active] (SS1): Safety function SS1
[SLS active] (SLS): Safety function SLS
[STO active] (StO): Safety function STO
[SMS active] (SMS): Safety function SMS
[GdL active] (Gdl): Safety function GdL
Ep1 [ETA state word]
DRIVECOM status register of detected fault record 1 (same as [ETA state word] (EtA) page 57).
IP1 [ETI state word]
Extended status register of detected fault record 1 (see the communication parameters file).
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > DGT- > PFH-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
66 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
CMP1 [Cmd word]
Command register of detected fault record 1 (same as [Cmd word] (CMd) page 56).
LCP1 [Motor current]
A
Estimated motor current of detected fault record 1 (same as [Motor current] (LCr) page 50).
rFp1 [Output frequency]
Hz
Estimated motor frequency of detected fault record 1 (same as [Output frequency] (rFr) page 50).
rtp1 [Elapsed time]
h
Elapsed run time of detected fault record 1 (same as [Elapsed time] (rtH) page 62).
ULp1 [Mains voltage]
V
Main voltage of detected fault record 1 (same as [Mains voltage] (ULn) page 50).
tHP1 [Motor thermal state]
%
Motor thermal state of detected fault record 1 (same as [Motor thermal state] (tHr) page 50).
dCC1 [Command Channel]
Command channel of detected fault record 1 (same as [Command channel] (CMdC) page 56).
drC1 [Channel ref. active]
Reference channel of detected fault record 1 (same as [Channel ref. active] (rFCC) page 56).
Sr11 [Saf01 Reg n-1]
SAF1 Register x (1 is last)
Sr21 [Saf02 Reg n-1]
SAF2 Register x (1 is last)
SrA1 [SF00 Reg n-1]
SF00 Register x (1 is last)
Srb1 [SF01 Reg n-1]
SF01 Register x (1 is last)
SrC1 [SF02 Reg n-1]
SF02 Register x (1 is last)
Srd1 [SF03 Reg n-1]
SF03 Register x (1 is last)
SrE1 [SF04 Reg n-1]
SF04 Register x (1 is last)
SrF1 [SF05 Reg n-1]
SF05 Register x (1 is last)
SrG1 [SF06 Reg n-1]
SF06 Register x (1 is last)
SrH1 [SF07 Reg n-1]
SF07 Register x (1 is last)
SrI1 [SF08 Reg n-1]
SF08 Register x (1 is last)
SrJ1 [SF09 Reg n-1]
SF09 Register x (1 is last)
srk1 [SF10 Reg n-1]
SF10 Register x (1 is last)
SrL1 [SF11 Reg n-1]
SF11 Register x (1 is last)
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > DGT- > PFH-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
NVE41295 04/2018 67
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
pFH- [FAULT HISTORY] (continued)
Shows the 8 last detected faults.
dP2 [Past fault 2]
[Saf1 Reg n-2] (Sr12), [Saf2 Reg n-2] (Sr22), [SF00 Reg n-2] (SrA2), [SF01 Reg n-2] (Srb2),
and [SF02 Reg n-2] (SrC2) to [SF11 Reg n-2] (SrL2) may be visible with this parameter.
Identical to [Past fault 1] (dP1) page 64
.
dP3
[Past fault 3]
[Saf1 Reg n-3] (Sr13), [Saf2 Reg n-3] (Sr23), [SF00 Reg n-3] (SrA3), [SF01 Reg n-3] (Srb3),
and [SF02 Reg n-3] (SrC3) to [SF11 Reg n-3] (SrL3) may be visible with this parameter.
Identical to [Past fault 1] (dP1) page 64
.
dP4
[Past fault 4]
[Saf1 Reg n-4] (Sr14), [Saf2 Reg n-4] (Sr24), [SF00 Reg n-4] (SrA4), [SF01 Reg n-4] (Srb4),
and [SF02 Reg n-4] (SrC4) to [SF11 Reg n-4] (SrL4) may be visible with this parameter.
Identical to [Past fault 1] (dP1) page 64
.
dP5
[Past fault 5]
[Saf1 Reg n-5] (Sr15), [Saf2 Reg n-5] (Sr25), [SF00 Reg n-5] (SrA5), [SF01 Reg n-5] (Srb5),
and [SF02 Reg n-5] (SrC5) to [SF11 Reg n-5] (SrL5) may be visible with this parameter.
Identical to [Past fault 1] (dP1) page 64
.
dP6 [Past fault 6]
[Saf1 Reg n-6] (Sr16), [Saf2 Reg n-6] (Sr26), [SF00 Reg n-6] (SrA6), [SF01 Reg n-6] (Srb6),
and [SF02 Reg n-6] (SrC6) to [SF11 Reg n-6] (SrL6) may be visible with this parameter.
Identical to [Past fault 1] (dP1) page 64
.
dP7 [Past fault 7]
[Saf1 Reg n-7] (Sr17), [Saf2 Reg n-7] (Sr27), [SF00 Reg n-7] (SrA7), [SF01 Reg n-7] (Srb7),
and [SF02 Reg n-7] (SrC7) to [SF11 Reg n-7] (SrL7) may be visible with this parameter.
Identical to [Past fault 1] (dP1) page 64
.
dP8 [Past fault 8]
[Saf1 Reg n-8] (Sr18), [Saf2 Reg n-8] (Sr28), [SF00 Reg n-8] (SrA8), [SF01 Reg n-8] (Srb8),
and [SF02 Reg n-8] (SrC8) to [SF11 Reg n-8] (SrL8) may be visible with this parameter.
Identical to [Past fault 1] (dP1) page 64
.
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > DGT- > PFH-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
68 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
dGt- [DIAGNOSTICS] (continued)
PFL- [CURRENT FAULT LIST]
nOF
ASF
bLF
brF
CFF
CFI2
CnF
COF
CrF
CSF
dLF
EEF1
EEF2
EPF1
EPF2
FbE
FbES
FCF1
FCF2
HCF
HdF
ILF
InF1
InF2
InF3
InF4
InF6
InF9
InFA
InFb
InFE
LCF
LFF3
ObF
OCF
OHF
OLC
OLF
OPF1
OPF2
OSF
OtFL
PHF
PtFL
SAFF
SCF1
SCF3
SCF4
SCF5
SLF1
SLF2
SLF3
SOF
SPF
SSF
tJF
tnF
ULF
USF
[No fault] (nOF): No detected fault stored
[Angle error] (ASF): Angle setting detected fault
[Brake control] (bLF): Brake's motor 3-phases loss
[Brake feedback] (brF): Brake contactor detected error
[Incorrect config.] (CFF): Invalid configuration at power on
[Bad conf] (CFI2): Configuration transfer detected error
[Com. network] (CnF): NET option communication interruption
[CAN com.] (COF): CANopen® communication interruption
[Capa.charg] (CrF): Load relay detected fault
[Ch.sw. fault]
(CSF): Channel switching detected error
[Load fault] (dLF): Dynamic load detected error
[Control EEprom] (EEF1): Control EEprom detected error
[Power Eeprom] (EEF2): Power EEprom detected error
[External fault LI/Bit] (EPF1): External detected fault from LI or local link
[External fault com.] (EPF2): External interruption from communication board
[FB fault] (FbE): Function block detected error
[FB stop fly.] (FbES): Function block stop detected error
[Out. contact. stuck] (FCF1): Output contactor: closed contactor
[Out. contact. open.] (FCF2): Output contactor: opened contactor
[Cards pairing] (HCF): Hardware configuration detected error
[IGBT desaturation] (HdF): Hardware detected error
[Option int link] (ILF): Option internal link interruption
[Rating error] (InF1): Unknown drive rating
[PWR Calib.] (InF2): Unknown or incompatible power board
[Int.serial link] (InF3): Internal serial link communication interruption
[Int.Mfg area] (InF4): Invalid industrialization zone
[Internal-option] (InF6): Unknown or incompatible option board
[Internal- I measure] (InF9): Current measurement circuit detected error
[Internal-mains circuit] (InFA): Input phase loss circuit detected error
[Internal- th. sensor] (InFb): Thermal sensor detected error (OC or SC)
[Internal-CPU] (InFE): CPU detected fault (ram, flash, task ...)
[Input contactor] (LCF): Line contactor detected error
[AI3 4-20mA loss] (LFF3): AI3 4-20 mA loss
[Overbraking] (ObF): Overbraking
[Overcurrent] (OCF): Overcurrent
[Drive overheat] (OHF): Drive overheating
[Proc.Overload Flt] (OLC): Torque overload
[Motor overload] (OLF): Motor overload
[1 output phase loss] (OPF1): Motor 1-phase loss
[3out ph loss] (OPF2): Motor 3-phases loss
[Mains overvoltage] (OSF): Oversupply detected fault
[PTC fault] (OtFL): Motor overheating detected error from PTCL: standard product
[Input phase loss] (PHF
): Main input 1-phase loss
[LI6=PTC probe] (PtFL): PTCL detected error (OC or SC)
[Safety] (SAFF): Safety function
[Motor short circuit] (SCF1): Motor short circuit (hard detection)
[Ground short circuit] (SCF3): Direct ground short-circuit (hard detection)
[IGBT short circuit] (SCF4): IGBT short-circuit (hard detection)
[Motor short circuit] (SCF5): Load short-circuit during Igon load sequence (hard detection)
[Modbus com.] (SLF1): Modbus local serial communication interruption
[PC com.] (SLF2): PC Software communication interruption
[HMI com.] (SLF3): Remote terminal communication interruption
[Overspeed] (SOF): Overspeed
[Speed fdback loss] (SPF): Speed feedback loss
[Torque/current lim] (SSF): Torque current limitation detected fault
[IGBT overheat] (tJF): IGBT overheating
[Auto-tuning] (tnF): Tune detected fault
[Pr.Underload Flt] (ULF): Torque underload
[Undervoltage] (USF): Undervoltage
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > PFL-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
NVE41295 04/2018 69
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
AFI- [MORE FAULT INFO]
Additional detected fault information.
CnF [Network fault]
Communication option card fault code.
This parameter is read-only. The fault code remains saved in the parameter, even if the cause disappears. The parameter is reset
after the drive is disconnected and then reconnected. The values of this parameter depend on the network card. Consult the
manual for the corresponding card.
ILF1 [Internal link fault 1]
Communication interruption between option card 1 and drive.
This parameter is read-only. The fault code remains saved in the parameter, even if the cause disappears. The parameter is reset
after the drive is disconnected and then reconnected.
SFFE [Safety fault reg.] (1)
Safety function fault error register.
Bit0 = 1: Logic inputs debounce time-out (verify value of debounce time LIDT according to the application)
Bit1 Reserved
Bit2 = 1: Motor speed sign has changed during SS1 ramp
Bit3 = 1: Motor speed has reached the frequency limit threshold during SS1 ramp.
Bit4: Reserved
Bit5: Reserved
Bit6 = 1: Motor speed sign has changed during SLS limitation
Bit7 = 1: Motor speed has reached the frequency limit threshold during SS1 ramp.
Bit8: Reserved
Bit9: Reserved
Bit10: Reserved
Bit11: Reserved
Bit12: Reserved
Bit13 = 1: Not possible to measure the motor speed (verify the motor wiring connection)
Bit14 = 1: Motor ground short-circuit detected (verify the motor wiring connection)
Bit15 = 1: Motor phase to phase short-circuit detected (verify the motor wiring connection)
SAF1 [Safety fault Reg1] (1)
Safety fault register 1.
Application control error register.
Bit0 = 1: PWRM consistency detected error
Bit1 = 1: Safety functions parameters detected error
Bit2 = 1: Application auto test has detected an error
Bit3 = 1: Diagnostic verification of safety function has detected an error
Bit4 = 1: Logical input diagnostic has detected an error
Bit5 = 1: SMS or GDL safety functions detected error (Details in [SAFF Subcode 4] SF04 register page 71
)
Bit6 = 1: Application watchdog management active
Bit7 = 1: Motor control detected error
Bit8 = 1: Internal serial link core detected error
Bit9 = 1: Logical input activation detected error
Bit10 = 1: Safe Torque Off function has triggered an error
Bit11 = 1: Application interface has detected an error of the safety functions
Bit12 = 1: Safe Stop 1 function has detected an error of the safety functions
Bit13 = 1: Safely Limited Speed function has triggered an error
Bit14 = 1: Motor data is corrupted
Bit15 = 1: Internal serial link data flow detected error
(1) Hexadecimal values are displayed on the Graphic display terminal
Example:
SFFE = 0x0008 in Hexadecimal
SFFE = Bit 3
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > AFI-
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
70 NVE41295 04/2018
SAF2 [Safety fault Reg2] (1)
Safety fault register 2
Motor Control error register
Bit0 = 1 : Consistency stator frequency verification has detected an error
Bit1 = 1 : Stator frequency estimation detected error
Bit2 = 1 : Motor control watchdog management is active
Bit3 = 1 : Motor control hardware watchdog is active
Bit4 = 1 : Motor control auto test has detected an error
Bit5 = 1 : Chain testing detected error
Bit6 = 1 : Internal serial link core detected error
Bit7 = 1 : Direct short-circuit detected error
Bit8 = 1 : PWM driver detected error
Bit9 = 1 : GDL internal detected error
Bit10 : Reserved
Bit11 = 1 : Application interface has detected an error of the safety functions
Bit12 = 1 : Reserved
Bit13: Reserved
Bit14 = 1 : Motor data is corrupted
Bit15 = 1 : Internal serial link data flow detected error
SF00 [SAFF Subcode 0] (1)
Safety fault subregister 00
Appplication auto test error register
Bit0 : Reserved
Bit1 = 1 : Ram stack overflow
Bit2 = 1 : Ram address integrity error
Bit3 = 1 : Ram data access error
Bit4 = 1 : Flash Checksum Error
Bit5 : Reserved
Bit6 : Reserved
Bit7 : Reserved
Bit8 : Reserved
Bit9 = 1 : Fast task overflow
Bit10 = 1 : Slow task overflow
Bit11 = 1 : Application task overflow
Bit12 : Reserved
Bit13 : Reserved
Bit14 = 1 : PWRM line is not activated during initialization phase
Bit15 = 1 : Application hardware Watch Dog is not running after initialization
SF01 [SAFF Subcode 1] (1)
Safety fault subregister 01
Logical input diagnostics error register
Bit0 = 1 : Management - state machine error
Bit1 = 1 : Data required for test management are corrupted
Bit2 = 1 : Channel selection detected error
Bit3 = 1 : Testing - state machine detected error
Bit4 = 1 : Test request is corrupted
Bit5 = 1 : Pointer to test method is corrupted
Bit6 = 1 : Incorrect test action provided
Bit7 = 1 : Detected Error in results collecting
Bit8 = 1 : LI3 detected error. Cannot activate safe function
Bit9 = 1 : LI4 detected error. Cannot activate safe function
Bit10 = 1 : LI5 detected error. Cannot activate safe function
Bit11 = 1 : LI6 detected error. Cannot activate safe function
Bit12 = 1 : Test sequence updated while a diagnostic is in progress
Bit13 = 1 : Detected error in test pattern management
Bit14 : Reserved
Bit15 : Reserved
(1) Hexadecimal values are displayed on the Graphic display terminal
Example:
SFFE = 0x0008 in Hexadecimal
SFFE = Bit 3
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > AFI-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
NVE41295 04/2018 71
SF02 [SAFF Subcode 2] (1)
Safety fault subregister 02
Application Watchdog Management detected error register
Bit0 = 1 : Fast task detected error
Bit1 = 1 : Slow task detected error
Bit2 = 1 : Application task detected error
Bit3 = 1 : Background task detected error
Bit4 = 1 : Safety fast task/input detected error
Bit5 = 1 : Safety slow task/input detected error
Bit6 = 1 : Safety app task/input detected error
Bit7 = 1 : Safety app task/treatment detected error
Bit8 = 1 : Safety background task detected error
Bit9 : Reserved
Bit10 : Reserved
Bit11 : Reserved
Bit12 : Reserved
Bit13 : Reserved
Bit14 : Reserved
Bit15 : Reserved
SF03 [SAFF Subcode 3] (1)
Safety fault subregister 03
Bit0 = 1 : Debounce time out
Bit1 = 1 : Input not consistent
Bit2 = 1 : Consistency check - state machine detected error
Bit3 = 1 : Consistency check - debounce timeout corrupted
Bit4 = 1 : Response time data detected error
Bit5 = 1 : Response time corrupted
Bit6 = 1 : Undefined consumer queried
Bit7 = 1 : Configuration detected error
Bit8 = 1 : Inputs are not in nominal mode
Bit9 : Reserved
Bit10 : Reserved
Bit11 : Reserved
Bit12 : Reserved
Bit13 : Reserved
Bit14 : Reserved
Bit15 : Reserved
SF04 [SAFF Subcode 4] (1)
Safety fault subregister 04
[Safe Torque Off] StO detected error register
Bit0 = 1 : No signal configured
Bit1 = 1 : State machine detected error
Bit2 = 1 : Internal data detected error
Bit3 : Reserved
Bit4 : Reserved
Bit5 : Reserved
Bit6 : Reserved
Bit7 : Reserved
Bit8 = 1 : SMS overspeed detected error
Bit9 = 1 : SMS internal detected error
Bit10 : Reserved
Bit11 = 1 : GDL internal detected error 1
Bit12 = 1 : GDL internal detected error 2
Bit13 : Reserved
Bit14 : Reserved
Bit15 : Reserved
(1) Hexadecimal values are displayed on the Graphic display terminal
Example:
SFFE = 0x0008 in Hexadecimal
SFFE = Bit 3
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > AFI-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
72 NVE41295 04/2018
SF05 [SAFF Subcode 5] (1)
Safety fault subregister 05
[Safe Stop 1] SS1 detected error register
Bit0 = 1 : State machine detected error
Bit1 = 1 : Motor speed sign changed during stop
Bit2 = 1 : Motor speed reached trigger area
Bit3 = 1 : Theoretical motor speed corrupted
Bit4 = 1 : Unauthorized configuration
Bit5 = 1 : Theoretical motor speed computation detected error
Bit6 : Reserved
Bit7 = 1 : Speed sign check: consistency detected error
Bit8 = 1 : Internal SS1 request corrupted
Bit9 : Reserved
Bit10 : Reserved
Bit11 : Reserved
Bit12 : Reserved
Bit13 : Reserved
Bit14 : Reserved
Bit15 : Reserved
SF06 [SAFF Subcode 6] (1)
Safety fault subregister 06
[Safely Limited Speed] SLS detected error register
Bit0 = 1 : State machine error register
Bit1 = 1 : Motor speed sign changed during limitation
Bit2 = 1 : Motor speed has reached the frequency limit threshold
Bit3 = 1 : Data corruption
Bit4 : Reserved
Bit5 : Reserved
Bit6 : Reserved
Bit7 : Reserved
Bit8 : Reserved
Bit9 : Reserved
Bit10 : Reserved
Bit11 : Reserved
Bit12 : Reserved
Bit13 : Reserved
Bit14 : Reserved
Bit15 : Reserved
SF07 [SAFF Subcode 7] (1)
Safety fault subregister 07
Application Watchdog Management detected error register
Bit0 : Reserved
Bit1 : Reserved
Bit2 : Reserved
Bit3 : Reserved
Bit4 : Reserved
Bit5 : Reserved
Bit6 : Reserved
Bit7 : Reserved
Bit8 : Reserved
Bit9 : Reserved
Bit10 : Reserved
Bit11 : Reserved
Bit12 : Reserved
Bit13 : Reserved
Bit14 : Reserved
Bit15 : Reserved
(1) Hexadecimal values are displayed on the Graphic display terminal
Example:
SFFE = 0x0008 in Hexadecimal
SFFE = Bit 3
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > AFI-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
NVE41295 04/2018 73
SF08 [SAFF Subcode 8] (1)
Safety fault subregister 08
Application Watchdog Management detected error register
Bit0 = 1 : PWM task detected error
Bit1 = 1 : Fixed task detected error
Bit2 = 1 : ATMC watchdog detected error
Bit3 = 1 : DYNFCT watchdog detected error
Bit4 : Reserved
Bit5 : Reserved
Bit6 : Reserved
Bit7 : Reserved
Bit8 : Reserved
Bit9 : Reserved
Bit10 : Reserved
Bit11 : Reserved
Bit12 : Reserved
Bit13 : Reserved
Bit14 : Reserved
Bit15 : Reserved
SF09 [SAFF Subcode 9] (1)
Safety fault subregister 09
Motor control Auto Test detected error register
Bit0 : Reserved
Bit1 = 1 : Ram stack overflow
Bit2 = 1 : Ram address integrity detected error
Bit3 = 1 : Ram data access detected error
Bit4 = 1 : Flash Checksum detected error
Bit5 : Reserved
Bit6 : Reserved
Bit7 : Reserved
Bit8 : Reserved
Bit9 = 1 : 1ms task overflow
Bit10 = 1 : PWM task overflow
Bit11 = 1 : Fixed task overflow
Bit12 : Reserved
Bit13 : Reserved
Bit14 = 1 : Unwanted interruption
Bit15 = 1 : Hardware WD is not running after initialization
SF10 [SAFF Subcode 10] (1)
Safety fault subregister 10
Motor control direct short-circuit detected error register
Bit0 = 1 : Ground short circuit - Configuration detected error
Bit1 = 1 : Phase to phase short circuit - Configuration detected error
Bit2 = 1 : Ground short circuit
Bit3 = 1 : Phase to phase short circuit
Bit4 : Reserved
Bit5 : Reserved
Bit6 : Reserved
Bit7 : Reserved
Bit8 : Reserved
Bit9 : Reserved
Bit10 : Reserved
Bit11 : Reserved
Bit12 : Reserved
Bit13 : Reserved
Bit14 : Reserved
Bit15 : Reserved
(1) Hexadecimal values are displayed on the Graphic display terminal
Example:
SFFE = 0x0008 in Hexadecimal
SFFE = Bit 3
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > AFI-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
74 NVE41295 04/2018
SF11 [SAFF Subcode 11] (1)
Safety fault subregister 11
Motor Control dynamic check of activity detected error register
Bit0 = 1 : Application requested a diagnostic of direct short circuit
Bit1 = 1 : Application requested consistency verification of stator frequency estimation (voltage and current)
Bit2 = 1 : Application requested diagnostic of SpdStat provided by Motor Control
Bit3 : Reserved
Bit4 : Reserved
Bit5 : Reserved
Bit6 : Reserved
Bit7 : Reserved
Bit8 = 1 : Motor Control safe diagnostic of direct short circuit is enabled
Bit9 = 1 : Motor Control consistency check of stator frequency estimation is enabled
Bit10 = 1 : Motor Control diagnostic of SpdStat provided by Motor Control is enabled
Bit11 : Reserved
Bit12 : Reserved
Bit13 : Reserved
Bit14 : Reserved
Bit15 : Reserved
dGt- [DIAGNOSTICS] (continued)
tAC [IGBT alarm counter]
Transistor alarm time counter (length of time the "IGBT temperature" alarm has been active).
tAC2 [Min. freq time]
Transistor alarm time counter at minimum switching frequency (length of time the "IGBT temperature" alarm has been active after
the drive has automatically reduced the switching frequency to the minimum value).
ntJ [IGBT alarm Nb]
Transistor alarm counter: number detected during lifecycle.
g
Visible if [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) is set to [Expert] (Epr).
SEr-
[SERVICE MESSAGE]
See page 291.
rFLt
nO
YES
[Reset past faults]
Reset all resetable previous detected faults.
[No] (nO): Reset not active
[YES] (YES): Reset in progress
Code Name / Description Unit
(1) Hexadecimal values are displayed on the Graphic display terminal
Example:
SFFE = 0x0008 in Hexadecimal
SFFE = Bit 3
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
DRI- > MON- > AFI-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
NVE41295 04/2018 75
MOn- [1.2 MONITORING] (continued)
COd- [PASSWORD]
HMI Password.
If you have lost your code, please contact Schneider Electric.
CSt [State]
LC
ULC
Status of the drive (lock/unlock). Information parameter, cannot be modified.
[Locked] (LC): The drive is locked by a password
[Unlocked] (ULC): The drive is not locked by a password
COd
OFF
On
[PIN code 1]
Confidential code.
Enables the drive configuration to be protected using an access code.
When access is locked by means of a code, only the parameters in the [1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-) and
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE] (rEF-) menus can be accessed. The MODE key can be used to switch between menus.
Note: Before entering a code, do not forget to make a careful note of it.
[OFF] (OFF): No access locking codes.
- To lock access, enter a code (2 to 9,999). The display can be incremented using the jog dial. Then press ENT. [ON] (On)
appears on the screen to indicate that access has been locked.
[ON] (On): A code is locking access (2 to 9,999).
- To unlock access, enter the code (incrementing the display using the jog dial) and press ENT. The code remains on the
display and access is unlocked until the next time the drive is turned off. Access will be locked again the next time the drive
is turned on.
- If an incorrect code is entered, the display changes to [ON] (On), and access remains locked.
Access is unlocked (the code remains on the screen).
- To reactivate locking with the same code when access has been unlocked, return to [ON] (On) using the jog dial and then
press ENT. [ON] (On) remains on the screen to indicate that access has been locked.
- To lock access with a new code when access has been unlocked, enter the new code (increment the display using the jog
dial) and then press ENT. [ON] (On) appears on the screen to indicate that access has been locked.
- To clear locking when access has been unlocked, return to [OFF] (OFF) using the jog dial and then press ENT.
[OFF] (OFF) remains on the display. Access is unlocked and will remain so until the next restart.
COd2 [PIN code 2]
g
Confidential code 2. Visible if [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) is set to [Expert] (Epr).
OFF
On
8888
The value [OFF] (OFF) indicates that no password has been set [Unlocked] (ULC).
The value [ON] (On) indicates that the drive configuration is protected and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it.
Once the correct code has been entered, it remains on the display and the drive is unlocked until the next time the power supply
is disconnected.
PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support.
ULr [Upload rights]
ULr0
ULr1
[Permitted] (ULr0): Means that SoMove or the graphic display terminal can save the whole configuration (password,
protections, configuration). When the configuration is edited, only the non protected parameters will be accessible.
[Not allowed] (ULr1): Means that SoMove or the graphic display terminal cannot save the configuration
dLr
dLr0
dLr1
dLr2
dLr3
[Download rights]
[Locked drv] (dLr0): Locked drive: means that the configuration can be downloaded only in a locked drive which configuration
has the same password. If the passwords are different, download is not permitted.
[Unlock. drv] (dLr1): Unlocked drive: means that the configuration can be downloaded only in a drive without active password
[Not allowed] (dLr2): Not allowed: the configuration cannot be downloaded
[Lock/unlock] (dLr3): Lock. + Not: download is permitted following case 0 or case 1
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Code Name / Description Unit
DRI- > MON- > COD-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Monitoring Mode (MOn)
76 NVE41295 04/2018
Configuration Mode (ConF)
78 NVE41295 04/2018
Introduction
Configuration mode includes 4 parts:
1. "My Menu" menu includes up to 25 parameters available for user customization using the graphic display
terminal or SoMove software.
2. Store/recall parameter set: These 2 functions are used to store and recall customer settings.
3. [Macro configuration] (CFG) parameter which allows to load predefined values for applications (see page
82
).
4. FULL: This menu provides access to all other parameters. It includes 10 sub-menus:
- [SIMPLY START] (SIM-) page 85
- [SETTINGS] (SEt-) page 89
- [MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) page 105
- [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) page 125
- [COMMAND] (CtL-) page 154
- [FUNCTION BLOCK] (FbM-) page 158
- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) page 167
- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) page 248
- [COMMUNICATION] (COM-) page 275
- [ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) page 282
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 79
Organization tree
Displayed parameter values are given as examples.
= ENT
ENT
ESC
MYMn
SIM-
SEt-
I_O-
COnF
FCS-
CFG
FULL
drC-
CtL-
FUn-
COM-
FLt-
LAC
ESC
= ESC
ENT
ESC
FbM-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 81
Factory Settings
Code Name / Description Factory setting
COnF [1.3 CONFIGURATION]
FCS- [FACTORY SETTINGS]
FCSI [Config. Source]
[Macro-Conf] (InI)
g
Choice of source configuration.
If the configuration switching function is configured, it will not be possible to access [Config 1] (CFG1) and
[Config 2] (CFG2).
Note: To load the drive's presettings previously stored ([Config 1] (Str1) or [Config 2] (Str2)), select the source
configuration [Config. Source] (FCSI) = [Config 1] (CFG1) or [Config 2] (CFG2) followed by a factory setting
[Goto FACTORY SETTINGS] (GFS) = [YES] (YES).
InI
CFG1
CFG2
[Macro-Conf] (InI): Factory configuration, return to selected macro configuration
[Config 1] (CFG1): Configuration 1
[Config 2] (CFG2): Configuration 2
FrY- [PARAMETER GROUP LIST]
Selection of menus to be loaded.
See the multiple selection procedure on page 33
for the integrated display terminal and page 24 for the graphic display terminal.
Note: In factory configuration and after a return to "factory settings", [PARAMETER GROUP LIST] will be empty.
ALL
drM
MOt
COM
dIS
[All] (ALL): All parameters (the function blocks program will also be erased)
[Drive configuration] (drM): The [1 DRIVE MENU] (drI-) menu without [COMMUNICATION] (COM-). In the
[3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.] menu, [Return std name] (GSP) page 291
returns to [No] (nO).
[Motor param] (MOt): Motor parameters, see page 299
.
The following selections can only be accessed if [Config. Source] (FCSI) is set to [Macro-Conf.] (InI).
[Comm. menu] (COM): The [COMMUNICATION] (COM-) menu without either [Scan. In1 address] (nMA1) to
[Scan. In8 address] (nMA8) or [Scan.Out1 address] (nCA1) to [Scan.Out8 address] (nCA8).
[Display config.] (dIS): The [3.3 MONITORING CONFIG.] (MCF-) menu
GFS [Goto FACTORY SETTINGS]
g
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that restoring the factory settings is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
nO
YES
It is only possible to revert to the factory settings if at least one group of parameters has previously been selected.
[No] (nO): No
[Yes] (YES): The parameter changes back to [No] (nO) automatically as soon as the operation is complete
SCSI [Save config]
[No] (nO)
g
The active configuration to be saved does not appear for selection. For example, if it is [Config 0] (Str0), only
[Config 1] (Str1) and [Config 2] (Str2) appear. The parameter changes back to [No] (nO) as soon as the operation is
complete.
nO
Str0
Str1
Str2
[No] (nO): No
[Config 0] (Str0): Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s
[Config 1] (Str1): Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s
[Config 2] (Str2): Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
2 s
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FCS-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Configuration Mode (ConF)
82 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Macro Configuration
Example of total return to factory settings
• [Config. Source] (FCSI) is set to [Macro-Conf] (InI)
• [PARAMETER GROUP LIST] (FrY-) is set to [All] (ALL)
• [Goto FACTORY SETTINGS] (GFS) is set to [Yes] (YES)
Code Name / Description Factory setting
COnF [1.3 CONFIGURATION] (continued)
CFG [Macro configuration]
[Start/Stop] (StS)
g
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that the selected macro configuration is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
StS
HdG
HSt
GEn
PId
nEt
[Start/Stop] (StS): Start/stop
[M. handling] (HdG): Handling
[Hoisting] (HSt): Hoisting
[Gen. Use] (GEn): General use
[PID regul.] (PId): PID regulation
[Network C.] (nEt): Communication bus
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
2 s
2 s
DRI- > CONF
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 83
Assignment of the inputs/outputs
(1) To start with, integrated Modbus [Modbus Address] (Add) must first be configured, page 276.
Note: These assignments are reinitialized every time the macro configuration changes.
Input/
output
[Start/Stop] [M. handling] [Gen. Use] [Hoisting] [PID regul.] [Network C.]
[AI1] [Ref.1 channel] [Ref.1 channel] [Ref.1 channel] [Ref.1 channel] [Ref.1 channel] (PID
reference)
[Ref.2 channel]
([Ref.1 channel]
= integrated
Modbus) (1)
[AI2] [No] [Summing ref. 2] [Summing ref. 2] [No] [PID feedback] [No]
[AI3] [No] [No] [No] [No] [No] [No]
[AO1] [No] [No] [No] [No] [No] [No]
[R1] [No drive flt] [No drive flt] [No drive flt] [No drive flt] [No drive flt] [No drive flt]
[R2] [No] [No] [No] [Brk control] [No] [No]
[LI1] (2-wire) [Forward] [Forward] [Forward] [Forward] [Forward] [Forward]
[LI2] (2-wire) [Reverse] [Reverse] [Reverse] [Reverse] [Reverse] [Reverse]
[LI3] (2-wire) [No] [2 preset speeds] [Jog] [Fault reset] [PID integral reset] [Ref. 2
switching]
[LI4] (2-wire) [No] [4 preset speeds] [Fault reset] [External fault] [2 preset PID
ref.]
[Fault reset]
[LI5] (2-wire) [No] [8 preset speeds] [Torque limitation] [No] [4 preset PID
ref.]
[No]
[LI6] (2-wire) [No] [Fault reset] [No] [No] [No] [No]
[LI1] (3-wire) [Drive running] [Drive running] [Drive running] [Drive running] [Drive running] [Drive running]
[LI2] (3-wire) [Forward] [Forward] [Forward] [Forward] [Forward] [Forward]
[LI3] (3-wire) [Reverse] [Reverse] [Reverse] [Reverse] [Reverse] [Reverse]
[LI4] (3-wire) [No] [2 preset speeds] [Jog] [Fault reset] [PID integral
reset]
[Ref. 2
switching]
[LI5] (3-wire) [No] [4 preset speeds] [Fault reset] [External fault] [2 preset PID
ref.]
[Fault reset]
[LI6] (3-wire) [No] [8 preset speeds] [Torque limitation] [No] [4 preset PID
ref.]
[No]
[LO1] [No] [No] [No] [No] [No] [No]
Graphic display terminal keys
F1 key [No] [No] [No] [No] [No] Control via
graphic display
terminal
F2, F3, F4
keys
[No] [No] [No] [No] [No] [No]
In 3-wire control, the assignment of inputs LI1 to LI6 shifts.
Configuration Mode (ConF)
84 NVE41295 04/2018
Other configurations and settings
In addition to the assignment of inputs/outputs, other parameters are assigned only in the Hoisting macro
configuration.
Hoisting:
• [Movement type] (bSt) is set to [Hoisting] (UEr) page 194
• [Brake contact] (bCI) is set to [No] (nO) page 194
• [Brake impulse] (bIP) is set to [Yes] (YES) page 194
• [Brake release I FW] (Ibr) is set to 0 A page 194
• [Brake Release time] (brt) is set to 0 s page 194
• [Brake release freq] (bIr) is set to [Auto] (AUtO) page 195
• [Brake engage freq] (bEn) is set to [Auto] (AUtO) page 195
• [Brake engage time] (bEt) is set to 0 s page 195
• [Engage at reversal] (bEd) is set to [No] (nO) page 195
• [Jump at reversal] (JdC) is set to [Auto] (AUtO) page 195
• [Time to restart] (ttr) is set to 0 s page 196
• [Current ramp time] (brr) is set to 0 s page 198
• [Low speed] (LSP) is set to Rated motor slip calculated by the drive, page 87
• [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) is set to [Yes] (YES) page 256
No further modifications can be made to this parameter.
• [Catch on the fly] (FLr) is set to [No] (nO) page 253
No further modifications can be made to this parameter.
Return to factory settings:
Returning to factory settings with [Config. Source] (FCSI) is set to [Macro-Conf] (InI) page 81
will
return the drive to the selected macro configuration. The [Macro configuration] (CFG) parameter does not
change, although [Customized macro] (CCFG) disappears.
Note: The factory settings that appear in the parameter tables correspond to
[Macro configuration] (CFG) = [Start/Stop] (StS). This is the macro configuration set at the factory.
Example diagrams for use with the macro configurations
[Hoisting] (HSt) diagram
(1) Whithout integrated safety function, a contact on the Preventa module must be inserted in the brake control circuit to
engage it when the "Safe Torque Off" safety function is activated (see connection diagrams in the Installation manual).
UWV
L1 L3
ATV
KM10
R2A
R2C
L2
M
3
3
2
(1)
AI1
LI1 LI2+24
Electromagnetic brake
Forward
(Ascend)
Reverse
(Descend)
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 85
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Full
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
COnF [1.3 CONFIGURATION]
FULL [FULL]
SIM- [SIMPLY START]
tCC [2/3 wire control]
[2 wire] (2C)
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If this parameter is changed, the parameters [Reverse assign.] (rrS) and [2 wire type] (tCt) and the
assignments of the digital inputs are reset to the factory setting.
Verify that this change is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
2C
3C
See [2/3 wire control] (tCC) page 125
.
[2 wire] (2C)
2-wire control (level commands): This is the input state (0 or 1) or edge (0 to 1 or 1 to 0), which controls running or stopping.
Example of "source" wiring:
LI1: forward
LIx: reverse
[3 wire] (3C)
3-wire control (pulse commands): A "forward" or "reverse" pulse is sufficient to command starting, a "stop" pulse is sufficient
to command stopping.
Example of "source" wiring:
LI1: stop
LI2: forward
LIx: reverse
CFG [Macro configuration]
[Start/Stop] (StS)
g
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that the selected macro configuration is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
StS
HdG
HSt
GEn
PId
nEt
See [Macro configuration] (CFG) page 82
.
[Start/Stop] (StS): Start/stop
[M. handling] (HdG): Handling
[Hoisting] (HSt): Hoisting
[Gen. Use] (GEn): General use
[PID regul.] (PId): PID regulation
[Network C.] (nEt): Communication bus
2 s
+24 LI1 LIx
ATVppp
+24 LI1 LI2 LIx
ATVppp
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SIM-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
86 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
CCFG [Customized macro]
g
Read-only parameter, only visible if at least one macro configuration parameter has been modified.
nO
YES
[No] (nO): No
[Yes] (YES): Yes
bFr [Standard mot. freq]
[50Hz IEC] (50)
50
60
This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: [Rated motor volt.] (UnS) below, [High speed] (HSP) page
87
, [Freq. threshold] (Ftd) page 102, [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) and [Max frequency] (tFr) .
[50Hz IEC] (50): Drive 50 Hz
[60Hz NEMA] (60): Drive 60 Hz
IPL [Input phase loss]
Yes or No, according to drive
rating
g
This parameter is only accessible in this menu on 3-phase drives.
If one phase disappears, the drive switches to fault mode [Input phase loss] (PHF), but if 2 or 3 phases disappear, the drive
continues to operate until it trips on an undervoltage detected fault (the drive trips in [Input phase loss] (PHF) if there is an
input phase loss and if this leads to performance decrease).
See [Input phase loss] (IPL) page 256
.
nO
YES
[Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored, to be used when the drive is supplied via a single-phase supply or by the DC bus
[Freewheel] (YES): With freewheel stop
nPr [Rated motor power]
According to drive rating
g
Rated motor power given on the nameplate, in kW if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to [50Hz IEC] (50), in HP if
[Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to [60Hz NEMA] (60).
See [Rated motor power] (nPr) page 107
.
UnS [Rated motor volt.]
100 to 480 V According to drive rating
g
Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate.
ATV320pppM2p: 100 to 240 V – ATV320pppN4p: 200 to 480 V.
See [Rated motor volt.] (UnS) page 107
.
nCr [Rated mot. current]
0.25 to 1.5 In (1) According to drive rating and
[Standard mot. freq] (bFr)
g
Rated motor current given on the nameplate.
See [Rated mot. current] (nCr) page 107
.
FrS [Rated motor freq.]
10 to 800 Hz 50 Hz
g
Rated motor frequency given on the nameplate.
The factory setting is 50 Hz, or preset to 60 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to 60 Hz.
This parameter is not visible if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105
is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
See [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 107
.
nSP [Rated motor speed]
0 to 65,535 rpm According to drive rating
g
Rated motor speed given on the nameplate.
This parameter is not visible if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105
is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
See [Rated motor speed] (nSP) page 107
.
0 to 9,999 rpm then 10.00 to 60.00 krpm on the integrated display terminal.
If, rather than the rated speed, the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %, calculate the rated
speed as follows:
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x
or
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (50 Hz motors)
or
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (60 Hz motors)
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
100 - slip as a %
100
50 - slip in Hz
50
60 - slip in Hz
60
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SIM-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 87
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate.
(2) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6,000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr) page 170
.
tFr [Max frequency]
10 to 599 Hz 60 Hz
The factory setting is 60 Hz, or preset to 72 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to 60 Hz.
The maximum value is limited by the following conditions:
It must not exceed 10 times the value of [Rated motor freq.] (FrS).
See [Max frequency] (tFr) page 105
.
tUn [Auto tuning]
[No action] (nO)
For asynchronous motors, see page 108.
For synchronous motors, see page 113
.
tUS [Auto tuning state]
[Not done] (tAb)
tAb
PEnd
PrOG
FAIL
dOnE
This parameter is not saved at drive power off. It shows the Autotuning status since last power on.
See [Auto tuning state] (tUS) page 108
.
[Not done] (tAb): Autotune is not done
[Pending] (PEnd): Autotune has been requested but not yet performed
[In Progress] (PrOG): Autotune is in progress
[Failed] (FAIL): Autotune has detected a fault
[Done] (dOnE): The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor
StUn [Tune selection]
[Default] (tAb)
tAb
MEAS
CUS
See [Tune selection] (StUn) page 108
.
[Default] (tAb): The default stator resistance value is used to control the motor
[Measure] (MEAS): The stator resistance measured by the auto-tuning function is used to control the motor
[Custom] (CUS): The stator resistance set manually is used to control the motor
ItH [Mot. therm. current]
0.2 to 1.5 In (1) According to drive rating
Motor thermal protection current, to be set to the rated current indicated on the motor nameplate.
See [Mot. therm. current] (ItH) page 90
.
ACC
[Acceleration]
0.00 to 6,000 s (2) 3.0 s
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) (page 86
). To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this
parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application.
See [Acceleration] (ACC) page 89
.
dEC
[Deceleration]
0.00 to 6,000 s (2) 3.0 s
Time to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) (page 86) to 0. To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this
parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application.
See [Deceleration] (dEC) page 89
.
LSP [Low speed]
0 to 599 Hz 0
Motor frequency at minimum reference, can be set between 0 and [High speed] (HSP).
See [Low speed] (LSP) page 89
.
HSP [High speed]
0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz
Motor frequency at maximum reference, can be set between [Low speed] (LSP) and [Max frequency] (tFr). The factory
setting changes to 60 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to [60Hz NEMA] (60).
See [High speed] (HSP) page 89
.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SIM-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
88 NVE41295 04/2018
Settings
With integrated display terminal
It is recommend to stop the motor before modifying any of the settings.
The adjustment parameters can be modified with the drive running or stopped.
SIM-
drC-
LAC-
SEt-
= ENT
ESC
= ESC
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ESC
ENT
FULL
SETTINGS
From COnF menu
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 89
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FULL [FULL] (continued)
SEt- [SETTINGS]
Inr [Ramp increment]
0.1
This parameter is valid for [Acceleration] (ACC), [Deceleration] (dEC), [Acceleration 2] (AC2) and
[Deceleration 2] (dE2). See [Ramp increment] (Inr) page 170
.
0.01
0.1
1
[0,01]: Ramp up to 99.99 seconds
[0,1]: Ramp up to 999.9 seconds
[1]: Ramp up to 6,000 seconds
ACC [Acceleration]
0.00 to 6,000 s (1) 3.0 s
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 86. To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this parameter
must be set according to the possibility of the application. See [Acceleration] (ACC) page 170
.
dEC [Deceleration]
0.00 to 6,000 s (1) 3.0 s
Time to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 86 to 0. To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this parameter
must be set according to the possibility of the application. See [Deceleration] (dEC) page 170
.
AC2 [Acceleration 2]
0.00 to 6,000 s (1) 5 s
g
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 86. To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this parameter
must be set according to the possibility of the application. See [Acceleration 2] (AC2) page 171
.
dE2 [Deceleration 2]
0.00 to 6,000 s (1) 5 s
g
Time to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 86 to 0. To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this parameter
must be set according to the possibility of the application. See [Deceleration 2] (dE2) page 171
.
tA1 [Begin Acc round]
0 to 100% 10%
g
Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2) ramp time. Visible if
[Ramp type] (rPt) is set to [Customized] (CUS). See [Begin Acc round] (tA1) page 170
.
tA2 [End Acc round]
0 to 100% 10%
g
Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2) ramp time.
Can be set between 0 and 100% - [Begin Acc round] (tA1).
Visible if [Ramp type] (rPt) is set to [Customized] (CUS). See [End Acc round] (tA2) page 171
.
tA3 [Begin Dec round]
0 to 100% 10%
g
Rounding of start of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2) ramp time. Visible if
[Ramp type] (rPt) is set to [Customized] (CUS). See [Begin Dec round] (tA3) page 171
.
tA4 [End Dec round]
0 to 100% 10%
g
Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2) ramp time.
Can be set between 0 and 100% - [Begin Dec round] (tA3).
Visible if [Ramp type] (rPt) is set to [Customized] (CUS). See [End Dec round] (tA4) page 171
.
LSP [Low speed]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
Motor frequency at minimum reference, can be set between 0 and [High speed] (HSP) page 87. See [Low speed] (LSP)
page 87
.
HSP [High speed]
0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz
Motor frequency at maximum reference, can be set between [Low speed] (LSP) and [Max frequency] (tFr). The factory
setting changes to 60 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to [60Hz NEMA] (60). See [High speed] (HSP) page 87
.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SET-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
90 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6,000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr) page 170.
(2) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual or on the drive nameplate.
HSP2 [High speed 2]
0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz
g
Visible if [2 High speed] (SH2) is not set to [No] (nO). See [High speed 2] (HSP2) page 244.
HSP3 [High speed 3]
0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz
g
Visible if [4 High speed] (SH4) is not set to [No] (nO). See [High speed 3] (HSP3) page 244.
HSP4 [High speed 4]
0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz
g
Visible if [4 High speed] (SH4) is not set to [No] (nO). See [High speed 4] (HSP4) page 244.
ItH [Mot. therm. current]
0.2 to 1.5 In (2) According to drive rating
Motor thermal protection current, to be set to the rated current indicated on the motor nameplate.
See [Mot. therm. current] (ItH)page 87
.
UFr [IR compensation]
0 to 200% 100%
IR compensation. See [IR comprensation] (UFr) page 118.
SLP [Slip compensation]
0 to 300% 100%
g
Slip compensation. See [Slip compensation] (SLP) page 118.
SFC [K speed loop filter]
0 to 100 65
g
Speed filter coefficient. See [K speed loop filter] (SFC) page 118.
SIt [Speed time integral]
1 to 65,535 ms 63 ms
g
Speed loop integral time constant. See [Speed time integral] (SIt) page 118.
SPG [Speed prop. gain]
0 to 1,000% 40%
g
Speed loop proportional gain. See [Speed prop. gain] (SPG) page 118.
SPGU [UF inertia comp.]
0 to 1,000% 40%
g
Inertia factor. See [UF inertia comp.] (SPGU) page 118.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SET-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 91
Parameter settings for [K speed loop filter] (SFC), [Speed prop. gain] (SPG) and [Speed time integral] (SIt)
The following parameters can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105 is set to [SVC V] (UUC),
[Sync. mot.] (SYn) or [Energy Sav.] (nLd).
General Case: Setting for [K speed loop filter] (SFC) = 0
The regulator is an "IP" type with filtering of the speed reference, for applications requiring flexibility and
stability (hoisting or high inertia, for example).
• [Speed prop. gain] (SPG) affects excessive speed.
• [Speed time integral] (SIt) affects the passband and response time.
Initial response
Reduction in SIT Reduction in SIT
Initial response
Increase in SPG Increase in SPG
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
Reference division
Time in ms
Configuration Mode (ConF)
92 NVE41295 04/2018
Special case: Parameter [K speed loop filter] (SFC) is not 0
This parameter must be reserved for specific applications that require a short response time (trajectory
positioning or servo control).
• When set to 100 as described above, the regulator is a “PI” type, without filtering of the speed reference.
• Settings between 0 and 100 will obtain an intermediate function between the settings below and those on
the previous page.
Example: Setting for [K speed loop filter] (SFC) = 100
• [Speed prop. gain] (SPG) affects the passband and response time.
• [Speed time integral] (SIt) affects excessive speed.
Initial response
Reduction in SIT Reduction in SIT
Initial response
Increase in SPG Increase in SPG
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
Reference division
Time in ms
0 50045040035030025020015010050
0
1
0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
Reference division
Time in ms
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 93
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
dCF [Ramp divider]
0 to 10 4
g
Deceleration ramp time reduction. See [Ramp divider] (dCF) page 173.
IdC [DC inject. level 1]
0.1 to 1.41 In (1) 0.64 In (1)
g
Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode. See [DC inject. level 1] (IdC) page
174
.
tdI [DC injection time 1]
0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
g
Maximum current injection time [DC inject. level 1] (IdC). After this time, the injection current becomes
[DC inject. level 2] (IdC2). See [DC injection time 1] (td1) page 174
.
IdC2 [DC inject. level 2]
0.1 In to 1.41 In (1) 0.5 In (1)
g
Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode, once period of time [DC injection time 1] (tdI) has elapsed.
See [DC inject. level 2] (IdC2) page 175
.
tdC [DC injection time 2]
0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
g
Maximum injection time [DC inject. level 2] (IdC2) for injection selected as stop mode only.
See [DC injection time 2] (tdC) page 175
.
SdC1 [Auto DC inj. level 1]
0 to 1.2 In (1) 0.7 In (1)
g
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Level of standstill DC injection current [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not [No] (nO).
See page 176
.
tdC1 [Auto DC inj. time 1]
0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
g
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Standstill injection time. This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not set to [No] (nO).
If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105
is set to [Sync. mot.](SYn), this time corresponds to the zero speed maintenance
time.
See page 176
.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SET-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
94 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
SdC2 [Auto DC inj. level 2]
0 to 1.2 In (1) 0.5 In (1)
g
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
2nd level of standstill DC injection current.
This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not [No] (nO).
See page 177
.
tdC2 [Auto DC inj. time 2]
0 to 30 s 0 s
g
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
2nd standstill injection time.
This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is set to [Yes] (YES).
See page 177
.
SFr [Switching freq.]
2 to 16 kHz 4.0 kHz
NOTICE
DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the switching frequency of the drive does not exceed 4 kHz if the EMC filter is disconnected for
operation of the drive in an IT mains.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
This applies to the following drive versions: ATV320pppM2p
Switching frequency setting. See page 119
.
Adjustment range: The maximum value is limited to 4 kHz if [Motor surge limit] (SUL) parameter, page 120
is configured.
Note: In the event of excessive temperature rise, the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and reset it once
the temperature returns to normal.
CLI [Current Limitation]
0 to 1.5 In (1) 1.5 In (1)
g
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
• Verify that the motor is properly rated for the maximum current to be applied to the motor.
• Consider the duty cycle of the motor and all factors of your application including derating requirements in
determining the current limit.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Used to limit the motor current. See page 218.
Note: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) fault mode if this has been enabled
(see page 256
). If it is less than the no-load motor current, the motor cannot run.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SET-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 95
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
CL2 [I Limit. 2 value]
0 to 1.5 In (1) 1.5 In (1)
g
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
• Verify that the motor is properly rated for the maximum current to be applied to the motor.
• Consider the duty cycle of the motor and all factors of your application including derating requirements in
determining the current limit.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
See page 218.
Note: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) fault mode if this has been enabled
(see page 256
). If it is less than the no-load motor current, the motor cannot run.
FLU [Motor fluxing]
[No] (FnO)
g
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
If the parameter [Motor fluxing] (FLU) is set to [Continuous] (FCt), fluxing is always active, even if the
motor does not run.
• Verify that using this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the flux current to be applied in order to avoid overheating
and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
FnC
FCt
FnO
The parameter is visible if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105
is not set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup, magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the motor.
In [Continuous] (FCt) mode, the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up.
In [Not cont.] (FnC) mode, fluxing occurs when the motor starts up.
The flux current is greater than [Rated mot. current] (nCr) when the flux is established and is then adjusted to the motor
magnetizing current. See page 189
.
[Not cont.] (FnC): Non-continuous mode
[Continuous] (FCt): Continuous mode. This option is not possible if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) page 176
is [Yes] (YES)
or if [Type of stop] (Stt) page 173
is [Freewheel] (nSt).
[No] (FnO): Function inactive. This option is not possible if [Brake assignment] (bLC) page 194
is not [No] (nO).
tLS [Low speed time out]
0 to 999.9 s 0 s
Maximum operating time at [Low speed] (LSP) (see page 87).
Following operation at LSP for a defined period, a motor stop is requested automatically. The motor will restart if the reference
is greater than LSP and if a run command is still present. See page 213
.
Note: A value of 0 indicates an unlimited period of time.
Note: If [Low speed time out] (tLS) is not 0, [Type of stop] (Stt) page 173
is forced to [Ramp stop] (rMP) (only if a
ramp stop can be configured).
JGF [Jog frequency]
0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz
g
Reference in jog operation. See page 178.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SET-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
96 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
JGt [Jog delay]
0 to 2.0 s 0.5 s
g
Anti-repeat delay between 2 consecutive jog operations. See page 179.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SET-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 97
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
SP2 [Preset speed 2]
0 to 599 Hz 10 Hz
g
Preset speed 2. See [Preset speed 2] (SP2) page 181.
SP3 [Preset speed 3]
0 to 599 Hz 15 Hz
g
Preset speed 3. See [Preset speed 3] (SP3) page 181.
SP4 [Preset speed 4]
0 to 599 Hz 20 Hz
g
Preset speed 4. See [Preset speed 4] (SP4) page 181.
SP5 [Preset speed 5]
0 to 599 Hz 25 Hz
g
Preset speed 5. See [Preset speed 5] (SP5) page 181.
SP6 [Preset speed 6]
0 to 599 Hz 30 Hz
g
Preset speed 6. See [Preset speed 6] (SP6) page 181.
SP7 [Preset speed 7]
0 to 599 Hz 35 Hz
g
Preset speed 7. See [Preset speed 7] (SP7) page 181.
SP8 [Preset speed 8]
0 to 599 Hz 40 Hz
g
Preset speed 8. See [Preset speed 8] (SP8) page 182.
SP9 [Preset speed 9]
0 to 599 Hz 45 Hz
g
Preset speed 9. See [Preset speed 9] (SP9) page 182.
SP10 [Preset speed 10]
0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz
g
Preset speed 10. See [Preset speed 10] (SP10) page 182.
SP11 [Preset speed 11]
0 to 599 Hz 55 Hz
g
Preset speed 11. See [Preset speed 11] (SP11) page 182.
SP12 [Preset speed 12]
0 to 599 Hz 60 Hz
g
Preset speed 12. See [Preset speed 12] (SP12) page 182.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SET-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
98 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
SP13 [Preset speed 13]
0 to 599 Hz 70 Hz
g
Preset speed 13. See [Preset speed 13] (SP13) page 182.
SP14 [Preset speed 14]
0 to 599 Hz 80 Hz
g
Preset speed 14. See [Preset speed 14] (SP14) page 182.
SP15 [Preset speed 15]
0 to 599 Hz 90 Hz
g
Preset speed 15. See [Preset speed 15] (SP15) page 182.
SP16 [Preset speed 16]
0 to 599 Hz 100 Hz
g
Preset speed 16. See [Preset speed 16] (SP16) page 182.
MFr [Multiplying coeff.]
0 to 100% 100%
g
Multiplying coefficient, can be accessed if [Multiplier ref.] (MA2, MA3) page 169 has been assigned to the graphic display
terminal. See page 46
.
SrP [+/-Speed limitation]
0 to 50% 10%
g
Limitation of +/- speed variation. See page 187.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SET-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 99
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
rPG [PID prop. gain]
0.01 to 100 1
g
Proportional gain. See page 211.
rIG [PID integral gain]
0.01 to 100 1
g
Integral gain. See page 211.
rdG [PID derivative gain]
0.00 to 100 0
g
Derivative gain. See page 211.
PrP [PID ramp]
0 to 99.9 s 0 s
g
PID acceleration/deceleration ramp, defined to go from [Min PID reference] (PIP1) to [Max PID reference] (PIP2) and
vice versa. See page 211
.
POL [Min PID output]
-599 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
g
Minimum value of regulator output in Hz. See page 211.
POH [Max PID output]
0 to 599 Hz 60 Hz
g
Maximum value of regulator output in Hz. See page 211.
PAL [Min fbk alarm]
See page 211 (2) 100
g
Minimum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback. See page 211.
PAH [Max fbk alarm]
See page 212 (2) 1,000
g
Maximum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback. See page 212.
PEr [PID error Alarm]
0 to 65,535 (2) 100
g
Regulator error monitoring threshold. See page 212.
PSr [Speed input %]
1 to 100% 100%
g
Multiplying coefficient for predictive speed input. See page 212.
rP2 [Preset ref. PID 2]
See page 214 (2) 300
g
Preset PID reference. See page 214.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SET-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
100 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
rP3 [Preset ref. PID 3]
See page 214 (2) 600
g
Preset PID reference. See page 214.
rP4 [Preset ref. PID 4]
See page 214 (2) 900
g
Preset PID reference. See page 214.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SET-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 101
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Ibr [Brake release I FW]
0 to 1.36 In (1) 0.0 A
g
Brake release current threshold for lifting or forward movement. See page 194.
Ird [Brake release I Rev]
0 to 1.36 In (1) 0.0 A
g
Brake release current threshold for lowering or reverse movement. See page 194.
brt [Brake Release time]
0 to 5.00 s 0 s
g
Brake release time delay. See page 194.
bIr [Brake release freq]
[Auto] (AUtO)
0 to 10 Hz
[Auto] (AUtO)
g
See page 195.
AUtO [Auto] (AUtO): Nominal value
bEn [Brake engage freq]
[Auto] (AUtO)
0 to 10 Hz
[Auto] (AUtO)
g
Brake engage frequency threshold. See page 195.
tbE [Brake engage delay]
0 to 5.00 s 0 s
g
Time delay before request to engage brake. See page 195.
bEt [Brake engage time]
0 to 5.00 s 0 s
g
Brake engage time (brake response time). See page 195.
JdC [Jump at reversal]
[Auto] (AUtO)
0 to 10 Hz
[Auto] (AUtO)
g
See page 195.
AUtO [Auto] (AUtO): Nominal value
ttr [Time to restart]
0.00 to 15.00 s 0.00 s
g
Time between the end of a brake engage sequence and the start of a brake release sequence. See page 196.
tLIM [Motoring torque lim]
0 to 300% 100%
g
Torque limitation in motor mode, as a % or in 0.1% increments of the rated torque in accordance with the
[Torque increment] (IntP) parameter, page 216
.
See page 216
.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SET-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
102 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
tLIG [Gen. torque lim]
0 to 300% 100%
g
Torque limitation in generator mode, as a % or in 0.1% increments of the rated torque in accordance with the
[Torque increment] (IntP) parameter, page 216
.
See page 216
.
trH [Traverse freq. high]
0 to 10 Hz 4 Hz
g
Traverse high. See page 242.
trL [Traverse freq. low]
0 to 10 Hz 4 Hz
g
Traverse low. See page 242.
qSH [Quick step High]
0 to [Traverse freq. high] (trH) 0 Hz
g
Quick step high. See page 242.
qSL [Quick step Low]
0 to [Traverse freq. low] (trL 0 Hz
g
Quick step low. See page 242.
Ctd [Current threshold]
0 to 1.5 In (1) In (1)
Current threshold for [I attained] (CtA) function assigned to a relay or a logic output (see page 138). See page 252.
ttH [High torque thd.]
-300% to +300% 100%
High torque threshold for [High tq. att.] (ttHA) function assigned to a relay or a logic output (see page 138), as a % of the
rated motor torque. See page 253
.
ttL [Low torque thd.]
-300% to +300% 50%
Low torque threshold for [Low tq. att.] (ttLA) function assigned to a relay or a logic output (see page 138), as a % of the rated
motor torque. See page 253
.
FqL [Pulse warning thd.]
0 Hz to 20,000 kHz 0 Hz
g
Speed threshold measured by the [FREQUENCY METER] (FqF-) function, page 266, assigned to a relay or a logic output
(see page 138
). See page 253.
Ftd [Freq. threshold]
0.0 to 599 Hz HSP
Motor frequency threshold for [Freq.Th.att.] (FtA) function assigned to a relay or a logic output (see page 138), or used by the
[PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (MLP-) function, page 230
. See page 253.
F2d [Freq. threshold 2]
0.0 to 599 Hz HSP
Motor frequency threshold for [Freq. th.2 attained] (F2A) function assigned to a relay or a logic output (see page 138), or used
by the [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (MLP-) function, page 230
. See page 253.
FFt [Freewheel stop Thd]
0.2 to 599 Hz 0.2 Hz
g
Speed threshold below which the motor will switch to freewheel stop.
This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to a freewheel stop below a low speed threshold.
It can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) is set to [Fast stop] (FSt) or [Ramp stop] (rMP) and if [Brake assignment]
(bLC) and [Auto DC injection] (AdC) are not configured. See page 173
.
ttd [Motor therm. level]
0 to 118% 100%
Threshold for motor thermal alarm (logic output or relay). See page 255.
JPF [Skip Frequency]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
Skip frequency. This parameter helps to prevent prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency.
This function can be used to help to prevent a speed, which would cause resonance, being reached. Setting the function to 0
renders it inactive. See page 183
.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SET-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 103
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
JF2 [Skip Frequency 2]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
2nd skip frequency. This parameter helps to prevent prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated
frequency. This function can be used to help to prevent a speed, which would cause resonance, being reached. Setting the
function to 0 renders it inactive. See page 183
.
JF3 [3rd Skip Frequency]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
3rd skip frequency. This parameter helps to prevent prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated
frequency. This function can be used to help to prevent a speed, which would cause resonance, being reached. Setting the
function to 0 renders it inactive. See page 183
.
JFH [Skip.Freq.Hysteresis]
0.1 to 10 Hz 1 Hz
g
Parameter visible if at least one skip frequency [Skip Frequency] (JPF), [Skip Frequency 2] (JF2) or
[3rd Skip Frequency] (JF3) is different from 0.
Skip frequency range: between (JPF – JFH) and (JPF + JFH) for example.
This adjustment is common to the 3 frequencies (JPF, JF2, JF3). See page 183
.
LUn [Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed]
20 to 100% of
[Rated mot. current] (nCr)
60%
g
Underload threshold at rated motor frequency ([Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 86), as a % of the rated motor torque.
Visible only if [Unld T. Del. Detect] (ULt) page 270
is not set to 0.
See page 270
.
LUL [Unld.Thr.0.Speed]
0 to [Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed] (LUn) 0%
g
Underload threshold at zero frequency, as a % of the rated motor torque.
Visible only if [Unld T. Del. Detect] (ULt) page 270
is not set to 0.
See page 270
.
rMUd [Unld. Freq.Thr. Det.]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
g
Underload detection minimum frequency threshold. See page 270.
Srb [Hysteresis Freq.Att.]
0.3 to 599 Hz 0.3 Hz
g
Maximum deviation between the frequency reference and the motor frequency, which defines steady state operation.
See page 270
.
FtU [Underload T.B.Rest.]
0 to 6 min 0 min
g
Minimum time permitted between an underload being detected and any automatic restart.
In order for an automatic restart to be possible, the value of [Max. restart time] (tAr) page 252
must exceed that of this
parameter by at least one minute. See page 271
.
LOC [Ovld Detection Thr.]
70% to 150% of
[Rated mot. current] (nCr)
110%
g
Overload detection threshold, as a % of the rated motor current [Rated mot. current] (nCr). This value must be less than the
limit current in order for the function to work. See page 272
.
Visible only if [Ovld Time Detect.] (tOL) is not set to 0.
This parameter is used to detect an "application overload". This is not a motor or drive thermal overload.
FtO [Overload T.B.Rest.]
0 to 6 min 0 min
g
Minimum time permitted between an overload being detected and any automatic restart.
In order for an automatic restart to be possible, the value of [Max. restart time] (tAr) page 252
must exceed that of this
parameter by at least one minute. See page 272
.
LbC [Load correction]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
g
Rated correction in Hz. See [Load correction] (LbC) page 122.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SET-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
104 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual or on the drive nameplate.
(2) If a graphic display terminal is not in use, values greater than 9,999 will be displayed on the 4-digit display with a period
mark after the thousand digit, example: 15.65 for 15,650.
FFM [Fan Mode]
[Standard] (Std)
or [Always] (run)
according to the
drive.
If [Fan Mode] (FFM) is set to [Never] (Stp), the fan of the drive is disabled.
For ATV320pppppW(S), this parameter is forced to [Always] (run).
NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the ambient temperature does not exceed 40 °C (104° F) if the fan is disabled.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Std
rUn
StP
[Standard] (Std): The fan starts and stops automatically according to the drive thermal state
[Always] (rUn): The fan is always activated
[Never] (Stp): The fan is disabled
SdS [Scale factor display]
0.1 to 200 30
Used to display a value in proportion to the output frequency [Output frequency] (rFr): the machine speed, the motor speed, etc.
The display will show
[Cust. output value] (SPd3) = to 2 decimal places
• If [Scale factor display] (SdS) y 1, [Cust. output value] (SPd1) is displayed (possible definition = 0.01)
• If 1 < [Scale factor display] (SdS) y 10, [Cust. output value] (SPd2) is displayed (possible definition = 0.1)
• If [Scale factor display] (SdS) > 10, [Cust. output value] (SPd3) is displayed (possible definition = 1)
• If [Scale factor display] (SdS) > 10 and [Scale factor display] (SdS) x [Output frequency] (rFr) > 9,999:
example: for 24,223, display will show 24.22
- If [Scale factor display] (SdS) > 10 and [Scale factor display] (SdS) x [Output frequency] (rFr) > 65,535, display
locked at 65.54
Example: Display motor speed for
4-pole motor, 1,500 rpm at 50 Hz (synchronous speed):
[Scale factor display] (SdS) = 30
[Cust. output value] (SPd3) = 1,500 at [Output frequency] (rFr) = 50 Hz
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
[Scale factor display] (SdS) x [Output frequency] (rFr)
1000
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > SET-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 105
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Motor control
The parameters in the [MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped
and no run command is present, with the following exceptions:
• [Auto tuning] (tUn) page 113, which may cause the motor to start up.
• Parameters containing the sign in the code column, which can be modified with the drive running or
stopped.
Note : We recommend to perform auto-tuning if one of the following parameters are modified from their
factory setting.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FULL [FULL] (continued)
drC- [MOTOR CONTROL]
bFr [Standard mot. freq]
[50 Hz IEC] (50)
50
60
This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters: [High speed] (HSP) page 87
, [Freq. threshold] (Ftd) page
102
, [Rated motor volt.] (UnS), [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) and [Max frequency] (tFr).
[50 Hz IEC] (50): IEC
[60 Hz NEMA] (60): NEMA
tFr [Max frequency]
10 to 599 Hz 60 Hz
The factory setting is 60 Hz, or preset to 72 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to 60 Hz.
The maximum value is limited by the following conditions:
It must not exceed 10 times the value of [Rated motor freq.] (FrS).
Ctt [Motor control type]
[Standard] (Std)
UUC
Std
Note: Select law before entering parameter values.
[SVC V] (UUC): Sensorless vector control with internal speed loop based on voltage feedback calculation. For applications
needing high performance during starting or operation.
[Standard] (Std): Standard motor law. For simple applications that do not require high performance. Simple motor control law
keeping a constant Voltage Frequency ratio, with a possible adjustment of the curve bottom. This law is generally used for motors
connected in parallel. Some specific applications with motors in parallel and high performance levels may require [SVC V]
(UUC).
Note: U0 is the result of an internal calculation based on motor parameters and multiplied by UFr (%). U0 can be adjusted by
modifying UFr value.
Voltage
Frequency
FrS
UnS
U0
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
106 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
UF5
SYn
UFq
nLd
[V/F 5pts] (UF5): 5-segment V/F profile: As [Standard] (Std) profile but also supports the avoidance of resonance
(saturation).
Note:
- U0 is the result of an internal calculation based on motor parameters and multiplied by UFr (%). U0 can
be adjusted by modifying UFr value.
- You must respect the constraint on the order of F1, F2, F3, F4, F5 and FrS otherwise an [Invalid config.]
(CFI) error is triggered.
[Sync. mot.] (SYn): For synchronous permanent magnet motors with sinusoidal electromotive force (EMF) only. This selection
makes the asynchronous motor parameters inaccessible, and the synchronous motor parameters accessible.
[V/F Quad.] (UFq): Variable torque. For pump and fan applications.
[Energy Sav.] (nLd): Energy saving. For applications that do not require high dynamics.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
Voltage
Frequency
FrS
UnS
U5
U4
U3
U1
U2
U0
F1 F2
F3
F4
F5
FrS > F5 > F4 > F3 > F2 > F1
The profile is defined by the
values of parameters UnS, FrS,
U0 to U5 and F1 to F5.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 107
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Asynchronous motor parameters
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
ASY- [ASYNC. MOTOR]
Only visible if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105 is not set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
nPr [Rated motor power]
According to drive rating According to drive rating
g
This parameter cannot be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105 is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
Rated motor power given on the nameplate, in kW if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to [50Hz IEC] (50), in HP if
[Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to [60Hz NEMA] (60).
COS
[Motor 1 Cosinus Phi]
0.5 to 1 According to drive rating
g
Nominal motor cos phi.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor param choice] (MPC) is set to [Mot Cos] (COS).
UnS [Rated motor volt.]
100 to 480 V According to drive rating and
[Standard mot. freq] (bFr)
g
This parameter cannot be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105 is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
Rated motor voltage given on the nameplate.
nCr [Rated mot. current]
0.25 to 1.5 In (1) According to drive rating and
[Standard mot. freq] (bFr)
g
This parameter cannot be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105 is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
Rated motor current given on the nameplate.
FrS [Rated motor freq.]
10 to 800 Hz 50 Hz
g
This parameter cannot be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105 is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
Rated motor frequency given on the nameplate.
The factory setting is 50 Hz, or preset to 60 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to 60 Hz.
nSP [Rated motor speed]
0 to 65,535 rpm According to drive rating
g
This parameter cannot be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105 is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
0 to 9,999 rpm then 10.00 to 65.53 krpm on the integrated display terminal.
If, rather than the rated speed, the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %, calculate the rated
speed as follows:
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x
or
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (50 Hz motors)
or
Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (60 Hz motors).
100 - slip as a %
100
50 - slip in Hz
50
60 - slip in Hz
60
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC- > ASY-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
108 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
tUn [Auto tuning]
[No] (nO)
WARNING
UNEXPECTED MOVEMENT
Autotuning moves the motor in order to tune the control loops.
• Only start the system if there are no persons or obstructions in the zone of operation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
During autotuning, the motor makes small movements, noise development and oscillations of the system are normal.
nO
YES
CLr
- Auto-tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated. If a "freewheel stop" or "fast stop" function has been
assigned to a logic input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0).
- Auto-tuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands, which will be taken into account after the auto-tuning
sequence.
- If auto-tuning detects a fault, the drive displays [No action] (nO) and, depending on the configuration of
[Autotune fault mgt] (tnL) page 268
, may switch to [Auto-tuning] (tnF) fault mode.
- Auto-tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds. Do not interrupt the process. Wait for the display to change to [No action] (nO).
Note: Motor thermal state has a big influence on tune result. Make the tune with the motor stopped and cold.
To redo a tune of the motor, wait that it is completely stopped and cold. Set first [Auto tuning]
(tUn) to [Erase tune] (CLr),
then redo the motor tuning.
The use of the motor tuning without doing a [Erase tune] (CLr) first is used to get the thermal state estimation of the motor.
In any case, the motor has to be stopped before performing a tune operation.
Cable length has an influence on the Tune result. If the cabling is modified, it is necessary to redo the tune operation.
[No action] (nO): Auto-tuning not in progress
[Do tune] (YES): Auto-tuning is performed immediatly if possible, then the parameter automatically changes
to [No action] (nO). If the drive state does not allow the tune operation immediately, the parameter changes to [No] (nO) and
the operation must be done again.
[Erase tune] (CLr): The motor parameters measured by the auto-tuning function are reseted. The default motor parameters
values are used to control the motor. [Auto tuning status] (tUS) is set to [Not done] (tAb).
tUS [Auto tuning state]
[Not done] (tAb)
tAb
PEnd
PrOG
FAIL
dOnE
(for information only, cannot be modified)
This parameter is not saved at drive power off. It shows the Autotuning status since last power on.
[Not done] (tAb): Autotune is not done
[Pending] (PEnd): Autotune has been requested but not yet performed
[In Progress] (PrOG): Autotune is in progress
[Failed] (FAIL): Autotune has detected a fault
[Done] (dOnE): The motor parameters measured by the auto-tuning function are used to control the motor
StUn [Tune selection]
[Default] (tAb)
tAb
MEAS
CUS
(for information only, cannot be modified)
[Default] (tAb): The default values are used to control the motor
[Measure] (MEAS): The values measured by the auto-tuning function are used to control the motor
[Custom] (CUS): The values set manually are used to control the motor
Note: Tune of the motor will increase significantly the performances.
tUnU [Auto tuning usage]
[Therm Mot] (tM)
nO
tM
Ct
This parameter shows the way used to modify the motor parameters according to its estimated thermal state.
[No] (nO): No thermal state estimation
[Therm Mot] (tM): Statoric thermal state estimation based on nominal current and current consumed by the motor
[Cold tun] (Ct): Statoric thermal state estimation based on statoric resistance measured at the first cold tune and tune done
at each power up
Note: An autotuning must be performed before setting [Auto tuning usage] (TUNU) to [Cold tun] (CT) to get the references
values of a cold tune.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC- > ASY-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 109
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
AUt [Automatic autotune]
[No] (nO)
WARNING
UNEXPECTED MOVEMENT
If this function is activated, autotuning is performed each time the drive is switched on.
• Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
The motor must be stopped when switching on the drive.
[Automatic autotune] (AUt) is forced to [Yes] (YES) if [Auto tuning usage] (tUnU) is set to [Cold tun] (Ct). The value
of motor statoric resistance measured during the tune is used to estimate the thermal state of the motor at power up.
nO
YES
ONE
[No] (nO): Function deactivated
[Yes] (YES): A tune is automatically done at each power up
[One] (ONE): A tune is done at the first run order.
FLU [Motor fluxing]
[No] (FnO)
g
(1)
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
If the parameter [Motor fluxing] (FLU) is set to [Continuous] (FCt), fluxing is always active, even if the
motor does not run.
• Verify that using this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the flux current to be applied in order to avoid overheating
and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
FnC
FCt
FnO
If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105
is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn), the factory setting is replaced by [Not cont.] (FnC).
In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup, magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the motor.
In [Continuous] (FCt) mode, the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up.
In [Not cont.] (FnC) mode, fluxing occurs when the motor starts up.
The flux current is greater than [Rated mot. current] (nCr) (configured rated motor current) when the flux is established and
is then adjusted to the motor magnetizing current.
[Not cont.] (FnC): Non-continuous mode
[Continuous] (FCt): Continuous mode. This option is not possible if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) page 176
is [Yes] (YES)
or if [Type of stop] (Stt) page 173
is [Freewheel] (nSt).
[No] (FnO): Function inactive. This option is not possible if [Brake assignment] (bLC) page 194
is not [No] (nO).
If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105
is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn), the [Motor fluxing] (FLU) parameter causes the
alignment of the rotor and not the fluxing.
If [Brake assignment] (bLC) page 194
is not [No] (nO), the [Motor fluxing] (FLU) parameter has no effect.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
2 s
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC- > ASY-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
110 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate.
MPC [Motor param choice]
[Mot Power] (nPr)
g
nPr
COS
[Mot Power] (nPr)
[Mot Cos] (COS)
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC- > ASY-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 111
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Asynchronous motor parameters: Expert mode
(1) On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9,999 then 10.00 to 65.53 (10,000 to 65,535).
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
ASY- [ASYNC. MOTOR]
rSA [Cust stator resist.]
0 to 65,535 mOhm 0 mOhm
g
(1)
Cold state stator resistance (per winding), modifiable value.
The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto-tuning operation, if it has been performed.
LFA [Lfw]
0 to 655.35 mH 0 mH
g
Cold state leakage inductance, modifiable value.
The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto-tuning operation, if it has been performed.
IdA [Idw]
0 to 6,553.5 A 0 A
g
Customer adjusted magnetizing current.
The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto-tuning operation, if it has been performed.
trA [Cust. rotor t const.]
0 to 65,535 ms 0 ms
g
Customer adjusted rotor time constant.
The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto-tuning operation, if it has been performed.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC- > ASY-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
112 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Synchronous motor parameters
These parameters can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page
105 is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
In this case, the asynchronous motor parameters cannot be accessed.
Once the drive is chosen:
1- Enter the motor nameplate.
2 - Perform the tune.
• Do an [Auto tuning] (tUn)
• Check the state of the synchronous motor saliency (See page 113.)
If [Saliency mot. state] (SMOt) displays [Med salient] (MLS) or [High salient] (HLS)
- follow the procedure below "3 - Improve the tune result"
and
- follow the the procedure below "4 - Adjust PHS"
Or if [Saliency mot. state] (SMOt) displays [Low salient] (LLS)
- follow the the procedure below "4 - Adjust PHS"
3 - Improve the tune results.
• Set [PSI align curr. max] (MCr) conforming to the maximum motor current. The maximum value of [PSI
align curr. max] (MCr) ) is limited by [Current Limitation] (CLI). Without information set [PSI align curr.
max] (MCr) to [Auto] (AUtO) (see page 116)
• Do a second (tUn) after the (MCr) modification.
4 - Adjust PHS.
Adjust [Syn. EMF constant] (PHS) to have optimal behavior (See page 116
.)
• Start the motor at minimal stable frequency available on the machine (without load).
• Check and note the [% error EMF sync] (rdAE) value. (See page 117)
- If the [% error EMF sync] (rdAE) value is lower than 0%, then [Syn. EMF constant] (PHS) may be
increased.
- If the [% error EMF sync] (rdAE) value is upper than 0%, then [Syn. EMF constant] (PHS) may
be reduced.
[% error EMF sync] (rdAE) value should be closed to 0%.
• Stop the motor for modify PHS in accordance with the value of the rdAE (previously noted).
Advices:
The drive must be chosen to have enough current according to the need of behavior, but not too much, to have
enough accuracy in the current measurement, especially with the high frequency signal injection (see
[HF inj. activation] (HFI) page
116).
Performances may be higher on high saliency motors by activating high frequency injection function (see
[HF inj. activation] (HFI) page
116).
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
• Verify that the motor is properly rated for the maximum current to be applied to the motor.
• Consider the duty cycle of the motor and all factors of your application including derating requirements in
determining the current limit.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC- > SYN-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 113
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
drC- [MOTOR CONTROL] (continued)
SYN- [SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR]
nCrS [Nominal I sync.]
0.25 to 1.5 In (1) According to drive rating
g
Rated synchronous motor current given on the nameplate.
PPnS [Pole pairs]
1 to 50 According to drive rating
g
Number of pairs of poles on the synchronous motor.
nSPS [Nom motor spdsync]
0 to 48,000 rpm According to drive rating
g
(2)
Rated motor speed given on the nameplate.
tqS [Motor torque]
0.1 to 6,553.5 Nm According to drive rating
g
Rated motor torque given on the nameplate.
tUn [Auto tuning]
[No] (nO)
WARNING
UNEXPECTED MOVEMENT
Autotuning moves the motor in order to tune the control loops.
• Only start the system if there are no persons or obstructions in the zone of operation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
During autotuning, the motor makes small movements, noise development and oscillations of the system are normal.
nO
YES
CLr
- Auto-tuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated. If a "freewheel stop" or "fast stop" function has been
assigned to a logic input, this input must be set to 1 (active at 0).
- Auto-tuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands, which will be taken into account after the auto-tuning
sequence.
- If auto-tuning detects a fault, the drive displays [No action] (nO) and, depending on the configuration of
[Autotune fault mgt] (tnL) page 268
, may switch to [Auto-tuning] (tnF) fault mode.
- Auto-tuning may last for 1 to 2 seconds. Do not interrupt the process. Wait for the display to change to [No action] (nO).
Note: Motor thermal state has a big influence on tune result. Make the tune with the motor stopped and cold.
To redo a tune of the motor, wait that it is completely stopped and cold. Set first [Auto tuning] (tUn) to [Erase tune] (CLr),
then redo the motor tuning.
The use of the motor tuning without doing a [Erase tune] (CLr) first is used to get the thermal state estimation of the motor.
In any case, the motor has to be stopped before performing a tune operation.
Cable length has an influence on the Tune result. If the cabling is modified, it is necessary to redo the tune operation.
[No action] (nO): Auto-tuning not in progress
[Do tune] (YES): Auto-tuning is performed immediatly if possible, then the parameter automatically changes
to [No action] (nO). If the drive state does not allow the tune operation immediately, the parameter changes to [No] (nO) and
the operation must be done again.
[Erase tune] (CLr): The motor parameters measured by the auto-tuning function are reseted. The default motor parameters
values are used to control the motor. [Auto tuning status] (tUS) is set to [Not done] (tAb).
tUS [Auto tuning state]
[Not done] (tAb)
tAb
PEnd
PrOG
FAIL
dOnE
(for information only, cannot be modified)
This parameter is not saved at drive power off. It shows the Autotuning status since last power on.
[Not done] (tAb): Autotune is not done
[Pending] (PEnd): Autotune has been requested but not yet performed
[In Progress] (PrOG): Autotune is in progress
[Failed] (FAIL): Autotune has detected a fault
[Done] (dOnE): The motor parameters measured by the auto-tuning function are used to control the motor
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC- > SYN-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
114 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
StUn [Tune selection]
[Default] (tAb)
tAb
MEAS
CUS
(for information only, cannot be modified)
Note: Tune of the motor will increase significantly the performances.
[Default] (tAb): The default values are used to control the motor
[Measure] (MEAS): The values measured by the auto-tuning function are used to control the motor
[Custom] (CUS): The values set manually are used to control the motor
tUnU [Auto tuning usage]
[Therm Mot] (tM)
nO
tM
Ct
This parameter shows the way used to modify the motor parameters according to its estimated thermal state.
[No] (nO): No thermal state estimation
[Therm Mot] (tM): Statoric thermal state estimation based on nominal current and current consumed by the motor
[Cold tun] (Ct): Statoric thermal state estimation based on statoric resistance measured at the first cold tune and tune done
at each power up.
Note: An autotuning must be performed before setting [Auto tuning usage] (TUNU) to [Cold tun] (CT) to get the references
values of a cold tune.
AUt [Automatic autotune]
[No] (nO)
WARNING
UNEXPECTED MOVEMENT
If this function is activated, autotuning is performed each time the drive is switched on.
• Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
The motor must be stopped when switching on the drive.
[Automatic autotune] (AUt) is forced to [Yes] (YES) if [Auto tuning usage] (tUnU) is set to [Cold tun] (Ct). The value
of motor statoric resistance measured during the tune is used to estimate the thermal state of the motor at power up.
nO
YES
One
[No] (nO): Function deactivated
[Yes] (YES): A tune is automatically done at each power up
[One] (ONE): A tune is done at the first run order.
SMOt [Saliency mot. state]
g
(for information only, cannot be modified)
Information on synchronous motor saliency.
This parameter can be accessed if [Tune selection] (StUN) is set to [Measure] (MEAS).
Note: In case of motor with low saliency, the standard control law is advised.
nO
LLS
MLS
HLS
[No] (nO): Tune not done
[Low salient] (LLS): Low saliency level (Recommended configuration: [Angle setting type] (ASt) = [PSI align] (PSI) or
[PSIO align] (PSIO) and [HF inj. activation] (HFI) = [No] (nO)).
[Med salient] (MLS): Medium saliency level ([Angle setting type] (ASt) = [SPM align] (SPMA) is possible.
[HF inj. activation] (HFI) = [Yes] (YES) could work).
[High salient] (HLS): High saliency level ([Angle setting type] (ASt) = [IPM align] (IPMA) is possible.
[HF inj. activation] (HFI) = [Yes] (YES) is possible).
ASt [Angle setting type]
[PSIO align.] (PSIO)
g
Mode for measuring the phase-shift angle. Visible only if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
[PSI align] (PSI) and [PSIO align] (PSIO) are working for all type of synchronous motors. [SPM align] (SPMA) and
[IPM align] (IPMA) increase performances depending on the type of synchronous motor.
IPMA
SPMA
PSI
PSIO
nO
[IPM align] (IPMA): Alignment for IPM motor. Alignment mode for Interior-buried Permanent Magnet motor (usually, this kind
of motor has a high saliency level). It uses high frequency injection, which is less noisy than standard alignment mode.
[SPM align] (SPMA): Alignment for SPM motor. Mode for Surface-mounted Permanent Magnet motor (usually, this kind of
motor has a medium or low saliency level). It uses high frequency injection, which is less noisy than standard alignment mode.
[PSI align] (PSI): Pulse signal injection. Standard alignment mode by pulse signal injection.
[PSIO align] (PSIO): Pulse signal injection - Optimized. Standard optimized alignment mode by pulse signal injection. The
phase shift angle measurement time is re
duced after the first run order or tune operation, even if the drive has been turned off.
[No align] (nO): No alignment
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC- > SYN-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 115
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate.
(2) On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9,999 then 10.00 to 65.53 (10,000 to 65,536).
HFI [HF inj. activation]
[No] (nO)
g
Activation of high frequency signal injection in RUN. This function allows to estimate the motor speed in a view to have torque
at low speed without speed feedback.
Note: The more the saliency is high, the more the [HF inj. activation] (HFI) function will be efficient.
In order to ensure the performances, it could be necessary to adjust the speed loop parameters ([K speed loop filter] (SFC),
[Speed time integral] (SIt) and [Speed prop. gain] (SPG), see page 118
) and the speed estimation phase locked loop
(Expert parameters [HF pll bandwith] (SPb) and [HF pll dump. factor] (SPF), see page 116
).
High frequency injection is not efficient with low saliency motors (see [Saliency mot. state] (SMOt) page 114
).
It is advised to have 4 kHz of pwm frequency ([Switching freq.] (SFr)).
In case of instability with no load, it is advised to decrease [Speed prop. gain] (SPG) and [HF pll bandwith] (SPb). Then,
adjust the speed loop parameters to have the dynamic behavior and the PLL gains to have a good speed estimation at low
speed.
In case of instability with load, it could help to increase the [Angle error Comp.] (PEC) parameter (mainly for SPM motor).
nO
YES
[No] (nO): Function deactivated
[Yes] (YES): High frequency injection is used for speed estimation
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC- > SYN-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
116 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Synchronous motor: Expert mode
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
SYN- [SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR]
rSAS [Cust. stator R syn]
0 to 65,535 mOhm 0 mOhm
g
(1)
Cold state stator resistance (per winding). The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto-tuning operation, if it has been
performed.
The value can be entered by the user, if he knows it.
LdS [Autotune L d-axis]
0 to 655.35 mH 0 mH
g
Axis "d" stator inductance in mH (per phase).
On motors with smooth poles [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS) = [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) = Stator inductance L.
The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto-tuning operation, if it has been performed.
LqS [Autotune L q-axis]
0 to 655.35 mH 0 mH
g
Axis "q" stator inductance in mH (per phase).
On motors with smooth poles [Autotune L d-axis] (LdS) = [Autotune L q-axis] (LqS) = Stator inductance L.
The factory setting is replaced by the result of the auto-tuning operation, if it has been performed.
PHS [Syn. EMF constant]
0 to 6,553.5 mV/rpm 0 mV/rpm
g
(1)
Synchronous motor EMF constant, in mV per rpm (peak voltage per phase).
PHS adjustment allows to reduce the current in operation without load.
FrSS [Nominal freq sync.]
10 to 800 Hz nSPS * PPnS / 60
g
Nominal motor frequency for synchronous motor in Hz unit. Automatically updated according to
[Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS) and [Pole pairs] (PPnS) data.
SPb [HF pll bandwith]
0 to 100 Hz 25 Hz
g
Bandwidth of the stator frequency Pll.
SPF [HF pll dump. factor]
0 to 200% 100%
g
Dumping factor of the stator frequency Pll.
PEC [Angle error Comp.]
0 to 500% 0%
g
Error compensation of the angle position in high frequency mode.
It increases performances at low speed in generator and motor mode, particularly for SPM motors.
AUtO [Auto] (AUtO): The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor, calculated using the drive parameters.
FrI [HF injection freq.]
250 to 1,000 Hz 500 Hz
g
Frequency of the high frequency injection signal. It has an influence on the noise during angle shift measurement and speed
estimation accuracy.
HIr [HF current level]
0 to 200% 25%
g
Ratio for the current level of the high frequency injection signal. It has an influence on the noise during angle shift measurement
and speed estimation accuracy.
MCr [PSI align curr. max]
[Auto] (AUtO) to 300% [Auto] (AUtO)
g
Current level in % of [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS) for [PSI align] (PSI) and [PSIO align] (PSIO) angle shift measurement
modes. This parameter has an impact on the inductor measurement. [PSI align curr. max] (MCr) is used for tune operation.
This current must be equal or higher than the maximum current level of the application, otherwise instability may occur.
If [PSI align curr. max] (MCr) is set to [Auto] (AUtO), [PSI align curr. max] (MCr) = 150% of [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS)
during the tune operation and 100% of [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS) during angle shift measurement in case of standard
alignment ([PSI align] (PSI) or [PSIO align] (PSIO)).
ILr [Injection level align]
0 to 200% 50%
g
Current level in % of [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS) for high frequency phase-shift angle measurement IPMA type.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC- > SYN-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 117
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
(1) On the integrated display unit: 0 to 9,999 then 10.00 to 65.53 (10,000 to 65,536).
SIr [Boost level align.]
0 to 200% 100%
g
Current level in % of [Nominal I sync.] (nCrS) for high frequency phase-shift angle measurement SPMA type.
rdAE [% error EMF sync]
-3276.7 to 3275.8 % -
Ratio D-Axis Current
Use rdAE to asjust [Syn. EMF constant] (PHS), rdAE should be closed to 0.
If the [% error EMF sync] (rdAE) value is lower than 0%, then [Syn. EMF constant] (PHS), may be increased.
If the [% error EMF sync] (rdAE) value is upper than 0%, then [Syn. EMF constant] (PHS), may be reduced.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC- > SYN-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
118 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
drC- [MOTOR CONTROL] (continued)
SPG
[Speed prop. gain]
0 to 1,000% 40%
g
Speed loop proportional gain.
Visible if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is not set to [Standard] (Std), [V/F 5pts] (UFS) or [V/F Quad.] (UFq).
SPGU
[UF inertia comp.]
0 to 1,000% 40%
g
Inertia factor for following motor control laws.
Visible if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [Standard] (Std), [V/F 5pts] (UFS) or [V/F Quad.] (UFq).
SIt
[Speed time integral]
1 to 65,535 ms 63 ms
g
Speed loop integral time constant.
Visible if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is not set to [Standard] (Std), [V/F 5pts] (UFS) or [V/F Quad.] (UFq).
SFC
[K speed loop filter]
0 to 100 65
g
Speed filter coefficient (0(IP) to 100(PI)).
FFH
[Spd est. filter time]
0 to 100 ms 6.4 ms
g
Accessible in Expert mode only.
Frequency to filter the estimated speed.
CrtF
[Cur. ref. filter time]
0 to 100 ms 3.2 ms
g
Accessible in Expert mode only.
Filter time of the current reference filter [of control law (if [No] (nO): stator natural frequency)].
UFr
[IR compensation]
0 to 200% 100%
Used to optimize torque at very low speed, or to adapt to special cases (for example: for motors connected in parallel, decrease
[IR compensation] (UFr)). If there is insufficient torque at low speed, increase [IR compensation] (UFr). A too high value
can avoid the motor to start (locking) or change the current limiting mode.
SLP [Slip compensation]
0 to 300% 100%
g
This parameter cannot be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
This parameter is written at 0% when [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [V/F Quad.] (UFq).
Adjusts the slip compensation around the value set by the rated motor speed.
The speeds given on motor nameplates are not necessarily exact.
If slip setting is lower than actual slip: The motor is not rotating at the correct speed in steady state, but at a speed lower than
the reference.
If slip setting is higher than actual slip: The motor is overcompensated and the speed is unstable.
U1 [U1]
0 to 800 V according to rating 0 V
g
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [V/F 5pts] (UF5).
F1 [F1]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
g
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [V/F 5pts] (UF5).
U2 [U2]
0 to 800 V according to rating 0 V
g
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [V/F 5pts] (UF5).
F2 [F2]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
g
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [V/F 5pts] (UF5).
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 119
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
U3 [U3]
0 to 800 V according to rating 0 V
g
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [V/F 5pts] (UF5).
F3 [F3]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
g
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [V/F 5pts] (UF5).
U4 [U4]
0 to 800 V according to rating 0 V
g
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [V/F 5pts] (UF5).
F4 [F4]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
g
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [V/F 5pts] (UF5).
U5 [U5]
0 to 800 V according to rating 0 V
g
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [V/F 5pts] (UF5).
F5 [F5]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
g
V/F profile setting.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [V/F 5pts] (UF5).
CLI
[Current Limitation]
0 to 1.5 In (1) 1.5 In (1)
g
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
• Verify that the motor is properly rated for the maximum current to be applied to the motor.
• Consider the duty cycle of the motor and all factors of your application including derating requirements in
determining the current limit.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
First current limitation.
Note: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) fault mode if this has been enabled
(see page 256
). If it is less than the no-load motor current, the motor cannot run.
SFt [Switch. freq type]
[SFR type 1] (HF1)
HF1
HF2
The motor switching frequency will be modified (reduced) when the internal temperature of the drive will be too high.
[SFR type 1] (HF1): Heating optimization
Allows the system to adapt the switching frequency according to the motor frequency.
[SFR type 2] (HF2): Motor noise optimization (for high switching frequency)
Allows the system to keep a constant chosen switching frequency [Switching freq.] (SFr) whatever the motor frequency
[Output frequency] (rFr).
In the event of overheating, the drive automatically decreases the switching frequency.
It is restored to its original value when the temperature returns to normal.
SFr
[Switching freq.]
2 to 16 kHz 4 kHz
NOTICE
DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the switching frequency of the drive does not exceed 4 kHz if the EMC filter is disconnected for
operation of the drive in an IT mains.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
This applies to the following drive versions: ATV320pppM2p
Switching frequency setting.
Adjustment range: The maximum value is limited to 4 kHz if [Motor surge limit] (SUL) parameter page 120
is configured.
Note: In the event of excessive temperature rise, the drive will automatically reduce the switching frequency and reset it once
the temperature returns to normal.
In case of high speed motor, it is advised to increase the Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) frequency [Switching freq.] (SFr)
at 8, 12 or 16 kHz.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
120 NVE41295 04/2018
nrd [Noise reduction]
[No] (nO)
nO
YES
Random frequency modulation helps to prevent any resonance, which may occur at a fixed frequency.
[No] (nO): Fixed frequency
[Yes] (YES): Frequency with random modulation
bOA [Boost activation]
[Dynamic] (dYnA)
nO
dYnA
StAt
[Inactive] (nO): No boost
[Dynamic] (dYnA): Dynamic boost
[Static] (StAt): Static boost
bOO [Boost]
-100 to 100% 0%
g
This parameter can be accessed if [Boost activation] (bOA) is not set to [No] (nO).
Adjustment of the motor magnetizing current at low speed, as a % of the rated magnetizing current. This parameter is used to
increase or reduce the time taken to establish the torque. It allows gradual adjustment up to the frequency set by
[Action Boost] (FAb). Negative values apply particularly to tapered rotor motors.
FAb [Action Boost]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
g
This parameter can be accessed if [Boost activation] (bOA) is not set to [No] (nO).
Frequency above which the magnetizing current is no longer affected by [Boost] (bOO).
SUL [Motor surge limit.]
[No] (nO)
nO
YES
This function limits motor overvoltages and is useful in the following applications:
- NEMA motors
- Japanese motors
- Spindle motors
- Rewound motors
This parameter can remain set to [No] (nO) for 230/400 V motors used at 230 V, or if the length of cable between the drive and
the motor does not exceed:
- 4 m with unshielded cables
- 10 m with shielded cables
Note: When [Motor surge limit.] (SUL) is set to [Yes](YES), the maximum switching frequency [Switching freq.] (SFr)
is modified, see page 120
.
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Yes] (YES): Function active
SOP [Volt surge limit. opt]
10 s
g
Optimization parameter for transient overvoltages at the motor terminals. This parameter can be accessed if [Motor surge limit.]
(SUL) is set to [Yes] (YES).
6
8
10
Set to 6, 8 or 10 s, according to the following table.
Note: This parameter is useful for ATV320pppN4p drives.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
0
Rated magnetizing current
Positive [Boost] (bOO)
Negative [Boost] (bOO)
[Action Boost] (FAb)
Magnetizing current
Frequency
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 121
The value of the [Volt surge limit. opt] (SOP) parameter corresponds to the attenuation time of the cable
used. It is defined to help to prevent the superimposition of voltage wave reflections resulting from long cable
lengths. It limits overvoltages to twice the DC bus rated voltage.
The tables on the following page give examples of correspondence between the
[Volt surge limit. opt] (SOP) parameter and the length of the cable between the drive and the motor. For
longer cable lengths, an output of the filter or a dV/dt protection filter must be used.
For motors in parallel, the sum of all the cable lengths must be taken into consideration. Compare the length
given in the table row corresponding to the power for one motor with that corresponding to the total power, and
select the shorter length.
Example: Two 7.5 kW (10 HP) motors
Take the lengths on the 15 kW (20 HP) table row, which are shorter than those on the 7.5 kW (10 HP) row,
and divide by the number of motors to obtain the length per motor (with unshielded "GORSE" cable and
SOP = 6, the result is 40/2 = 20 m maximum for each 7.5 kW (10 HP) motor).
In special cases (for example, different types of cable, different motor powers in parallel, different cable lengths
in parallel, etc.), we recommend using an oscilloscope to check the overvoltage values obtained at the motor
terminals.
To retain the overall drive performance, do not increase the SOP value unnecessarily.
Tables giving the correspondence between the SOP parameter and the cable length, for 400 V supply mains
For 230/400 V motors used at 230 V, the [Motor surge limit.] (SUL) parameter can remain set to
[No] (nO).
Altivar 320 Motor Cable cross-
section (min)
Maximum cable length in meters
Reference Power Unshielded "GORSE" cable
Type H07 RN-F 4Gxx
Shielded "GORSE" cable
Type GVCSTV-LS/LH
Shielded "BELDEN" cable
Type 2950x
kW HP in mm² AWG SOP = 10 SOP = 8 SOP = 6 SOP = 10 SOP = 8 SOP = 6 SOP = 10 SOP = 8 SOP = 6
ATV320U04N4p 0.37 0.50 1.5 14 100 m 70 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65 m 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV320U06N4p 0.55 0.75 1.5 14 100 m 70 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65 m 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV320U07N4p 0.75 1 1.5 14 100 m 70 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65 m 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV320U11N4p 1.1 1.5 1.5 14 100 m 70 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65 m 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV320U15N4p 1.5 2 1.5 14 100 m 70 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65 m 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV320U22N4p 2.2 3 1.5 14 110 m 65 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65 m 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV320U30N4p 3- 1.5 14 110 m 65 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65 m 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV320U40N4p 452.5 12 110 m 65 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65 m 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV320U55N4p 5.5 7.5 4 10 120 m 65 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65m 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV320U75N4p 7.5 10 6 8 120 m 65 m 45 m 105 m 85 m 65 m 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV320D11N4p 11 15 10 8 115 m 60 m 45 m 100 m 75 m 55 m 50 m 40 m 30 m
ATV320D15N4p 15 20 16 6 105 m 60 m 40 m 100 m 70 m 50 m 50 m 40 m 30 m
Configuration Mode (ConF)
122 NVE41295 04/2018
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
Ubr [Braking level]
335 to 995 V According to drive rating
voltage
Braking transistor command level (See [Braking level] (ubr) page 247).
LbA [Load sharing]
[No] (nO)
g
When 2 motors are connected mechanically and therefore at the same speed, and each is controlled by a drive, this function
can be used to improve torque distribution between the two motors. To do this, it varies the speed based on the torque.
This parameter can only be accessed if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105
is set to [SVC V] (UUC).
nO
YES
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Yes] (YES): Function active
LbC [Load correction]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
g
Rated correction in Hz.
This parameter can be accessed if [Load sharing] (LbA) is set to [Yes] (YES).
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
LbC
LbC
Torque
Nominal torque
Nominal torque
Frequency
0
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 123
Load sharing, parameters that can be accessed at expert level
Principle:
The load sharing factor K is determined by the torque and speed, with two factors K1 and K2 (K = K1 x K2).
+
-
Reference
Speed
Ramp
Speed loop
Balancing
K
Filter
Torque reference
LBC
LBC1
LBC2
LBC3
LBF
K1
Speed
LBC1 LBC2
1
K2
Torque
LBC3
LBC3
Rated
torque x (1 + LBC3)
LBC
LBC
Configuration Mode (ConF)
124 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
LbC1 [Correction min spd]
0 to 598.9 Hz 0 Hz
g
This parameter can be accessed if [Load sharing] (LbA) is set to [Yes] (YES).
Minimum speed for load correction in Hz. Below this threshold, no corrections are made. Used to cancel correction at very low
speed if this would hamper rotation of the motor.
LbC2 [Correction max spd]
[Correction min spd]
(LbC1) + 0.1 at 599 Hz
0.1 Hz
g
This parameter can be accessed if [Load sharing] (LbA) is set to [Yes] (YES).
Speed threshold in Hz above which maximum load correction is applied.
LbC3 [Torque offset]
0 to 300% 0%
g
This parameter can be accessed if [Load sharing] (LbA) is set to [Yes] (YES).
Minimum torque for load correction as a % of the rated torque. Below this threshold, no corrections are made. Used to avoid
torque instabilities when the torque direction is not constant.
LbF [Sharing filter]
0 to 20 s 100 ms
g
This parameter can be accessed if [Load sharing] (LbA) is set to [Yes] (YES).
Time constant (filter) for correction in ms. Used in the event of flexible mechanical coupling in order to avoid instabilities.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 125
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Inputs / outputs CFG
The parameters in the [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-) menu can only be modified when the drive is
stopped and no run command is present.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FULL [FULL] (continued)
I_O- [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
tCC [2/3 wire control]
[2 wire] (2C)
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If this parameter is changed, the parameters [Reverse assign.] (rrS) and [2 wire type] (tCt) and the
assignments of the digital inputs are reset to the factory setting.
Verify that this change is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
2C
3C
[2 wire] (2C)
2-wire control (level commands): This is the input state (0 or 1) or edge (0 to 1 or 1 to 0) which controls running or stopping.
Example of "source" wiring:
LI1: forward
LIx: reverse
[3 wire] (3C)
3-wire control (pulse commands): A "forward" or "reverse" pulse is sufficient to command starting, a "stop" pulse is sufficient
to command stopping.
Example of "source" wiring:
LI1: stop
LI2: forward
LIx: reverse
tCt [2 wire type]
[Transition] (trn)
g
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that the parameter setting is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
LEL
trn
PFO
[Level] (LEL): State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run (1) or stop (0)
[Transition] (trn): A change of state (transition or edge) is necessary to initiate operation, in order to avoid accidental restarts
after a break in the power supply
[Fwd priority] (PFO): State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop, but the "forward" input takes priority over the "reverse"
input
2 s
+24 LI1 LIx
ATVppp
+24 LI1 LI2 LIx
ATVppp
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
126 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
rUn [Drive Running]
[No] (nO)
g
Assignment of the stop command.
Visible only if [2/3 wire control] (tCC) is set to [3 wire] (3C).
LI1
Cd00
OL01
...
OL10
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1 if not in [I/O profile] (IO)
[Cd00] (Cd00): In [I/O profile] (IO), can be switched with possible logic inputs
[OL01] (OL01): Function blocks: Logical Output 01
...
[OL10] (OL10): Function blocks: Logical Output 10
Frd [Forward]
[LI1] (LI1)
LI1
Cd00
OL01
...
OL10
Assignment of the forward direction command.
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1 if not in [I/O profile] (IO)
[Cd00] (Cd00): In [I/O profile] (IO), can be switched with possible logic inputs
[OL01] (OL01): Function blocks: Logical Output 01
...
[OL10] (OL10): Function blocks: Logical Output 10
rrS [Reverse assign.]
[LI2] (LI2)
nO
LI1
...
Assignment of the reverse direction command.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
(If [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [Not Separ.] (SIM) or [Separate] (SEP) then [CD11] (Cd11) up to [CD15] (Cd15), [C111] (C111)
up to [C115] (C115), [C211] (C211) up to [C215] (C215) and [C311] (C311) up to [C315] (C315) are not available).
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 127
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
L1- [LI1 CONFIGURATION]
L1A [LI1 assignment]
nO
rUn
Frd
rrS
rPS
JOG
USP
dSP
PS2
PS4
PS8
rFC
nSt
dCI
FSt
FLO
rSF
tUL
SPM
FLI
PAU
PIS
Pr2
Pr4
tLA
EtF
rCA
CnF1
CnF2
CHA1
CHA2
tLC
CCS
InH
PS16
LC2
rCb
trC
bCI
SAF
SAr
dAF
dAr
CLS
LES
rtr
SnC
rPA
SH2
SH4
FPS1
FPS2
FPr1
FPr2
FUSP
FdSP
Ft
USI
dSI
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured.
It displays all the functions that are assigned to input LI1 in order to check for multiple assignments.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[Run] (rUn): Run Enable
[Forward] (Frd): Forward operation
[Reverse] (rrS): Reverse operation
[Ramp switching] (rPS): Ramp switching
[Jog] (JOG): Jog operation
[+Speed] (USP): + speed
[- speed] (dSP): - speed
[2 preset speeds] (PS2): 2 Preset speeds
[4 preset speeds] (PS4): 4 Preset speeds
[8 preset speeds] (PS8): 8 Preset speeds
[Ref. 2 switching] (rFC): Reference switching
[Freewheel stop] (nSt): Freewheel stop
[DC injection] (dCI): Injection DC stop
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
[Forced local] (FLO): Forced local mode
[Fault reset] (rSF): Fault reset
[Auto-tuning] (tUL): Auto-tuning
[Ref. memo.] (SPM): Save reference
[Pre Fluxing] (FLI): Motor fluxing
[Auto / manual] (PAU): PI(D) auto-manu
[PID integral reset] (PIS): Integral shunting PI(D)
[2 preset PID ref.] (Pr2
): 2 Preset PI(D) references
[4 preset PID ref.] (Pr4): 4 Preset PI(D) references
[Torque limitation] (tLA): Permanent torque limitation
[External fault] (EtF): External fault
[Output contact. fdbk] (rCA): Downstream contactor feedback
[2 config. switching] (CnF1): Configuration switching 1
[3 config. switching] (CnF2): Configuration switching 2
[2 parameter sets] (CHA1): Parameter switching 1
[3 parameter sets] (CHA2): Parameter switching 2
[Activ. Analog torque limitation] (tLC): Torque limitation: Activation (analog input) by a logic input
[Cmd switching] (CCS): Command channel switching
[Fault inhibition] (InH): Fault inhibition
[16 preset speeds] (PS16): 16 preset speeds
[Current limit 2] (LC2): Current limitation switching
[Ref 1B switching] (rCb):
Reference channel switching (1 to 1B)
[Traverse control] (trC): Traverse control
[Brake contact] (bCI): Brake logic input contact
[Stop FW limit sw.] (SAF): Stop switch forward
[Stop RV limit sw.] (SAr): Stop switch reverse
[Slowdown forward] (dAF): Slowdown attained forward
[Slowdown reverse] (dAr): Slowdown attained reverse
[Disable limit sw.] (CLS): Limits switches clearing
[Drive lock (Line contact. ctrl)] (LES): Emergency stop
[Init. traverse ctrl.] (rtr): Reload traverse control
[Counter wobble] (SnC): Counter wobble synchronization
[Prod. reset] (rPA): Reset Product
[2 HSP] (SH2): High Speed 2
[4 HSP] (SH4): High Speed 4
[Preset spd2] (FPS1): Function key preset speed 1 assignment
[Preset spd3] (
FPS2): Function key preset speed 2 assignment
[PID ref. 2] (FPr1): Function key preset PI 1 assignment
[PID ref. 3] (FPr2): Function key preset PI 2 assignment
[+Speed] (FUSP): Function key faster assignment
[-Speed] (FdSP): Function key slower assignment
[T/K] (Ft ): Function key bumpless assignment
[+speed around ref.] (USI): + Speed around ref
[-speed around ref.] (dSI): - Speed around ref
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > L1-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
128 NVE41295 04/2018
USI
dSI
IL01
...
IL10
FbrM
SLS1
SLS2
SS11
SS12
StO1
StO2
SMS1
SMS2
[+speed around ref.] (USI): + Speed around ref
[-speed around ref.] (dSI): - Speed around ref
[IL01] (IL01): Function blocks: Logical Input 1
...
[IL10] (IL10): Function blocks: Logical Input 10
[FB start] (FbrM): Function blocks: Run mode
[SLS ch.1] (SLS1): SLS safety function Channel 1
[SLS ch.2] (SLS2): SLS safety function Channel 2
[SS1 ch.1] (SS11): SS1 safety function Channel 1
[SS1 ch.2] (SS12): SS1 safety function Channel 2
[STO ch.1] (St01): STO safety function Channel 1
[STO ch.2] (St02): STO safety function Channel 2
[SMS ch.1] (SMS1): SMS safety function Channel 1
[SMS ch.2] (SMS2): SMS safety function Channel 2
Note: Safety function channels are available for LI3-LI4 and LI5-LI6 only.
L1d [LI1 On Delay]
0 to 200 ms 0 ms
This parameter is used to take account of the change of the logic input to state 1 with a delay that can be adjusted between 0
and 200 milliseconds, in order to filter out possible interference. The change to state 0 is taken into account without delay.
I_O- [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (continued)
L2-
to
L6-
[LIx CONFIGURATION]
All the logic inputs available on the drive are processed as in the example for LI1 above, up to LI6.
L5-
[LI5 CONFIGURATION]
Specific parameters for LI5 used as a pulse input.
PIA [RP assignment]
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured.
It displays all the functions associated with the Pulse input in order to check, for example, for compatibility problems.
Identical to [AI1 assignment] (A11A) page 133
.
PIL [RP min value]
0 to 20.00 kHz 0 kHz
Pulse input scaling parameter of 0% in Hz * 10 unit.
PFr [RP max value]
0 to 20.00 kHz 20.00 kHz
Pulse input scaling parameter of 100% in Hz * 10 unit.
PFI [RP filter]
0 to 1,000 ms 0 ms
I/O ext Pulse input cutoff time of the low-filter.
LA1-
LA2-
[LAx CONFIGURATION]
The 2 analog inputs AI1 and AI2 on the drive could be used as LI inputs and are processed as in the example for LI1 above.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
2 s
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > L1-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 129
Configuration of analog inputs and Pulse input
The minimum and maximum input values (in volts, mA, etc.) are converted to % in order to adapt the
references to the application.
Minimum and maximum input values:
The minimum value corresponds to a reference of 0% and the maximum value to a reference of 100%. The
minimum value may be greater than the maximum value:
For +/- bidirectional inputs, the min. and max. are relative to the absolute value, for example +/- 2 to 8 V.
Reference
100%
0%
[Min value]
(
CrLx or
ULx or PIL)
[Max value]
(CrHx or
UHx or PFr)
20 mA or
10 V or
20.00 kHz
Current or voltage
or pulse input
Reference
100%
0%
[Min value]
(
CrLx or
ULx or PIL)
[Max value]
(
CrHx or
UHx or PFr)
Current or voltage
or pulse input
20 mA or
10 V or
20.00 kHz
Configuration Mode (ConF)
130 NVE41295 04/2018
Range (output values): For analog inputs only:
This parameter is used to configure the reference range to [0%
V100%] or [-100% V +100%] in order to obtain
a bidirectional output from a unidirectional input.
Reference
100%
0%
[Min value] [Max value]
Range 0 V 100%
Current or
voltage
input
20 mA or
10 V
Reference
100%
0%
[Min value]
[Max value]
Current or
voltage
input
- 100%
Range - 100%
V + 100%
20 mA
or 10 V
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 131
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
I_O- [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (continued)
bSP [Reference template]
[Standard] (bSd)
bSd
bLS
bnS
bnS0
[Standard] (bSd)
[Pedestal] (bLS)
[Deadband] (bnS)
[Deadband 0] (bnS0)
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Frequency
Reference
LSP
-100%
+100%
HSP
LSP
HSP
0%
At zero reference the frequency = LSP
Frequency
Reference
LSP
-100%
+100%
HSP
LSP
HSP
At reference = 0 to LSP the frequency = LSP
Frequency
Reference
LSP
-100%
+100%
HSP
LSP
HSP
0
At reference = 0 to LSP the frequency = 0
Frequency
Reference
LSP
-100%
+100%
HSP
LSP
HSP
0%
This operation is the same as [Standard] (bSd), except that in
the following cases at zero reference, the frequency = 0:
The signal is less than [Min value], which is greater than 0
(example 1 V on a 2 - 10 V input)
The signal is greater than [Min value], which is greater than
[Max value] (example: 11 V on a 10 - 0 V input).
If the input range is configured as "bidirectional", operation remains
identical to [Standard] (bSd).
This parameter defines how the speed reference is taken into
account, for analog inputs and Pulse input only. In the case of the
PID regulator, this is the PID output reference.
The limits are set by the [Low speed] (LSP) and
[High speed] (HSP) parameters, page 87
.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
132 NVE41295 04/2018
Delinearization: For analog inputs only:
The input can be delinearized by configuring an intermediate point on the input/output curve of this input:
For range 0
V 100%
Note: For [Interm. point X], 0% corresponds to [Min value] and 100% to [Max value].
For range -100%
V 100%
Reference
100%
0%
[Min value]
(0%)
[Interm. point X] [Max value]
(100%)
Current or
voltage
input
[Interm. point Y]
20 mA or
10 V
Reference
100%
0%
[Min value]
(-100%)
[Interm. point
X]
[Max value]
(100%)
Current or
voltage input
[Interm. point Y]
- [Interm. point Y]
- 100%
- [Interm. point X]
0%
20 mA or
10 V
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 133
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
AI1-
[AI1 CONFIGURATION]
AI1A [AI1 assignment]
nO
AO1
Fr1
Fr2
SA2
PIF
tAA
dA2
PIM
FPI
SA3
Fr1b
dA3
FLOC
MA2
MA3
PES
IA01
...
IA10
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured.
It displays all the functions associated with input AI1 in order to check, for example, for compatibility problems.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[AO1 assignment] (AO1): Analog output AO1
[Ref.1 channel] (Fr1): Reference source 1
[Ref.2 channel] (Fr2): Reference source 2
[Summing ref. 2] (SA2): Summing reference 2
[PID feedback] (PIF): PI feedback (PI control)
[Torque limitation] (tAA): Torque limitation: Activation by an analog value
[Subtract. ref. 2] (dA2): Subtracting reference 2
[Manual PID ref.] (PIM): Manual speed reference of the PI(D) regulator (auto-man)
[PID speed ref.] (FPI): Speed reference of the PI(D) regulator (predictive reference)
[Summing ref. 3] (SA3): Summing reference 3
[Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b): Reference source 1B
[Subtract. ref. 3] (dA3): Subtracting reference 3
[Forced local] (FLOC): Forced local reference source
[Ref.2 multiplier] (MA2): Multiplying reference 2
[Ref. 3 multiplier] (MA3
): Multiplying reference 3
[Weight input] (PES): Hoisting: External weight measurement function
[IA01] (IA01): Function blocks: Analog Input 01
...
[IA10] (IA10): Function blocks: Analog Input 10
AI1t [AI1 Type]
[Voltage] (10U)
10U [Voltage] (10U): Positive voltage input 0 - 10 V (negative values are interpreted as zero: the input is unidirectional)
UIL1 [AI1 min value]
0 to 10.0 V 0 V
AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
UIH1 [AI1 max value]
0 to 10.0 V 10.0 V
AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
AI1F [AI1 filter]
0 to 10.00 s 0 s
Interference filtering.
AI1L [AI1 range]
[0 - 100%] (POS)
POS
nEG
[0 - 100%] (POS): Positive logical
[+/- 100%] (nEG): Positive and negative logical
AI1E [AI1 Interm. point X]
0 to 100% 0%
Input delinearization point coordinate. Percentage of the physical input signal.
0% corresponds to [AI1 min value] (UIL1).
100% corresponds to [AI1 max value] (UIH1).
AI1S [AI1 Interm. point Y]
0 to 100% 0%
Output delinearization point coordinate (frequency reference).
Percentage of the internal frequency reference corresponding to the [AI1 Interm. point X] (A11E) percentage of physical
input signal.
I_O- [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (continued)
AI2- [AI2 CONFIGURATION]
AI2A [AI2 assignment]
Identical to [AI1 assignment] (A11A) page 133.
AI2t [AI2 Type]
[Voltage +/-] (n10U)
10U
n10U
[Voltage] (10U): Positive voltage input 0 - 10 V (negative values are interpreted as zero: the input is unidirectional)
[Voltage +/-] (n10U): Positive and negative voltage input +/- 10 V (the input is bidirectional)
UIL2 [AI2 min value]
0 to 10.0 V 0 V
AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > AI1-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
134 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
UIH2 [AI2 max. value]
0 to 10.0 V 10.0 V
AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
AI2F [AI2 filter]
0 to 10.00 s 0 s
Interference filtering.
AI2L [AI2 range]
[0 - 100%] (POS)
POS
nEG
This parameter is forced to [0 - 100%] (POS) and can not be accessed if [AI2 Type] (AI2t) (page 133
) is set to [Voltage
+/-] (n10U) .
[0 - 100%] (POS): Positive logical
[+/- 100%] (nEG): Positive and negative logical
AI2E [AI2 Interm. point X]
0 to 100% 0%
Input delinearization point coordinate. Percentage of the physical input signal.
0% corresponds to [Min value] if the range is 0 V 100%.
0% corresponds to if the range is -100%
V
+100%.
100% corresponds to [Max value].
AI2S [AI2 Interm. point Y]
0 to 100% 0%
Output delinearization point coordinate (frequency reference).
Percentage of the internal frequency reference corresponding to the [AI2 Interm. point X] (A12E) percentage of physical
input signal.
I_O- [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (continued)
AI3- [AI3 CONFIGURATION]
AI3A [AI3 assignment]
Identical to [AI1 assignment] (A11A) page 133.
AI3t [AI3 Type]
[Current] (0A)
0A [Current] (0A): Current input 0 - 20 mA
CrL3 [AI3 min. value]
0 to 20.0 mA 0 mA
AI3 current scaling parameter of 0%.
CrH3 [AI3 max. value]
0 to 20.0 mA 20.0 mA
AI3 current scaling parameter of 100%.
AI3F [AI3 filter]
0 to 10.00 s 0 s
Interference filtering.
AI3L [AI3 range]
[0 - 100%] (POS)
POS
nEG
[0 - 100%] (POS): Unidirectional input
[+/- 100%] (nEG): Bidirectional input
Example: On a 4 - 20 mA input.
4 mA corresponds to reference -100%.
12 mA corresponds to reference 0%.
20 mA corresponds to reference +100%.
Since AI3 is, in physical terms, a bidirectional input, the [+/- 100%] (nEG) configuration must only be used if the signal applied
is unidirectional. A bidirectional signal is not compatible with a bidirectional configuration.
AI3E [AI3 Interm. point X]
0 to 100% 0%
Input delinearization point coordinate. Percentage of the physical input signal.
0% corresponds to [Min value] (CrL3) if the range is 0 V 100%.
0% corresponds to if the range is -100%
V
+100%.
100% corresponds to [AI3 max. value] (CrH3).
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
[Max value] + [Min value]
2
[Al3 max. value] (CrH3) - [Al3 min. value]
(CrL3)
DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > AI2-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 135
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
AI3S [AI3 Interm. point Y]
0 to 100% 0%
Output delinearization point coordinate (frequency reference).
Percentage of the internal frequency reference corresponding to the [AI3 Interm. point X] (A13E) percentage of physical
input signal.
I_O- [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (continued)
AU1- [VIRTUAL AI1]
AU1A [AIV1 assignment]
Virtual analog input 1 via the jog dial available on the front side of the product.
Identical to [AI1 assignment] (A11A) page 133
.
AU2- [VIRTUAL AI2]
AU2A [AIV2 assignment]
Possible assignments for [AI virtual 2] (AIU2): Virtual analog input 2 via communication channel, to be configured with [AI2
net. channel] (AIC2).
Identical to [AIV1 assignment] (AU1A) page 133
.
AIC2 [AI2 net. Channel]
[No] (nO)
g
[VIRTUAL AI2] (AU2A) source channel.
This parameter can also be accessed in the [PID REGULATOR] (
PId-) submenu page 210.
Scale: The value 8192 transmitted by this input is equivalent to 10 V on a 10 V input.
nO
Mdb
CAn
nEt
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
[CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen®
[Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
IEn- [ENCODER CONFIGURATION]
Following parameters can be accessed if the speed monitoring card VW3A3620 has been inserted.
EnU [Encoder usage]
[No] (nO)
nO
SEC
[No] (nO): Function inactive.
[Fdbk monit.] (SEC): The encoder provides speed feedback for monitoring.
EnS [Encoder type]
[AABB] (AAbb)
g
Encoder usage configuration.
AAbb
Ab
Encoder usage configuration.
To be configured in accordance with the type of encoder used.
[AABB] (AAbb): For signals A, /A, B, /B.
[AB] (Ab): For signals A, B.
Following parameters can be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) is set to [Fdbk monit.] (SEC).
PGI [Number of pulses]
100 to 3600 1024
g
Encoder usage configuration.
Number of pulses per encoder revolution.
Following parameters can be accessed if [Encoder usage] (EnU) is set to [Fdbk monit.] (SEC).
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > AI3-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
136 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Load slip detection :
The drive will detect an error and display the error code [Load slipping] (AnF) in the following cases:
• As soon as the RUN order is received, if the sign of the output frequency and the speed feedback are in
opposite way during [ANF Time Thd.] (tAnF).
• During operation:
- if the speed feedback is in the same direction than the output frequency
- and the speed feedback is over [ANF Detection level] (LAnF).
- and,
"if [ANF Direction check] (dAnF) is set to [Over] (OUEr), the difference between the output
frequency and the speed feedback is over [ANF Frequency Thd.] (FAnF) during [ANF Time Thd.]
(TAnF) (Overspeed detection).
or,
"if [ANF Direction check] (dAnF) is set to [Both] (bOth), the difference between the output
frequency and the speed feedback is over [ANF Frequency Thd.] (FAnF) or below - [ANF
Frequency Thd.] (FAnF) during [ANF Time Thd.] (tAnF) (Overspeed or underspeed detection).
Frequency (Hz)
Legend
No detection area
Error detection area
Error detection
tAnF
FAnF
FAnF
DAnF
= bOth
DAnF = OuEr
Error detection
Speed feedback
Run order
Speed feedback
Output frequency
Time (s)
tAnF
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
I_O- [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (continued)
IEn- [ENCODER CONFIGURATION] (continued)
Following parameters can be accessed if the speed monitoring card VW3A3620 has been inserted and if [Encoder usage]
(EnU) is set to [Fdbk monit.] (SEC).
FAnF [ANF Frequency Thd.]
0.1 to 50 Hz 5.0 Hz
g
Level of [Load slipping] (AnF) detected error.
The drive will not detect the error [Load slipping] (AnF) if the difference between the output frequency and the speed feedback
is below than [ANF Frequency Thd.] (FAnF).
LAnF [ANF Detection level]
0 to 10 Hz 0.0 Hz
g
Level of ANF detected error.
The drive will not detect the error [Load slipping] (AnF) if the speed feedback is below [ANF Detection level] (LAnF).
DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > IEn-
LAnF
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 137
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
dAnF [ANF Direction check]
[Over] (OUEr)
g
Available [Load slipping] (AnF) detection direction.
OUEr
bOth
[Over] (OUEr): The drive will detect the error [Load slipping] (AnF) in case of overspeed.
[Both] (bOth): The drive will detect the error [Load slipping] (AnF) in case of overspeed or underspeed.
tAnF [ANF Time Thd.]
0 to 10 s 0.10 s
g
Level of [Load slipping] (AnF) detected error.
The drive will detect the error [Load slipping] (AnF) if the conditions are present during [ANF Time Thd.] (AnF).
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > IEn-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
138 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
I_O- [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (continued)
r1- [R1 CONFIGURATION]
r1 [R1 Assignment]
[No drive flt] (FLt)
nO
FLt
rUn
FtA
FLA
CtA
SrA
tSA
PEE
PFA
F2A
tAd
ULA
OLA
rSdA
ttHA
ttLA
MFrd
MrrS
tS2
tS3
AtS
CnF0
CnF1
CnF2
CFP1
CFP2
CFP3
dbL
brS
PrM
FqLA
MCP
LSA
dLdA
AG1
AG2
AG3
PLA
EFA
USA
UPA
tHA
SSA
tJA
AP3
rdY
ol01
...
OL10
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[No drive flt] (FLt): Drive fault detection status (relay normally energized, and de-energized in the event of an error)
[Drv running] (rUn): Drive running
[Freq. Th. attain.] (FtA): Frequency threshold attained ([Freq. threshold] (Ftd) page 102
)
[HSP attain.] (FLA): High speed attained
[I attained] (CtA): Current threshold attained ([Current threshold] (Ctd) page 102
)
[Freq.ref.att] (SrA): Frequency reference attained
[Th.mot. att.] (tSA): Motor 1 thermal state attained
[PID error al] (PEE): PID error alarm
[PID fdbk al] (PFA): PID feedback alarm
[Freq. Th. 2 attained] (F2A): Frequency threshold 2 attained ([Freq. threshold 2] (F2d) page 102
)
[Th. drv. att.] (tAd): Drive thermal state attained
[Pro.Undload] (ULA): Underload alarm
[Ovld.P.Alrm] (OLA): Overload alarm
[Rope slack ] (rSdA): Rope slack (see [Rope slack config.] (rSd) parameter page 205
)
[High tq. att.] (ttHA): Motor torque overshooting high threshold [High torque thd.] (ttH) page 102
[Low tq. att.] (ttLA): Motor torque undershooting low threshold [Low torque thd.] (ttL) page 102
[Forward] (MFrd): Motor in forward rotation
[Reverse] (MrrS): Motor in reverse rotation
[Th.mot2 att] (tS2): Motor 2 thermal threshold (TTD2) reached
[Th.mot3 att] (tS3): Motor 3 thermal threshold (TTD3) reached
[Neg Torque] (AtS): Negative torque (braking)
[Cnfg.0 act.] (CnF0): Configuration 0 active
[Cnfg.1 act.] (CnF1): Configuration 1 active
[Cnfg.2 act.] (CnF2): Configuration 2 active
[Set 1 active] (CFP1): Parameter set 1 active
[Set 2 active] (CFP2): Parameter set 2 active
[Set 3 active] (CFP3): Parameter set 3 active
[DC charged] (dbL): DC bus charging
[In braking] (brS): Drive braking
[P. removed] (PrM): Drive locked by "Safe Torque Off" input
[Fr.met. alar.] (FqLA): Measured speed threshold attained [Pulse warning thd.] (FqL) page 102
[I present] (MCP): Motor current present
[Limit sw. att] (LSA): Limit switch attained
[Load alarm] (dLdA): Load variation detection (see page 267
)
[Alarm Grp 1] (AGI): Alarm group 1
[Alarm Grp 2] (AG2): Alarm group 2
[Alarm Grp 3] (AG3): Alarm group 3
[LI6=PTC al.] (PLA): LI6 = PTCL alarm
[Ext. fault al] (EFA): External fault alarm
[Under V. al.] (USA): Undervoltage alarm
[Uvolt warn] (UPA): Undervoltage threshold
[Al. °C drv] (tHA): Drive overheating
[Lim T/I att.] (SSA): Torque limit alarm
[IGBT al.] (tJA): Thermal junction alarm
[AI3 Al. 4-20] (AP3): Al3 4-20 mA loss alarm
[Ready] (rdY): Ready to start
[OL01] (oL01): Function blocks: Logical Output 01
...
[oL10] (oL10): Function blocks: Logical Output 10
r1- [R1 CONFIGURATION] (continued)
r1d
(1)
[R1 Delay time]
0 to 60,000 ms 0 ms
The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed, when the information becomes true.
The delay cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt) assignment, and remains at 0.
r1S [R1 Active at]
[1] (POS)
POS
nEG
Configuration of the operating logic:
[1] (POS): State 1 when the information is true
[0] (nEG): State 0 when the information is true
Configuration [1] (POS) cannot be modified for the [No drive flt] (FLt) assignment.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > R1-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 139
r1H [R1 Holding time]
0 to 9,999 ms 0 ms
The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed, when the information becomes false.
The holding time cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt) assignment, and remains at 0.
r1F [Enable Relay1 fallback]
[No] (nO)
YES
nO
Available if [R1 Assignment] (r1) page 138
is set [No] (nO) : Not assigned
[YES] (YES): Relay controlled by OL1R. The relay is de-energized if the drive is in operating state "Fault"
[No] (nO): Relay controlled by OL1R.
I_O- [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (continued)
r2- [R2 CONFIGURATION]
r2 [R2 Assignment]
[No] (nO)
bLC
LLC
OCC
EbO
tSY
Identical to [R1 Assignment] (r1) page 138
with the addition of:
[Brk control] (bLC): Brake contactor control
[Input cont.] (LLC): Line contactor control
[Output cont] (OCC): Output contactor control
[End reel] (EbO): End of reel (traverse control function)
[Sync. wobble] (tSY): "Counter wobble" synchronization
r2d
(1)
[R2 Delay time]
0 to 60,000 ms 0 ms
The delay cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt), [Brk control] (bLC), [Output cont.] (OCC) and [Input cont.] (LLC)
assignments, and remains at 0.
The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed, when the information becomes true.
r2S [R2 Active at]
[1 ] (POS)
POS
nEG
Configuration of the operating logic:
[1] (POS): State 1 when the information is true
[0] (nEG): State 0 when the information is true
The configuration [1 ] (POS) cannot be modified for the [No drive flt] (FLt), [Brk control] (bLC), [DC charging] (dCO),
and [Input cont.] (LLC) assignments.
r2H [R2 Holding time]
0 to 9,999 ms 0 ms
The holding time cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt), [Brk control] (bLC) and [Input cont] (LLC) assignments, and
remains at 0.
The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed, when the information becomes false.
r2F [Enable Relay2 fallback]
[No] (nO)
YES
nO
Available if [R2 Assignment] (r2) page 139
is set [No] (nO) : Not assigned
[YES] (YES): Relay controlled by OL1R. The relay is de-energized if the drive is in operating state "Fault"
[No] (nO): Relay controlled by OL1R.
I_O- [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (continued)
LO1- [LO1 CONFIGURATION]
LO1 [LO1 assignment]
[No] (nO)
bLC
LLC
OCC
EbO
tSY
GdL
Identical to [R1 Assignment] (r1) page 138
with the addition of following parameter value (shown for information only as these
selections can only be configured in the [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu):
[Brk control] (bLC): Brake contactor control
[Input cont.] (LLC): Line contactor control
[Output cont] (OCC): Output contactor control
[End reel] (EbO): End of reel(traverse control function)
[Sync. wobble] (tSY): "Counter wobble" synchronization
[GDL] (GdL): GDL safety function
LO1d [LO1 delay time]
0 to 60,000 ms (1) 0 ms
The delay cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt), [Brk control] (bLC), [Output cont.] (OCC) and [Input cont.] (LLC)
assignments, and remains at 0.
The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed, when the information becomes true.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > R1-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
140 NVE41295 04/2018
(1) 0 to 9,999 ms then 10.00 to 60.00 s on the integrated display terminal.
LO1S [LO1 active at]
[1 ] (POS)
POS
nEG
Configuration of the operating logic:
[1] (POS): State 1 when the information is true
[0] (nEG): State 0 when the information is true
The configuration [1 ] (POS) cannot be modified for the [No drive flt] (FLt), [Brk control] (bLC) and [Input cont.] (LLC)
assignments.
LO1H [LO1 holding time]
0 to 9,999 ms 0
The holding time cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt), [Brk control] (bLC) and [Input cont] (LLC) assignments, and
remains at 0.
The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed, when the information becomes false.
LO1F [Enable DQ1 fallback]
[No] (no)
YES
nO
Available if [LO1 assignment] (LO1) is set to [No] (no): Not assigned
[Yes] (YES): Logic output controlled by OL1R. The logic output is de-energized if the drive is in operating state "fault".
[No] (NO): Logic output controlled by OL1R.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > LO1-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 141
Use of analog output AO1 as a logic output
Analog output AO1 can be used as a logic output, by assigning DO1. In this case, when set to 0, this output
corresponds to the AO1 min. value (0 V, or 0 mA for example), and when set to 1 to the AO1 max. value (10
V, or 20 mA for example).
The electrical characteristics of this analog output remain unchanged. As these characteristics are different
from logic output characteristics, check that it is still compatible with the intended application.
(1) 0 to 9,999 ms then 10.00 to 60.00 s on the integrated display terminal.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
I_O- [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (continued)
dO1- [DO1 CONFIGURATION]
dO1 [DO1 assignment]
[No] (nO)
bLC
LLC
OCC
EbO
tSY
Identical to [R1 Assignment] (r1) page 138
with the addition of the following parameter values (shown for information only
as these selections can only be configured in the [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu):
[Brk control] (bLC): Brake contactor control
[Input cont.] (LLC): Line contactor control
[Output cont] (OCC): Output contactor control
[End reel] (EbO): End of reel(traverse control function)
[Sync. wobble] (tSY): "Counter wobble" synchronization
dO1d [DO1 delay time]
0 to 60,000 ms (1) 0 ms
The delay cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt), [Brk control] (bLC), [Output cont.] (OCC) and [Input cont.] (LLC)
assignments, and remains at 0.
The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed, when the information becomes true.
dO1S [DO1 active at]
[1 ] (POS)
POS
nEG
Configuration of the operating logic:
[1] (POS): State 1 when the information is true
[0] (nEG): State 0 when the information is true
The configuration [1 ] (POS) cannot be modified for the [No drive flt] (FLt), [Brk control] (bLC) and [Input cont.] (LLC)
assignments.
dO1H [DO1 holding time]
0 to 9,999 ms 0 ms
The holding time cannot be set for the [No drive flt] (FLt), [Brk control] (bLC) and [Input cont] (LLC) assignments, and
remains at 0.
The change in state only takes effect once the configured time has elapsed, when the information becomes false.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > DO1-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Configuration Mode (ConF)
142 NVE41295 04/2018
Configuration of analog output
Minimum and maximum values (output values):
The minimum output value, in volts, corresponds to the lower limit of the assigned parameter and the
maximum value corresponds to its upper limit. The minimum value may be greater than the maximum value.
Parameter assigned
Upper limit
[Min Output]
(AOLx or
UOLx)
[Max Output]
(AOHx or
UOHx)
20 mA
or
10 V
Current or
voltage
output
Lower
limit
Parameter assigned
[Min Output]
(AOLx or
UOLx)
[Max Output]
(AOHx or
UOHx)
20 mA
or
10 V
Current or
voltage
output
Upper limit
Lower
limit
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 143
Scaling of the assigned parameter
The scale of the assigned parameter can be adapted in accordance with requirements by modifying the values
of the lower and upper limits by means of two parameters for each analog output.
These parameters are given in %. 100% corresponds to the total variation range of the configured parameter,
so: 100% = upper limit - lower limit For example, [Sign. torque] (Stq) which varies between -3 and +3 times
the rated torque, 100% corresponds to 6 times the rated torque.
• The [Scaling AOx min] (ASLx) parameter modifies the lower limit: new value = lower limit + (range x
ASLx). The value 0% (factory setting) does not modify the lower limit.
• The [Scaling AOx max] (ASHx) parameter modifies the upper limit: new value = lower limit + (range x
ASLx). The value 100% (factory setting) does not modify the upper limit.
• [Scaling AOx min] (ASLx) must always be lower than [Scaling AOx max] (ASHx).
Application example 2
The value of the motor current at the AO1 output is to be transferred with 0 - 20 mA, range 2 In motor, In motor
being the equivalent of a 0.8 In drive.
The [I motor] (OCr) parameter varies between 0 and 2 times the rated drive current, or a range of 2.5 times
the rated drive current.
[Scaling AO1 min] (ASL1) must not modify the lower limit, which therefore remains at its factory setting of
0%.
[Scaling AO1 max] (ASH1) must modify the upper limit by 0.5x the rated motor torque, or 100 - 100/5 = 80%
(new value = lower limit + (range x ASH1).
Upper limit of the assigned parameter
Lower limit of the assigned parameter
New scale
100 %
ASLx
ASHx
Configuration Mode (ConF)
144 NVE41295 04/2018
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
I_O- [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (continued)
AO1- [AO1 CONFIGURATION]
AO1 [AO1 assignment]
[No] (nO)
nO
OCr
OFr
OFS
OrP
trq
Stq
OrS
OPS
OPF
OPE
OPI
OPr
UOP
tHr
tHr2
tHr3
tHd
tqL
d01
tqMS
OA01
...
OA10
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[I motor] (OCr): Current in the motor, between 0 and 2 In (In = rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on
the drive nameplate)
[Motor freq.] (OFr): Output frequency, from 0 to [Max frequency] (tFr)
[Sig. o/p frq.] (OFS): Signed output frequency, between - [Max frequency] (tFr) and + [Max frequency] (tFr)
[Ramp out.] (OrP): From 0 to [Max frequency] (tFr)
[Motor torq.] (trq): Motor torque, between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque
[Sign. torque] (Stq): Signed motor torque, between -3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The + sign corresponds to the
motor mode and the - sign to the generator mode (braking).
[sign ramp] (OrS): Signed ramp output, between - [Max frequency] (tFr) and + [Max frequency] (
tFr).
[PID ref.] (OPS): PID regulator reference between [Min PID reference] (PIP1) and [Max PID reference] (PIP2).
[PID feedbk] (OPF): PID regulator feedback between [Min PID feedback] (PIF1) and [Max PID feedback] (PIF2)
[PID error] (OPE): PID regulator error between- 5 % and + 5 % of ([Max PID feedback] (PIF2) - [Min PID feedback]
(PIF1))
[PID output] (OPI): PID regulator output between [Low speed] (LSP) and [High speed] (HSP)
[Mot. power] (OPr): Motor power, between 0 and 2.5 times [Rated motor power] (nPr)
[Motor volt.] (UOP): Voltage applied to the motor, between 0 and [Rated motor volt.] (UnS)
[Mot thermal] (tHr): Motor thermal state, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state
[Mot therm2] (
tHr2): Motor thermal state 2, between 0 and 200 % of the rated thermal state
[Mot therm3] (tHr3): Motor thermal state 3, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state
[Drv thermal] (tHd): Drive thermal state, between 0 and 200% of the rated thermal state
[Torque lim.] (tqL): Torque limit, between 0 and 3 times the rated motor torque
[dO1] (dO1): Assignment to a logic output. This assignment can only appear if [DO1 assignment] (dO1) has been assigned.
This is the only possible choice in this case, and is only displayed for informational purposes.
[Torque 4Q] (tqMS): Signed motor torque, between -3 and +3 times the rated motor torque. The + sign and the - sign
correspond to the physical direction of the torque, regardless of mode (motor or generator).
[OA01] (OA01): Function blocks: Analog Output 01
...
[OA10] (OA10): Function blocks: Analog Output 10
AO1t [AO1 Type]
[Current] (0A)
10U
0A
[Voltage] (10U): Voltage output
[Current] (0A): Current output
AOL1 [AO1 min Output]
0 to 20.0 mA 0 mA
g
This parameter can be accessed if [AO1 Type] (AO1t) is set to [Current] (0A).
AOH1 [AO1 max Output]
0 to 20.0 mA 20.0 mA
g
This parameter can be accessed if [AO1 Type] (AO1t) is set to [Current] (0A).
UOL1 [AO1 min Output]
0 to 10.0 V 0 V
g
This parameter can be accessed if [AO1 Type] (AO1t) is set to [Voltage] (10U).
UOH1 [AO1 max Output]
0 to 10.0 V 10.0 V
g
This parameter can be accessed if [AO1 Type] (AO1t) is set to [Voltage] (10U).
ASL1 [Scaling AO1 min]
0 to 100.0% 0%
Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.
ASH1 [Scaling AO1 max]
0 to 100.0% 100.0%
Scaling of the upper limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible variation.
AO1F [AO1 Filter]
0 to 10.00 s 0 s
Interference filtering. This parameter is forced to 0 if [AO1 assignment] (AO1) is set to [dO1] (dO1).
A0F1 [Enable AQ1 fallback]
[No] (nO)
YES
nO
Available if [AO1 assignment] (AO1) is set to [No] (nO): Not assigned
[YES] (YES): AO1 used as logic output is controlled by AO1C. This output is de-energized if the drive is in operating state
"fault".
[No] (nO): AO1 used as logic output is controlled by AO1C
DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > AO1-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 145
The following submenus group the alarms into 1 to 3 groups, each of which can be assigned to a relay or a
logic output for remote signaling. These groups can also be displayed on the graphic display terminal (see
[3.3 MONITORING CONFIG.] (MCF-) menu page 286) and viewed via the [1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-)
menu page 47
.
When one or a number of alarms selected in a group occurs, this alarm group is activated.
Code Name / Description
I_O- [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (continued)
A1C- [ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION]
PLA
EFA
USA
CtA
FtA
F2A
SrA
tSA
tS2
tS3
UPA
FLA
tHA
PEE
PFA
AP3
SSA
tAd
tJA
ULA
OLA
rSdA
ttHA
ttLA
FqLA
dLdA
Selection to be made from the following list:
[LI6=PTC al.] (PLA): LI6 = PTCL alarm
[Ext. fault al.] (EFA): External fault alarm
[Under V. al.] (USA): Undervoltage alarm
[I attained] (CtA): Current threshold attained ([Current threshold] (Ctd) page 102
)
[Freq.Th.att.] (FtA): Frequency threshold attained ([Freq. threshold] (Ftd) page 102
)
[Freq. th.2 attained] (F2A): Frequency threshold 2 attained ([Freq. threshold 2] (F2d) page 102
)
[Freq.ref.att] (SrA): Frequency reference attained
[Th.mot. att.] (tSA): Motor 1 thermal state attained
[Th.mot2 att] (tS2): Motor 2 thermal state attained
[Th.mot3 att] (tS3): Motor 3 thermal state attained
[Uvolt warn] (UPA): Undervoltage threshold
[HSP attain.] (FLA): High speed attained
[Al. °C drv] (tHA): Drive overheating
[[PID error al] (PEE): PID error alarm
[PID fdbk al.] (PFA): PID feedback alarm
[AI3 Al. 4-20] (AP3): Alarm indicating absence of 4-20 mA signal on input AI3
[Lim T/I att.] (SSA): Torque limit alarm
[Th. drv. att.] (tAd): Drive thermal state attained
[IGBT alarm] (tJA): IGBT alarm
[Underload. Proc. Al.] (ULA): Underload alarm
[Overload. Proc. Al.] (OLA): Overload alarm
[Rope slack alarm] (rSdA): Rope slack (see [Rope slack config.] (rSd) parameter page 205
)
[High torque alarm] (ttHA): Motor torque overshooting high threshold [High torque thd.] (ttH) page 102
.
[Low torque alarm] (ttLA): Motor torque undershooting low threshold[Low torque thd.] (ttL) page 102
.
[Freq. meter Alarm] (FqLA): Measured speed threshold attained: [Pulse warning thd.] (FqL) page 102
.
[Dynamic load alarm] (dLdA): Load variation detection (see [DYNAMIC LOAD DETECT.] (dLd-) page 267
).
See the multiple selection procedure on page 33
for the integrated display terminal, and page 24 for the graphic display terminal.
A2C- [ALARM GRP2 DEFINITION]
Identical to [ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION] (A1C-) page 145.
A3C- [ALARM GRP3 DEFINITION]
Identical to [ALARM GRP1 DEFINITION] (A1C-) page 145.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > I_O- > A1C-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Configuration Mode (ConF)
146 NVE41295 04/2018
Command
The parameters in the [COMMAND]
(CtL-) menu can only be modified when the drive is stopped and no
run command is present.
Command and reference channels
Run commands (forward, reverse, stop, etc.) and references can be sent using the following channels:
Note: [LA1] (LA1) and [LA2] (LA2) can be used as 2 logic inputs in source mode only.
• + 24 V power supply (max. 30 V)
• State 0 if < 7.5 V, state 1 if > 8.5 V.
Note: The stop keys on the graphic display terminal or remote display can be programmed as non-priority
keys. A stop key can only have priority if the [Stop Key priority] (PSt) parameter in the
[COMMAND] (CtL-) menu, page 154
is set to [Yes] (YES).
The behavior of the Altivar 320 can be adapted according to requirements:
• [Not separ.] (SIM): Command and reference are sent via the same channel.
• [Separate] (SEP): Command and reference may be sent via different channels.
In these configurations, control via the communication bus is performed in accordance with the DRIVECOM
standard with only 5 freely-assignable bits (see Communication Parameters Manual). The application
functions cannot be accessed via the communication interface.
• [I/O profile] (IO): The command and the reference can come from different channels. This configuration
both simplifies and extends use via the communication interface. Commands may be sent via the logic
inputs on the terminals or via the communication bus. When commands are sent via a bus, they are
available on a word, which acts as virtual terminals containing only logic inputs. Application functions can
be assigned to the bits in this word. More than one function can be assigned to the same bit.
Note: Stop commands from the graphic display terminal or remote display terminal remain active even if the
terminals are not the active command channel.
Command Reference
Terminals: logic inputs LI or analog inputs used as logic inputs LA
Function blocks
Remote display terminal
Graphic display terminal
Integrated Modbus
Integrated CANopen®
Communication card
Terminals: analog inputs AI, pulse input
Function blocks
Remote display terminal
Graphic display terminal
Integrated Modbus
Integrated CANopen®
Communication card
+/- speed via the terminals
+/- speed via the graphic display terminal
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If analog inputs [Al1] (A11) or [Al2] (A12) are used as logic inputs ([LAI1] (LAI1) or
[LAI2] (LAI2)), they remain active in their behaviors in analog input mode (example : [Ref.1 channel]
(Fr1) is still set to [Al1] (A11)).
• Remove the configuration of [Al1] (A11) or [Al2] (A12) in analog input mode
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 147
Reference channel for [Not separ.] (SIM), [Separate] (SEP) and [I/O profile] (IO) configurations, PID not configured
Fr1, SA2, SA3, dA2, dA3, MA2, MA3:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen®, communication card
Fr1b, for SEP and IO:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen®, communication card
Fr1b, for SIM:
• Terminals, only accessible if Fr1 = terminals
Fr2:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen®, communication card, and
+/- speed
Note: [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) and [Ref 1B switching] (rCb) must be configured in the
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-) menu.
+/- speed around a
reference
Preset
speeds
Jog
operation
PID not assigned
Graphic display
terminal
Forced local
Ramps
Parameter:
The black square represents
the factory setting assignment
Key:
Channel 1
Channel
[Ref 1B switching]
[Ref.1 channel]
[Ref.1B channel]
[Summing ref. 2]
[Summing ref. 3]
[Subtract. ref. 2]
[Subtract. ref. 3]
[Multiplier ref. 2]
[Low speed]
[Multiplier ref. 3]
[PID REGULATOR]
AI1
[Ref.2 channel]
[Ref. 2 switching]
(FRA + SA2 + SA3 - dA2 - dA3) x MA2 x MA3
(SP1)
SP2
SP16
LI
LCC
FRA
nO
[High
speed]
nO
nO
nO
nO
FrH
rFr
AI2
AI3
HSP
LSP
ACC DEC
AC2 DE2
LI
nO
0V
Note: Forced local is not
active in [I/O profile].
Configuration Mode (ConF)
148 NVE41295 04/2018
Reference channel for [Not separ.] (SIM), [Separate] (SEP) and [I/O profile] (IO) configurations, PID configured with
PID references at the terminals
(1) Ramps not active if the PID function is active in automatic mode.
Fr1:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen®, communication card
Fr1b, for SEP and IO:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen®, communication card
Fr1b, for SIM:
• Terminals, only accessible if Fr1 = terminals
SA2, SA3, dA2, dA3:
• Terminals only
Fr2:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen®, communication card, and
+/- speed
Note: [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) and [Ref 1B switching] (rCb) must be configured in the
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-) menu.
Graphic display
terminal
Ramps (1)
Parameter:
The black square represents the
factory setting assignment
Key:
Channel 1
Channel 2
PID
See page 206
A
Forced local
[Ref 1B switching]
[Ref.1 channel]
[Ref.1B channel]
[Summing ref. 2]
[Summing ref. 3]
[Subtract. ref. 2]
[Subtract. ref. 3]
[Low speed]
AI1
[Ref.2 channel]
[Ref. 2 switching]
FRA + SA2 + SA3 - dA2 - dA3
B
LCC
FRA
[High
speed]
nO
FrH
rFr
AI2
AI3
HSP
LSP
ACC DEC
AC2 DE2
LI
nO
0V
Note: Forced local is not
active in [I/O profile].
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 149
Command channel for [Not separ.] (SIM) configuration
Reference and command, not separate
The command channel is determined by the reference channel. Parameters Fr1, Fr2, rFC, FLO and
FLOC are common to reference and command.
Example: If the reference is Fr1 = AI1 (analog input at the terminals), control is via LI (logic input at the
terminals).
(Stop Key priority)
Forced local
Parameter:
The black square represents
the factory setting assignment
Forward
Reverse
STOP
Graphic display
terminal
Key:
Graphic display
terminal
LI
AI1
(RUN/STOP
FWD/REV)
LCC
nO
AI2
AI3
LI
[Ref.1 channel]
[Ref.2 channel]
[Ref. 2 switching]
[Profile]
YES
SIM
STOP
CMD
LI
nO
nO
Configuration Mode (ConF)
150 NVE41295 04/2018
Command channel for [Separate] (SEP) configuration
Separate reference and command
Parameters FLO and FLOC are common to reference and command.
Example: If the reference is in forced local mode via AI1 (analog input at the terminals), command in forced
local mode is via LI (logic input at the terminals).
The command channels Cd1 and Cd2 are independent of the reference channels Fr1, Fr1b and
Fr2.
Cd1, Cd2:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen®, communication card
(Stop Key priority)
Forced local
Parameter:
The black square represents the factory
setting assignment, except for [Profile].
Forward
Reverse
STOP
Graphic display
terminal
Key:
Graphic display
terminal
LI
AI1
(RUN/STOP
FWD/REV)
LCC
nO
AI2
AI3
[Cmd channel 1]
[Cmd channel 2]
[Cmd switching]
[Profile]
YES
SEP
STOP
CMD
LI
nO
nO
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 151
Command channel for [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
Separate reference and command, as in [Separate] (SEP) configuration
The command channels Cd1 and Cd2 are independent of the reference channels Fr1, Fr1b and
Fr2.
Cd1, Cd2:
• Terminals, graphic display terminal, integrated Modbus, integrated CANopen®, communication card
A command or an action can be assigned:
• To a fixed channel by selecting an LI input or a Cxxx bit:
- By selecting, for example, LI3, this action will be triggered by LI3 regardless of which command
channel is switched.
- By selecting, for example, C214, this action will be triggered by integrated CANopen® with bit 14
regardless of which command channel is switched.
• To a switchable channel by selecting a CDxx bit:
- By selecting, for example, Cd11, this action will be triggered by:
LI12 if the terminals channel is active
C111 if the integrated Modbus channel is active
C211 if the integrated CANopen® channel is active
C311 if the communication card channel is active
If the active channel is the graphic display terminal, the functions and commands assigned to CDxx switchable
internal bits are inactive.
Note: Cd06 to Cd13 can only be used for switching between 2 networks. They do not have equivalent
logic inputs.
(Stop Key priority)
Forced local
Parameter:
The black square represents the factory
setting assignment, except for [Profile].
Forward
Reverse
STOP
Key:
Graphic display
terminal
nO
[Cmd channel 1]
[Cmd channel 2]
[Cmd switching]
[Profile]
YES
SEP
STOP
CMD
LI
nO
Configuration Mode (ConF)
152 NVE41295 04/2018
(1) If [2/3 wire control] (tCC) page 85 is set to [3 wire] (3C), LI2, C101, C201 and C301 cannot be accessed.
Terminals Integrated Modbus Integrated CANopen® Communication card Internal bit, can be
switched
CD00
LI2 (1) C101 (1) C201 (1) C301 (1) CD01
LI3 C102 C202 C302 CD02
LI4 C103 C203 C303 CD03
LI5 C104 C204 C304 CD04
LI6 C105 C205 C305 CD05
- C106 C206 C306 CD06
- C107 C207 C307 CD07
- C108 C208 C308 CD08
- C109 C209 C309 CD09
- C110 C210 C310 CD10
- C111 C211 C311 CD11
- C112 C212 C312 CD12
LAI1 C113 C213 C313 CD13
LAI2 C114 C214 C314 CD14
- C115 C215 C315 CD15
OL01 to OL10
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 153
Assignment conditions for logic inputs and control bits
The following elements are available for every command or function that can be assigned to a logic input or a
control bit:
Note: In [I/O profile] (IO) configuration, LI1 cannot be accessed and if [2/3 wire control] (tCC) page
85
is set to [3 wire] (3C), LI2, C101, C201 and C301 cannot be accessed either.
[LI1] (LI1) to [LI6] (LI6) Logical inputs
[LAI1] (LAI1) to [LAI2] (LAI2) Virtual logic input
[C101] (C101) to [C110] (C110) With integrated Modbus in [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
[C111] (C111) to [C115] (C115) With integrated Modbus regardless of configuration
[C201] (C201) to [C210] (C210) With integrated CANopen® in [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
[C211] (C211) to [C215] (C215) With integrated CANopen® regardless of configuration
[C301] (C301) to [C310] (
C310) With a communication card in [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
[C311] (C311) to [C315] (C315) With a communication card regardless of configuration
[CD00] (Cd00) to [CD10] (Cd10) In [I/O profile] (IO) configuration
[CD11] (Cd11) to [CD15] (Cd15) Regardless of configuration
[OL01] (OL01) to [OL10] (OL10) Regardless of configuration
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
Inactive communication channels are not monitored (no error detection in the event of a communication
interruption).
Verify that using the commands and functions assigned to bits C101 to C315 does not result in unsafe
conditions in the event of a communication interruption.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Configuration Mode (ConF)
154 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FULL [FULL] (continued)
CtL- [COMMAND]
Fr1 [Ref.1 channel]
[Al1] (A11)
A11
A12
A13
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
PI
AIU1
0A01
...
OA10
[Al1] (A11): Analog input A1
[Al2] (A12): Analog input A2
[Al3] (A13): Analog input A3
[HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal source
[Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
[CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen®
[Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
[RP] (PI): Pulse input
[AI virtual 1] (AIU1): Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial (only available if [Profile] (CHCF) is not set to
[Not separ.] (SIM))
[OA01] (OA01): Function blocks: Analog Output 01
...
[OA10] (OA10): Function blocks: Analog Output 10
rIn [RV Inhibition]
[No] (nO)
nO
YES
Inhibition of movement in reverse direction, does not apply to direction requests sent by logic inputs.
Reverse direction requests sent by logic inputs are taken into account.
Reverse direction requests sent by the graphic display terminal are not taken into account.
Reverse direction requests sent by the fieldbus are not taken into account.
Any reverse speed reference originating from the PID, summing input, etc., is interpreted as a zero reference (0 Hz).
[No] (nO)
[Yes] (YES)
PSt [Stop Key priority]
[Yes] (YES)
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
This function disables the Stop keys of the Remote Display Terminal if the setting of the parameter [Command
channel] (CMdC) is not [HMI] (HMI).
Only set this parameter to [No] (nO) if you have implemented appropriate alternative stop functions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
nO
YES
This will be a freewheel stop. If the active command channel is the graphic display terminal, the stop will be performed according
to the [Type of stop] (Stt) page 173
irrespective of the configuration of [Stop Key priority] (PSt).
[No] (nO)
[Yes] (YES): Gives priority to the STOP key on the graphic display terminal when the graphic display terminal is not enabled as
the command channel.
CHCF [Profile]
[Not separ.] (SIM)
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Disabling [I/O profile] (IO) resets the drive to the factory settings.
• Verify that restoring the factory settings is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
SIM
SEP
IO
[Not separ.] (SIM): Reference and command, not separate
[Separate] (SEP): Separate reference and command. This assignment cannot be accessed in [I/O profile] (IO).
[I/O profile] (IO): I/O profile
2 s
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > CTL-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 155
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
CCS [Cmd switching]
[ch1 active] (Cd1)
g
This parameter can be accessed if [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [Separate] (SEP) or [I/O profile] (IO).
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, channel [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) is active.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, channel [Cmd channel 2] (Cd2) is active.
If [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [Not separ.] (SIM), only [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) setting value is possible.
Cd1
Cd2
LI1
...
[ch1 active] (Cd1): [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) active (no switching)
[ch2 active] (Cd2): [Cmd channel 2] (Cd2) active (no switching)
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
(not Cd00 to Cd15)
Cd1 [Cmd channel 1]
[Terminals] (tEr)
g
This parameter can be accessed if [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [Separate] (SEP) or [I/O profile] (IO).
tEr
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
[Terminals] (tEr): Terminals
[HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal
[Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
[CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen®
[Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
Cd2 [Cmd channel 2]
[Modbus] (Mdb)
g
This parameter can be accessed if [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [Separate] (SEP) or [I/O profile] (IO).
tEr
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
[Terminals] (tEr): Terminals
[HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal
[Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
[CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen®
[Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
rFC [Ref. 2 switching]
[Ref.1 channel] (Fr1)
Fr1
Fr2
LI1
...
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, channel [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) is active.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, channel [Cmd channel 2] (Cd2) is active.
[Ref. 1 channel] (Fr1): [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) active (no switching)
[Ref. 2 channel] (Fr2): [Cmd channel 2] (Cd2) active (no switching)
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
(not Cd00 to Cd15)
Fr2 [Ref.2 channel]
[No] (nO)
nO
A11
A12
A13
Updt
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
PI
AIU1
0A01
...
OA10
[No] (nO): Not assigned. If [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [Not separ.] (SIM), the command is at the terminals with a zero
reference. If [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [Separate] (SEP) or [I/O profile] (IO), the reference is zero.
[Al1] (A11): Analog input A1
[Al2] (A12): Analog input A2
[Al3] (A13): Analog input A3
[+/-Speed] (UPdt): +/- speed command
[HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal
[Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
[CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen®
[Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
[RP] (PI): Pulse input
[AI virtual 1] (AIU1): Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial
[OA01] (OA01): Function blocks: Analog Output 01
...
[OA10] (OA10): Function blocks: Analog Output 10
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > CTL-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
156 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
COP [Copy channel 1 <> 2]
[No] (nO)
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
This parameter can cause unintended movements, for example, inversion of the direction of rotation of the
motor, sudden acceleration or stops.
• Verify that the setting of this parameter does not cause unintended movements.
• Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
nO
SP
Cd
ALL
Can be used to copy the current reference and/or the command by means of switching, in order to avoid speed surges, for
example.
If [Profile] (CHCF) page 154
is set to [Not separ.] (SIM) or [Separate] (SEP), copying will only be possible from channel 1
to channel 2.
If [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [I/O profile] (IO), copying will be possible in both directions.
A reference or a command cannot be copied to a channel on the terminals.
The reference copied is [Frequency ref.] (FrH) (before ramp) unless the destination channel reference is set via +/- speed. In
this case, the reference copied is [Output frequency] (rFr) (after ramp).
[No] (nO): No copy
[Reference] (SP): Copy reference
[Command] (Cd): Copy command
[Cmd + ref.] (ALL): Copy command and reference
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
2 s
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > CTL-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 157
As the graphic display terminal may be selected as the command and/or reference channel, its action modes
can be configured.
The parameters on this page can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal, and not on the integrated
display terminal.
Comments:
• The display terminal command/reference is only active if the command and/or reference channels from the
terminal are active with the exception of [T/K] (Ft) (command via the display terminal), which takes
priority over these channels. Press [T/K] (Ft) (command via the display terminal) again to revert control
to the selected channel.
• Command and reference via the display terminal are impossible if the latter is connected to more than one
drive.
• The JOG, preset speed and +/- speed functions can only be accessed if [Profile] (CHCF) is set to
[Not separ.] (SIM).
• The preset PID reference functions can only be accessed if [Profile] (CHCF) is set to
[Not separ.] (SIM) or [Separate] (SEP).
• The [T/K] (Ft) (command via the display terminal) can be accessed regardless of the [Profile] (CHCF).
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
Fn1 [F1 key assignment]
[No] (nO)
nO
FJOG
FPS1
FPS2
FPr1
FPr2
FuSP
FdSP
Ft
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[Jog] (FJOG): JOG operation
[Preset spd2] (FPS1): Press the key to run the drive at the 2nd preset speed [Preset speed 2] (SP2) page 97
. Press STOP
to stop the drive.
[Preset spd3] (FPS2): Press the key to run the drive at the 3rd preset speed [Preset speed 3] (SP3) page 97
. Press STOP
to stop the drive.
[PID ref. 2] (FPr1): Sets a PID reference equal to the 2nd preset PID reference [Preset ref. PID 2] (rP2) page 99
, without
sending a run command. Only operates if [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) is set to [HMI] (LCC). Does not operate with the [T/K] (Ft)
function.
[PID ref. 3] (FPr2): Sets a PID reference equal to the 3rd preset PID reference [Preset ref. PID 3] (rP3) page 100
, without
sending a run command. Only operates if [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) is set to [HMI] (LCC). Does not operate with the [T/K] (Ft)
function.
[+speed] (FUSP): Faster, only operates if [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) is set to [HMI] (LCC). Press the key to run the drive and
increase the speed. Press STOP to stop the drive.
[- speed] (FdSP): Slower, only operates if [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) is set to [HMI] (LCC) and if a different key has been
assigned to [+ speed]. Press the key to run the drive and decrease the speed. Press STOP to stop the drive.
[T/K] (Ft): Command via the display terminal: Takes priority over [Cmd switching] (CCS) and over
[Ref. 2 switching] (rFC).
Fn2 [F2 key assignment]
[No] (nO)
Identical to [F1 key assignment] (Fn1) page 157.
Fn3 [F3 key assignment]
[No] (nO)
Identical to [F1 key assignment] (Fn1) page 157.
Fn4 [F4 key assignment]
[No] (nO)
Identical to [F1 key assignment] (Fn1) page 157.
bMp [HMI cmd.]
[Stop] (StOP)
g
When the [T/K] (Ft) function is assigned to a key and that function is active, this parameter defines the behavior at the moment
when control returns to the graphic display terminal or remote display terminal.
StOp
bUMF
[Stop] (StOP): Stops the drive (although the controlled direction of operation and reference of the previous channel are copied
(to be taken into account on the next RUN command)).
[Bumpless] (bUMF): Does not stop the drive (the controlled direction of operation and the reference of the previous channel
are copied)
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > CTL-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Configuration Mode (ConF)
158 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Function Block Management
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FULL [FULL] (continued)
FbM- [FUNCTION BLOCKS]
MFb- [MONIT. FUN. BLOCKS]
Note: This section shows only what is possible to do with local or remote display on the drive. For advanced configuration using
PC software, please refer to the dedicated Function blocks manual.
FbSt [FB Status]
IdLE
CHEC
StOP
InIt
rUn
Err
[Idle] (IdLE): No binary file in the target, the FB is waiting for a download
[Check prog.] (CHEC): Check the program downloaded
[Stop] (StOP): The Function blocks application is stopped
[Init] (InIt): Check coherency between ATVLogic program and Function blocks parameters
[Run] (rUn): The Function blocks application is running
[Error] (Err): An internal error has been detected. The Function blocks application is in fault state mode.
FbFt [FB Fault]
nO
Int
bIn
InP
PAr
CAL
tOAU
tOPP
AdL
In
[No] (nO): No detected fault
[Internal] (Int): Internal detected error
[Binary file] (bIn): Binary file corrupted
[Intern Para.] (InP): Internal parameter detected error
[Para. RW] (PAr): Parameter access detected error
[Calculation] (CAL): Calculation detected error
[TO AUX] (tOAU): TimeOut AUX task
[TO synch] (tOPP): TimeOut in PRE/POST task
[Bad ADLC] (AdL): ADLC with bad parameter
[Input assig.] (In): Input not configured
FbI- [FB IDENTIFICATION]
bUEr [Program version]
0 to 255 -
g
Program user version.
bnS [Program size]
0 to 65,535 -
g
Program file size.
bnU [Prg. format version]
0 to 255 -
Binary format version of the drive.
CtU [Catalog version]
0 to 65,535 -
Catalog version of the drive.
FbM- [FUNCTION BLOCKS] (continued)
FbCd
[FB Command]
Allows to start and stop the function blocks manually.
StOP
Strt
[FB Command] (FbCd) is forced to [Stop] (StOP) if there is no valid function blocks application in the drive memory.
[FB Command] (FbCd) is set to [Start] (Strt) when the function blocks application switch to Run according to
[FB start mode] (FbrM) configuration.
Note: As soon as the function blocks are started, the drive is considered as in running state and the modification of configuration
parameters is no longer possible.
[Stop] (StOP): Function blocks application Stop command
[Start] (Strt): Function blocks application Start command
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FBM- > MFB-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 159
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
FbrM [FB start mode]
[No] (nO)
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Depending on the setting of this parameter, function blocks may be immediately executed.
• Verify that this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
nO
YES
LI1
...
Allows to choose the different ways of starting the Function blocks application.
Note: Modifications of this parameter are not taken into account if the Function blocks application is running.
[No] (nO): Function blocks application is controlled by [FB command] (FbCd) parameter
[Yes] (YES): Function blocks application switches to Run automatically at drive power on
[LI1] (LI1): Function blocks application switches to Run on a rising edge of the logic input. It switch to Stop on falling edge of
the logic input.
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
(([OL10] (OL01) up to [OL10] (OL10) and [CD00] (Cd00) up to
[CD15] (Cd15) are not available).
FbSM [Stop FB Stop motor]
[Freewheel] (YES)
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If [Stop FB stop motor] (FbSM) is set to [No] (nO), the motor will not stop when the program will be
stopped.
• Only set this parameter to [No] (nO) if you have implemented appropriate alternative stop functions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
nO
YES
rMP
FSt
dCI
Allows to setup the way of working of the drive when function blocks are stopped.
[Ignore] (nO): The drive does not stop
[Freewheel] (YES): Motor stops in freewheel
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Ramp stop
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
[DC injection] (dCI): DC injection
FbdF [FB on drive fault]
[Stop] (StOP)
StOP
IGn
Behavior of function blocks when the drive trips.
[Stop] (StOP): Function blocks stops when the drive trips, outputs are realeased
[Ignore] (IGn): Function blocks continue to work when the drive trips (except CFF and INFE)
FbA- [INPUTS ASSIGNMENTS]
IL01 [Logic input 1 assignment]
[No] (nO)
YES
LI1
...
Possible assignment for the Function block logic input.
Identical to [R1 Assignment] (r1) page 138
(not [Limit sw. att] (LSA)) with the addition of the following parameter values
(shown for information only as these selections can only be configured in the [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menu):
[Yes] (YES): Yes
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
IL-- [Logic input x assignment]
[No] (nO)
All the Function Blocks logic inputs available on the drive are processed as in the example for
[Logic input 1 assignment] (IL01) above, up to [Logic input 10 assignment] (IL10).
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FBM-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
160 NVE41295 04/2018
IA01 [Analog input 1 assignment]
[No] (nO)
nO
A11
A12
A13
OCr
OFr
OrP
trq
Stq
OrS
OPS
OPF
OPE
OPI
OPr
tHr
tHd
tqMS
OFS
tHr2
tHr3
UOP
PI
AIU1
dO1
AIU2
OA01
...
OA10
Possible assignment for the Function block analog input.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[Al1] (A11): Analog input A1
[Al2] (A12): Analog input A2
[Al3] (A13): Analog input A3
[I motor] (OCr): Motor current
[Motor freq.] (OFr): Motor speed
[Ramp. out] (OrP): Ramp output
[Motor torq.] (trq): Motor torque
[Sign torque] (Stq): Signed motor torque
[Sign ramp] (OrS): Signed ramp output
[PID ref.] (OPS): PI(D) reference
[PID feedbk] (OPF): PI(D) feedback
[PID error] (OPE): PI(D) error
[PID output] (OPI): PI(D) integral
[Mot. power] (OPr): Motor power
[Mot. thermal]
(tHr): Motor thermal state
[Drv thermal] (tHd): Drive thermal state
[Torque 4Q] (tqMS): Signed motor torque
[Sig. o/p frq.] (OFS): Signed output frequency
[Mot therm2] (tHr2): Motor 2 thermal state
[Mot therm3] (tHr3): Motor 3 thermal state
[Motor volt.] (UOP): Motor voltage
[RP] (PI): Pulse input
[AI virtual 1] (AIU1): Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial
[DO1] (dO1): Analog/logical output DO1
[AI virtual 2] (AIU2): Virtual analog input 2 by the communication bus
[OA01] (OA01): Function blocks: Analog Output 01
...
[OA10] (OA10): Function blocks: Analog Output 10
IA-- [Analog input x assignment]
[No] (nO)
All the Function blocks analog inputs available on the drive are processed as in the example for [IA01] (IA01) above, up to
[IA10] (IA10).
FbM- [FUNCTION BLOCKS] (continued)
FAd- [ADL CONTAINERS]
ADL containers contain Modbus logical adress of internal parameters of the drive. If the chosen adress is valid, the display shows
the parameter name instead of the adress.
LA01
ADL Container 01 3,015 to 64,299 0
LA02
ADL Container 02 3,015 to 64,299 0
LA03
ADL Container 03 3,015 to 64,299 0
LA04
ADL Container 04 3,015 to 64,299 0
LA05
ADL Container 05 3,015 to 64,299 0
LA06
ADL Container 06 3,015 to 64,299 0
LA07
ADL Container 07 3,015 to 64,299 0
LA08
ADL Container 08 3,015 to 64,299 0
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FBM- > FBA-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 161
(1) If a graphic display terminal is not in use, values greater than 9,999 will be displayed on the 4-digit display with a period
mark after the thousand digit, for example, 15.65 for 15,650.
FbM- [FUNCTION BLOCKS] (continued)
FbP- [FB PARAMETERS]
Internal parameters available for the user program.
M001 [ ]
0 to 65,535 0
(1)
M001 Parameter saved in EEprom.
M002 [ ]
0 to 65,535 0
(1)
M002 Parameter saved in EEprom
M003 [ ]
0 to 65,535 0
(1)
M003 Parameter saved in EEprom
M004 [ ]
0 to 65,535 0
(1)
M004 Parameter saved in EEprom
M005 [ ]
0 to 65,535 0
(1)
M005 Parameter written in RAM
M006 [ ]
0 to 65,535 0
(1)
M006 Parameter written in RAM
M007 [ ]
0 to 65,535 0
(1)
M007 Parameter written in RAM
M008 [ ]
0 to 65,535 0
(1)
M008 Parameter written in RAM
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FBM- > FBP-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Configuration Mode (ConF)
162 NVE41295 04/2018
[APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-)
Summary of functions:
The parameters in the [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-) menu can only be modified when the drive is
stopped and there is no run command, except for parameters with a
symbol in the code column, which
can be modified with the drive running or stopped.
Code Name Page
(rEF-) [REFERENCE SWITCH.] 167
(OAI-) [REF. OPERATIONS] 168
(rPt-) [RAMP] 170
(Stt-) [STOP CONFIGURATION] 173
(AdC-) [AUTO DC INJECTION] 176
(JOG-) [JOG] 178
(PSS-) [PRESET SPEEDS] 181
(UPd) [+/- SPEED] 185
(SrE-) [+/-SPEED AROUND REF.] 187
(SPM-) [MEMO REFERENCE] 188
(FLI-) [FLUXING BY LI] 189
(bLC-) [BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL] 194
(ELM-) [EXTERNAL WEIGHT MEAS.] 200
(HSH-) [HIGH SPEED HOISTING] 204
(PId-) [PID REGULATOR] 210
(Pr1-) [PID PRESET REFERENCES] 214
(tOL-) [TORQUE LIMITATION] 216
(CLI-) [2nd CURRENT LIMIT.] 218
(I2t-) [DYN CURRENT LIMIT] 219
(LLC-) [LINE CONTACTOR COMMAND] 221
(OCC-) [OUTPUT CONTACTOR CMD] 223
(LPO-) [POSITIONING BY SENSORS] 227
(MLP-) [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] 230
(MMC-) [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.] 235
(tnL-) [AUTO TUNING BY LI] 236
(trO-) [TRAVERSE CONTROL] 237
(CHS-) [HSP SWITCHING] 244
(dCC-) [DC BUS] 245
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 163
Note: Compatibility of functions
The choice of application functions may be limited by the number of I/O and by the fact that some functions
are incompatible with others. Functions that are not listed in the table below are fully compatible.
If there is an incompatibility between functions, the first function configured will help to prevent the others being
configured.
Each of the functions on the following pages can be assigned to one of the inputs or outputs.
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Multiple functions can be assigned to and simultaneously activated via a single input.
• Verify that assigning multiple functions to a single input does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Configuration Mode (ConF)
164 NVE41295 04/2018
It is only possible to assign one input to several functions at [Advanced] (AdU) and [Expert] (EPr) levels.
Before assigning a command, reference or function to an input or output, the user must check that this input
or output has not already been assigned and that another input or output has not been assigned to an
incompatible function.
The drive factory setting or macro configurations automatically configure functions, which may help to
prevent other functions being assigned.
In some case, it is necessary to unconfigure one or more functions in order to be able to enable
another. Check the compatibility table below.
Stop functions have priority over run commands.
Speed references via logic command have priority over analog references.
Note: This compatibility table does not affect commands that can be assigned to the keys of the graphic
display terminal (see page 24
).
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 165
Compatibility table
(1) Priority is given to the first of these two stop modes to be activated.
(2) Only the multiplier reference is incompatible with the PID regulator.
Reference operations
(page 168
)
+/- speed (3)
(page 185
)
Preset speeds
(page 180
)
PID regulator
(page 210
)
Traverse control
(page 242
)
JOG operation
(page 178
)
Reference switching
(page 167
)
Skip frequency
(page 183
)
Brake logic control
(page 194
)
Auto DC injection
(page 176
)
Catch on the fly
(page 253
)
Output contactor command
(page 223
)
DC injection stop
(page 173
)
Fast stop
(page 173
)
Freewheel stop
(page 173
)
+/- speed around a reference
(page 187
)
High speed hoisting
(page 204
)
Load sharing
(page 122
)
Positioning by sensors
(page 227
)
Reference operations
(page 168
)
A
p
(2)
AAA
+/- speed (3)
(page 185
)
pp
AA
Preset speeds
(page 180
)
X AAA
PID regulator
(page 210
)
p
(2)
pp
AA
p pppp
Traverse control
(page 242
)
ppp
AA
pp
JOG operation
(page 178
)
X
p
X
pp
A
p
X
pp
Reference switching
(page 167
)
XXXXX AA
Skip frequency
(page 183
)
XXXXXXX X
Brake logic control
(page 194
)
pp ppp
Auto DC injection
(page 176
)
A AA
Catch on the fly
(page 253
)
p
Output contactor
command
(page 223
)
p
DC injection stop
(page 173
)
p
X
p
(1)
A
Fast stop
(page 173
)
p
(1)
A
Freewheel stop
(page 173
)
XXX
+/- speed around a
reference (page 187
)
ppp
XA
High speed hoisting (page
204
)
ppp
Load sharing
(page 122
)
p
Positioning by sensors
(page 227
)
p
Incompatible functions Compatible functions Not applicable
The function indicated by the arrow has priority over the other.
Priority functions (functions which cannot be active at the same time):
Configuration Mode (ConF)
166 NVE41295 04/2018
Incompatible Functions
The following function will be inaccessible or deactivated after an Automatic restart.
This is only possible for control type if [2/3 wire control] (tCC) is set to [2 wire] (2C) and if [2 wire type]
(tCt) is set to [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority] (PFO). See [2/3 wire control] (tCC) page 85.
The [1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-) menu page 47
can be used to display the functions assigned to each input
in order to check their compatibility.
When a function is assigned, a appears on the graphic display terminal, as illustrated in the example below:
If you attempt to assign a function that is incompatible with another function that has already been assigned,
an alarm message will appear:
• With the graphic display terminal:
• With the integrated display terminal and the remote display terminal:
COMP flashes until ENT or ESC is pressed.
When you assign a logic input, an analog input, a reference channel or a bit to a function, pressing the HELP
key will display the functions that may already have been activated by this input, bit or channel.
When a logic input, an analog input, a reference channel or a bit that has already been assigned is assigned
to another function, the following screens appear:
• With the graphic display terminal:
If the access level permits this new assignment, pressing ENT confirms the assignment.
If the access level does not permit this new assignment, pressing ENT results in the following display:
• With the integrated display terminal:
The code for the first function, which is already assigned, is displayed flashing.
If the access level permits this new assignment, pressing ENT confirms the assignment.
If the access level does not permit this new assignment, pressing ENT has no effect, and the message
continues to flash. It is only possible to exit by pressing ESC.
RDY Term 0.0Hz 0A
APPLICATION FUNCT.
REFERENCE SWITCH.
REF. OPERATIONS
RAMP
STOP CONFIGURATION
AUTO DC INJECTION
Code << >> Quick
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
INCOMPATIBILITY
The function can't be assigned
because an incompatible
function is already selected. See
programming book.
ENT or ESC to continue
RUN Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
WARNING - ASSIGNED TO
Forward
ENT-Valid. ESC-Abort
RUN Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
ASSIGNMENT FORBIDDEN
Un-assign the present
functions, or select
"Advanced" access level
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 167
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
REFERENCE SWITCHING
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.]
rEF- [REFERENCE SWITCH.]
rCb [Ref 1B switching]
[ch1 active] (Fr1)
Fr1
Fr1b
LI1
...
See the diagrams on pages 147
and 148.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) is active (see [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) page 154
).
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) is active.
[Ref 1B switching] (rCb) is forced to [ch1 active] (Fr1) if [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [Not separ.] (SIM) with
[Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) assigned via the terminals (analog inputs, pulse input). See [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) page 154
.
[ch1 active] (Frl): No switching, [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) active
[ch1B active] (Fr1b): No switching, [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) active
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
(not [Cd00] (CdOO) to [Cd15] (Cd15)).
Fr1b [Ref.1B channel]
[No] (nO)
nO
A11
A12
A13
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
PI
AIU1
OA01
...
OA10
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[Al1] (A11): Analog input A1
[Al2] (A12): Analog input A2
[Al3] (A13): Analog input A3
[HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal source
[Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
[CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen®
[Com. card] (nEt): Communication option board source
[RP] (PI): Pulse input
[AI virtual 1] (AIU1): Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial (only available if [Profile] (CHCF) is not set to
[Not separ.] (SIM))
[OA01] (OA01): Function blocks: Analog Output 01
...
[OA10] (OA10): Function blocks: Analog Output 10
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > REF-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
168 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
REFERENCE OPERATIONS
Summing input / Subtracting input / Multiplier
A = (Fr1 or Fr1b + SA2 + SA3 - dA2 - dA3) x MA2 x MA3
• If SA2, SA3, dA2, dA3 are not assigned, they are set to 0.
• If MA2, MA3 are not assigned, they are set to 1.
• A is limited by the minimum LSP and maximum HSP parameters.
• For multiplication, the signal on MA2 or MA3 is interpreted as a %. 100% corresponds to the maximum
value of the corresponding input. If MA2 or MA3 is sent via the communication bus or graphic display
terminal, an MFr multiplication variable, page 286 must be sent via the bus or graphic display terminal.
• Reversal of the direction of operation in the event of a negative result can be inhibited (see
[RV Inhibition] (SIn) page 154).
Fr1 or Fr1b
SA2
SA3
dA2
dA3
MA2
MA3
A
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
OAI- [REF. OPERATIONS]
Reference = (Fr1 or Fr1b + SA2 + SA3 - dA2 - dA3) x MA2 x MA3. See the diagrams on pages 147 and 148.
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 163
.
SA2 [Summing ref. 2]
[No] (nO)
nO
A11
A12
A13
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
PI
AIU1
AIU2
OA01
...
OA10
Selection of a reference to be added to [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[Al1] (A11): Analog input A1
[Al2] (A12): Analog input A2
[Al3] (A13): Analog input A3
[HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal source
[Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
[CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen®
[Com. card] (nEt): Communication option board source
[RP] (PI): Motor voltage
[AI virtual 1] (AIU1): Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial
[AI virtual 2] (AIU2):
Virtual analog input 2 by the communication bus
[OA01] (OA01): Function blocks: Analog Output 01
...
[OA10] (OA10): Function blocks: Analog Output 10
SA3 [Summing ref. 3]
[No] (nO)
Selection of a reference to be added to [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).
Identical to [Summing ref. 2] (SA2) page 168
.
dA2 [Subtract. ref. 2]
[No] (nO)
Selection of a reference to be subtracted from [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).
Identical to [Summing ref. 2] (SA2) page 168
.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > OAI-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 169
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
dA3 [Subtract. ref. 3]
[No] (nO)
Selection of a reference to be subtracted from [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).
Identical to [Summing ref. 2] (SA2) page 168
.
MA2 [Multiplier ref. 2]
[No] (nO)
Selection of a multiplier reference [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).
Identical to [Summing ref. 2] (SA2) page 168
.
This parameter is incompatible with the PID regulator, [No] (no) is the only setting possible
MA3 [Multiplier ref. 3]
[No] (nO)
Selection of a multiplier reference [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b).
Identical to [Summing ref. 2] (SA2) page 168
.
This parameter is incompatible with the PID regulator, [No] (no) is the only setting possible
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > OAI-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
170 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
RAMP
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
rPt- [RAMP]
rPt [Ramp type]
[Linear] (LIn)
LIn
S
U
CUS
[Linear] (LIn)
[S ramp] (S)
[U ramp] (U)
[Customized] (CUS)
S ramps
The rounding coefficient is fixed,
t1 = 0.6 set ramp time (linear)
t2 = 0.4 set ramp time (round)
t3 = 1.4 set ramp time
The rounding coefficient is fixed,
t1 = 0.5 set ramp time (linear)
t2 = 1.0 set ramp time (round)
t3 = 1.5 set ramp time
tA1: adjustable from 0 to 100%
tA2: adjustable from 0 to (100% - tA1)
tA3: adjustable from 0 to 100%
tA4: adjustable from 0 to (100% - tA3)
t12 = ACC * (tA1(%) / 100 + tA2(%) / 100 + 1)
t34 = DEC * (tA3(%) / 100 + tA4(%) / 100 + 1)
Inr [Ramp increment]
[0,1 ] (0.1)
(1)
0.01
0.1
1
This parameter is valid for [Acceleration] (ACC), [Deceleration] (dEC), [Acceleration 2] (AC2) and
[Deceleration 2] (dE2).
[0,01]: Ramp up to 99.99 seconds
[0,1]: Ramp up to 999.9 seconds
[1]: Ramp up to 6,000 seconds
ACC
(1)
[Acceleration]
0.00 to 6,000 s (2) 3.0 s
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) (page 86). To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this
parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application.
dEC
(1)
[Deceleration]
0.00 to 6,000 s (2) 3.0 s
Time to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) (page 86
) to 0. To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this
parameter must be set according to the possibility of the application.
tA1 [Begin Acc round]
0 to 100% 10%
g
(1)
Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2) ramp time.
Can be set between 0 and 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) is [Customized] (CUS).
FrS
t
0
t2 t2t1
t3
f (Hz)
t2 t2t1
t3
FrS
t
0
f (Hz)
FrS
t
0
t2
t3
f (Hz)
FrS
t
0
f (Hz)
t1 t2
t3
t1
FrS
t
0
tA1 tA2 tA3 tA4
t12
f (Hz)
FrS
t
0
t34
f (Hz)
U ramps
Customized ramps
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > RPT-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 171
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
tA2 [End Acc round]
0 to 100% 10%
g
(1)
Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] (ACC) or [Acceleration 2] (AC2) ramp time.
Can be set between 0 and (100% - [Begin Acc round] (tA1)).
This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) is [Customized] (CUS).
tA3 [Begin Dec round]
0 to 100% 10%
g
(1)
Rounding of start of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2) ramp time.
Can be set between 0 and 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) is [Customized] (CUS).
tA4 [End Dec round]
0 to 100% 10%
g
(1)
Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2) ramp time.
Can be set between 0 and (100% - [Begin Dec round] (tA3)).
This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] (rPt) is [Customized] (CUS).
Frt [Ramp 2 threshold]
0 to 599 Hz according to rating 0 Hz
Ramp switching threshold
The 2nd ramp is switched if the value of [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt) is not 0 (0 deactivates the function) and the output
frequency is greater than [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt).
Threshold ramp switching can be combined with [Ramp switch ass.] (rPS) switching as follows:
rPS [Ramp switch ass.]
[No] (nO)
No
LI1
...
[No] (nO): Function not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...]
(...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
AC2 [Acceleration 2]
0.00 to 6,000 s (2) 5.0 s
g
(1)
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS). To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this parameter must
be set according to the possibility of the application.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt) is greater than 0 or if [Ramp switch ass.] (rPS) is assigned.
dE2 [Deceleration 2]
0.00 to 6,000 s (2) 5.0 s
g
(1)
Time to decelerate from [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) to 0. To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this parameter must be
set according to the possibility of the application.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ramp 2 threshold] (Frt) is greater than 0 or if [Ramp switch ass.] (rPS) is assigned.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
LI or bit Frequency Ramp
0 < Frt ACC, dEC
0 > Frt AC2, dE2
1 < Frt AC2, dE2
1 > Frt AC2, dE2
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > RPT-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
172 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
(1) The parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6,000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr) page 170
.
brA [Dec ramp adapt.]
[Yes] (YES)
NOTICE
DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
• Only set this parameter to [Yes] (YES) or [No] (nO) if the connected motor is a permanent magnet
synchronous motor.
Other settings demagnetize permanent magnet synchronous motors.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
nO
YES
dYnA
Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp, if this has been set at a too low value according to the inertia
of the load, which can cause an overvoltage detected fault.
[Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) is forced to [No] (nO) if the brake logic control [Brake assignment] (bLC) is assigned (page 194
).
The function is incompatible with applications requiring:
- Positioning on a ramp.
- The use of a braking resistor (the resistor would not operate correctly).
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Yes] (YES): Function active, for applications that do not require strong deceleration
The following selections appear depending on the rating of the drive and [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105
. They enable
stronger deceleration to be obtained than with [Yes] (YES). Use comparative testing to determine your selection.
[High torq. A] (dYnA): Addition of a constant current flow component.
When [Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) is configured on [High torq. x] (dYnx), the dynamic performances for braking are improved
by the addition of a current flow component. The aim is to increase the iron loss and magnetic energy stored in the motor.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > RPT-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 173
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
STOP CONFIGURATION
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
Stt- [STOP CONFIGURATION]
Note: Some types of stops cannot be used with all other functions. Follow the instructions on page 163.
Stt [Type of stop]
[Ramp stop] (rMP)
rMP
FSt
nSt
dCI
Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command.
Note: If the "brake logic" function on page 194
has been enabled, or if [Low speed time out] (tLS) page 95 or 213 is not 0,
only ramp type stops may be configured.
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
[Freewheel] (nSt): Freewheel stop
[DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. Available only if [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105
is not set to
[Sync. mot.] (SYn).
FFt [Freewheel stop Thd.]
0.2 to 599 Hz 0.2 Hz
g
(1)
Speed threshold below which the motor will switch to freewheel stop.
This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to a freewheel stop below a low speed threshold.
This parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) is set to [Fast stop] (FSt) or [Ramp stop] (rMP) and if
[Brake assignment] (bLC) and [Auto DC injection] (AdC) are not configured.
nSt [Freewheel stop ass.]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
...
The stop is activated when the input or the bit changes to 0. If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active, the
motor will only restart if [2/3 wire control] (tCC) page 85
is set to [2 wire] (2C) and if [2 wire type] (tCt) is set to
[Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority] (PFO). If not, a new run command must be sent.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
FSt [Fast stop assign.]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
...
The stop is activated when the input changes to 0 or the bit changes to 1 (bit in [I/O profile] (IO) at 0).
If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if [2/3 wire
control] (tCC) page 85
is set to [2 wire] (2C) and if [2 wire type] (tCt) is set to [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority] (PFO).
If not, a new run command must be sent.
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 163
.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
(If [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [Not Separ.] (SIM) or [Separate] (SEP) then [CD11] (Cd11) up to [CD15] (Cd15), [C111] (C111)
up to [C115] (C115), [C211] (C211) up to [C215] (C215) and [C311] (C311) up to [C315] (C315) are not available).
dCF [Ramp divider]
0 to 10 4
g
(1)
This parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) is set to [Fast stop] (FSt) and if [Fast stop assign.] (FSt) is not
[No] (nO) and if [Stop type] (PAS) is set to [Fast stop] (FSt).
The ramp that is enabled ([Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2)) is then divided by this coefficient when stop
requests are sent.
Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > STT-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
174 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
dCI [DC injection assign.]
[No] (nO)
WARNING
UNINTENDED MOVEMENT
• Do not use DC injection to generate holding torque when the motor is at a standstill.
• Use a holding brake to keep the motor in the standstill position.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
nO
LI1
...
DC injection braking is initiated when the assigned input or bit changes to state 1.
If the input returns to state 0 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if [2/3 wire control] (tCC) page 85
is set to [2 wire] (2C) and if [2 wire type] (tCt) is set to [Level] (LEL) or [Fwd priority] (PFO). If not, a new run command
must be sent.
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 163
.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
IdC [DC inject. level 1]
0.1 to 1.41 In (2) 0.64 In (2)
g
(1) (3)
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode.
This parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) is set to [DC injection] (dCI) or if [DC injection assign.] (dCI)
is not [No] (nO).
tdI [DC injection time 1]
0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
g
(1) (3)
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Maximum current injection time [DC inject. level 1] (IdC). After this time, the injection current becomes
[DC inject. level 2] (IdC2).
This parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) is set to [DC injection] (dCI) or if [DC injection assign.] (dCI)
is not set to [No] (nO).
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > STT-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 175
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
(1) The parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate.
(3) These settings are independent of the [AUTO DC INJECTION] (AdC-) function.
IdC2 [DC inject. level 2]
0.1 In (2) to [DC inject. level 1]
(IdC)
0.5 In (2)
g
(1) (3)
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode, once period of time [DC injection time 1] (tdI) has
elapsed.
This parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) is set to [DC injection] (dCI) or if [DC injection assign.] (dCI)
is not set to [No] (nO).
tdC [DC injection time 2]
0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
g
(1) (3)
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Maximum injection time [DC inject. level 2] (IdC2) for injection, selected as stop mode only.
This parameter can be accessed if [Stop type] (Stt) is set to [DC injection] (dCI).
dOtd [Dis. operat opt code]
[Ramp stop] (rMp)
nSt
rMp
Disable operation stop mode.
[Freewheel] (nSt): Disable drive function
[Ramp stop] (rMp): Ramp stop then disable drive function
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > STT-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
176 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
AUTO DC INJECTION
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
AdC- [AUTO DC INJECTION]
AdC [Auto DC injection]
[Yes] (YES)
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
If the parameter [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is set to [Continuous] (Ct), DC injection is always active, even
if the motor does not run.
• Verify that using this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
UNINTENDED MOVEMENT
• Do not use DC injection to generate holding torque when the motor is at a standstill.
• Use a holding brake to keep the motor in the standstill position.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
nO
YES
Ct
Automatic current injection on stopping (at the end of the ramp).
Note: There is an interlock between this function and [Motor fluxing] (FLU) page 95
. If [Motor fluxing] (FLU) is set
to [Continuous] (FCt), [Auto DC injection] (AdC) must be [No] (nO).
Note: [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is set to [No] (nO) when [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105
is set to
[Sync. mot.] (SYn).
[Auto DC injection] (AdC) is forced to [No] (nO) when [Brake assignment] (bLC) page 194
is not set to [No] (nO).
This parameter gives rise to the injection of current even if a run command has not been sent. It can be accessed with the drive
running.
[No] (nO): No injection
[Yes] (YES): Adjustable injection time
[Continuous] (Ct): Continuous standstill injection
SdC1 [Auto DC inj. level 1]
0 to 1.2 In (2) 0.7 In (2)
g
(1)
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Level of standstill DC injection current [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not [No] (nO).
tdC1 [Auto DC inj. time 1]
0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
g
(1)
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Standstill injection time. This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not set to [No] (nO).
If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105
is set to [Sync. mot.](SYn), this time corresponds to the zero speed maintenance
time.
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > ADC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 177
(1) The parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate.
SdC2 [Auto DC inj. level 2]
0 to 1.2 In (2) 0.5 In (2)
g
(1)
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
2nd level of standstill DC injection current.
This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is not [No] (nO).
tdC2 [Auto DC inj. time 2]
0 to 30 s 0 s
g
(1)
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
2nd standstill injection time.
This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is set to [Yes] (YES).
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
AdC SdC2 Operation
YES x
Ct
0
Ct
= 0
Run command
Speed
t
SdC1
SdC2
tdC1 tdC1 + tdC2
I
t
SdC1
I
t
SdC1
SdC2
tdC1
I
t
0
t
1
0
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
2 s
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > ADC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
178 NVE41295 04/2018
JOG
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
JOG- [JOG]
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 163.
JOG [JOG]
[LI3] (LI3)
nO
LI1
...
Pulse operation.
The JOG function is only active if the command channel and the reference channels are on the terminals.
The function is active when the assigned input or bit is at 1.
Example: 2-wire control operation (tCC = 2C).
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
.
(If [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [Not Separ.] (SIM) or [Separate] (SEP) then [CD11] (Cd11) up to [CD15] (Cd15), [C111] (C111)
up to [C115] (C115), [C211] (C211) up to [C215] (C215) and [C311] (C311) up to [C315] (C315) are not available).
JGF [Jog frequency]
0 to 10 Hz 10 Hz
g
(1)
Reference in jog operation.
This parameter can be accessed if [JOG] (JOG) is not set to [No] (nO).
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
Ramp
forced to 0.1 s
Reference
JGF reference
JGF reference
LI (JOG)
Forward
Reverse
Ramp
DEC/DE2
Motor
frequency
JGt
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > JOG-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 179
(1) The parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
JGt [Jog delay]
0 to 2.0 s 0.5 s
g
(1)
Anti-repeat delay between 2 consecutive jog operations.
This parameter can be accessed if [JOG] (JOG) is not set to [No] (nO).
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
2 s
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- >JOG-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Configuration Mode (ConF)
180 NVE41295 04/2018
PRESET SPEEDS
2, 4, 8 or 16 speeds can be preset, requiring 1, 2, 3 or 4 logic inputs respectively.
Note:
You must configure 2 and 4 speeds in order to obtain 4 speeds.
You must configure 2, 4 and 8 speeds in order to obtain 8 speeds.
You must configure 2, 4, 8, and 16 speeds in order to obtain 16 speeds.
Combination table for preset speed inputs
(1) See the diagram on page 147: Reference 1 = (SP1).
16 speeds
LI (PS16)
8 speeds
LI (PS8)
4 speeds
LI (PS4)
2 speeds
LI (PS2)
Speed reference
0 000Reference (1)
0 001SP2
0 010SP3
0 011SP4
0 100SP5
0 101SP6
0 110SP7
0 111SP8
1 000SP9
1 001SP10
1 010SP11
1 011SP12
1 100SP13
1 101SP14
1 110SP15
1 111SP16
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 181
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
PSS- [PRESET SPEEDS]
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 163..
PS2 [2 preset speeds]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
...
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
PS4 [4 preset speeds]
[No] (nO)
Identical to [2 preset speeds] (PS2) page 181.
To obtain 4 speeds, you must also configure 2 speeds.
PS8 [8 preset speeds]
[No] (nO)
Identical to [2 preset speeds] (PS2) page 181.
To obtain 8 speeds, you must also configure 2 and 4 speeds.
PS16 [16 preset speeds]
[No] (nO)
Identical to [2 preset speeds] (PS2) page 181.
To obtain 16 speeds, you must also configure 2, 4 and 8 speeds.
SP2 [Preset speed 2]
0 to 599 Hz 10 Hz
g
(1)
Preset speed 2. See the Combination table for preset PID references page 206
.
SP3 [Preset speed 3]
0 to 599 Hz 15 Hz
g
(1)
Preset speed 3. See the Combination table for preset PID references page 206
.
SP4 [Preset speed 4]
0 to 599 Hz 20 Hz
g
(1)
Preset speed 4. See the Combination table for preset PID references page 206
.
SP5 [Preset speed 5]
0 to 599 Hz 25 Hz
g
(1)
Preset speed 5. See the Combination table for preset PID references page 206
.
SP6 [Preset speed 6]
0 to 599 Hz 30 Hz
g
(1)
Preset speed 6. See the Combination table for preset PID references page 206
.
SP7 [Preset speed 7]
0 to 599 Hz 35 Hz
g
(1)
Preset speed 7. See the Combination table for preset PID references page 206
.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- >PSS-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
182 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
SP8 [Preset speed 8]
0 to 599 Hz 40 Hz
g
(1)
Preset speed 8. See the Combination table for preset PID references page 206
.
SP9 [Preset speed 9]
0 to 599 Hz 45 Hz
g
(1)
Preset speed 9. See the Combination table for preset PID references page 206
.
SP10 [Preset speed 10]
0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz
g
(1)
Preset speed 10. See the Combination table for preset PID references page 206
.
SP11 [Preset speed 11]
0 to 599 Hz 55 Hz
g
(1)
Preset speed 11. See the Combination table for preset PID references page 206
.
SP12 [Preset speed 12]
0 to 599 Hz 60 Hz
g
(1)
Preset speed 12. See the Combination table for preset PID references page 206
.
SP13 [Preset speed 13]
0 to 599 Hz 70 Hz
g
(1)
Preset speed 13. See the Combination table for preset PID references page 206
.
SP14 [Preset speed 14]
0 to 599 Hz 80 Hz
g
(1)
Preset speed 14. See the Combination table for preset PID references page 206
.
SP15 [Preset speed 15]
0 to 599 Hz 90 Hz
g
(1)
Preset speed 15. See the Combination table for preset PID references page 206
.
SP16 [Preset speed 16]
0 to 599 Hz 100 Hz
g
(1)
Preset speed 16.
The appearance of these [Preset speed x] (SPx) parameters is determined by the number of speeds configured.
See the Combination table for preset PID references page 206
.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > PSS-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 183
(1) The parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
JPF [Skip Frequency]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
Skip frequency. This parameter helps to prevent prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated frequency.
This function can be used to help to prevent a critical speed, which would cause resonance, being reached. Setting the function
to 0 renders it inactive.
JF2 [Skip Frequency 2]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
2nd skip frequency. This parameter helps to prevent prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated
frequency. This function can be used to help to prevent a critical speed, which would cause resonance, being reached. Setting
the function to 0 renders it inactive.
JF3 [3rd Skip Frequency]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
3rd skip frequency. This parameter helps to prevent prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the regulated
frequency. This function can be used to help to prevent a critical speed, which would cause resonance, being reached. Setting
the function to 0 renders it inactive.
JFH [Skip.Freq.Hysteresis]
0.1 to 10 Hz 1 Hz
g
This parameter is visible if at least one skip frequency [Skip Frequency] (JPF), [Skip Frequency 2] (JF2) or
[3rd Skip Frequency] (JF3) is different from 0.
Skip frequency range: between (JPF – JFH) and (JPF + JFH), for example.
This adjustment is common to the 3 frequencies (JPF, JF2, JF3).
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > PSS-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
184 NVE41295 04/2018
+/- SPEED
Two types of operations are available:
• Use of single action keys: Two logic inputs are required in addition to the operating direction(s).
The input assigned to the “+ speed” command increases the speed, the input assigned to the “- speed”
command decreases the speed.
• Use of double action keys: Only one logic input assigned to “+ speed” is required.
+/- speed with double-press buttons:
Description: 1 button pressed twice (2 steps) for each direction of rotation. A contact closes each time the
button is pressed.
Example of wiring:
LI1: Forward
LIx: Reverse
LIy: + speed
Do not use this +/-speed type with 3-wire control.
Whichever type of operation is selected, the max. speed is set by [High speed] (HSP) (see page 87
).
Note:
If the reference is switched via [Ref. 2 switching] (rFC) (see page 155
) from any one reference channel to
another reference channel with "+/- speed", the value of reference [Output frequency] (rFr) (after ramp)
may be copied at the same time in accordance with the [Copy channel 1 --> 2] (COP) parameter (see page
156
).
If the reference is switched via [Ref. 2 switching] (rFC) (see page 155
) from one reference channel to any
other reference channel with "+/- speed", the value of reference [Output frequency] (rFr) (after ramp) is
copied at the same time.
This helps to prevent the speed being incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes place.
Released (- speed) 1st press (speed maintained) 2nd press (faster)
Forward button – a a and b
Reverse button – c c and d
ATVppp control
terminals
LI1 LIx LIy +24
a
b
c
d
aaaa a a a
bb
cc
d
c
Motor frequency
LSP
Forward
0
2
nd
press
1
nd
press
Reverse
0
2
nd
press
1
nd
press
0
LSP
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 185
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
UPd- [+/- SPEED]
This function can be accessed if reference channel [Ref.2 channel] (Fr2) is set to [+/-Speed] (UPdt), see page 155.
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 163
.
USP [+ speed assignment]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
...
Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
(If [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [Not Separ.] (SIM) or [Separate] (SEP) then [CD11] (Cd11) up to [CD15] (Cd15), [C111] (C111)
up to [C115] (C115), [C211] (C211) up to [C215] (C215) and [C311] (C311) up to [C315] (C315) are not available).
dSP [-Speed assignment]
[No] (nO)
Assignment identical to [+ speed assignment] (uSP).
Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1.
Str [Reference saved]
[No] (nO)
g
Associated with the "+/- speed" function, this parameter can be used to save the reference:
- When the run commands disappear (saved to RAM).
- When the supply mains or the run commands disappear (saved to EEPROM).
Therefore, the next time the drive starts up, the speed reference is the last reference saved.
nO
rAM
EEP
[No] (nO): No save (the next time the drive starts up, the speed reference is [Low speed] (LSP), see page 87
)
[RAM] (rAM): Saved in RAM
[EEprom] (EEP): Saved in EEPROM
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > UPD-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
186 NVE41295 04/2018
+/- SPEED AROUND A REFERENCE
The reference is given by [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) with
summing/subtraction/multiplication functions and preset speeds if relevant (see the diagram on page 147). For
improved clarity, we will call this reference A. The action of the +speed and -speed keys can be set as a % of
this reference A. On stopping, the reference (A +/- speed) is not saved, so the drive restarts with reference A+
only.
The maximum total reference is limited by [High speed] (HSP) and the minimum reference by
[Low speed] (LSP), see page 87
.
Example of 2-wire control:
+ SrP%
Reference A +
-speed
Direction of operation
Forward
Forward
Reverse
+speed
- SrP%
- SrP%
+ SrP%
Reference A -
LSP
LSP
Motor frequency
[Acceleration 2] (AC2)
[Deceleration 2] (dE2)
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 187
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
(1) The parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6,000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr) page 170
.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
SrE- [+/-SPEED AROUND REF.]
The function can be accessed for reference channel [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1).
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 166
.
USI [+ speed assignment]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
...
No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
dSI [-Speed assignment]
[No] (nO)
See the assignment conditions on page 153
Assignment identical to [+ speed assignment] (uSi).
Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1.
SrP [+/-Speed limitation]
0 to 50% 10%
g
This parameter limits the variation range with +/- speed as a % of the reference. The ramps used in this function are
[Acceleration 2] (AC2) and [Deceleration 2] (dE2).
This parameter can be accessed if +/- speed is assigned.
AC2 [Acceleration 2]
0.00 to 6,000 s (2) 5.00 s
g
(1)
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS). To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this parameter must
be set according to the possibility of the application.
This parameter can be accessed if [+/- speed] (tUd) is assigned.
dE2 [Deceleration 2]
0.00 to 6,000 s (2) 5.00 s
g
(1)
Time to decelerate from the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) to 0. To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this parameter must
be set according to the possibility of the application.
This parameter can be accessed if [+/- speed] (tUd) is assigned.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > SRE-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
188 NVE41295 04/2018
REFERENCE MEMORIZING
Saving a speed reference value using a logic input command lasting longer than 0.1 s.
• This function is used to control the speed of several drives alternately via a single analog reference and one
logic input for each drive.
• It is also used to confirm a line reference (communication bus or network) on several drives via a logic input.
This allows movements to be synchronized by getting rid of variations when the reference is set.
• The reference is acquired 100 ms after the rising edge of the request. A new reference is not then acquired
until a new request is made.
t
t
t
0
0
1
0
1
100 ms
100 ms100 ms
F: Motor frequency
Reference
Run command
LIx (saved)
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
SPM- [MEMO REFERENCE]
SPM [Ref. memo ass.]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
...
LI6
LAI1
LAI2
OL01
...
OL10
Assignment to a logic input.
Function active if the assigned input is at active state.
[No] (nO):
Function inactive
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
...
[LI6] (LI6): Logical input LI6
[LAI1] (LAI1): Logical input AI1
[LAI2] (LAI2): Logical input AI2
[OL01] (OL01): Function blocks: Logical Output 01
...
[OL10] (OL10): Function blocks: Logical Output 10
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > SPM-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 189
FLUXING BY LOGIC INPUT
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
FLI- [FLUXING BY LI]
FLU [Motor fluxing]
[No] (FnO)
g
(1)
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
If the parameter [Motor fluxing] (FLU) is set to [Continuous] (FCt), fluxing is always active, even if the
motor does not run.
• Verify that using this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
FnC
FCt
FnO
[Not cont.] (FnC): Non-continuous mode
[Continuous] (FCt): Continuous mode.
This option is not possible if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) page 176
is [Yes] (YES) or if [Type of stop] (Stt) page 173 is
[Freewheel] (nSt).
[No] (FnO): Function inactive
In order to obtain rapid high torque on startup, magnetic flux needs to already have been established in the motor.
In [Continuous] (FCt) mode, the drive automatically builds up flux when it is powered up.
In [Not cont.] (FnC) mode, fluxing occurs when the motor starts up.
The flux current is greater than [Rated mot. current] (nCr) (configured rated motor current) when the flux is established and
is then adjusted to the motor magnetizing current.
If [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105
is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn), the [Motor fluxing] (FLU) parameter causes the
alignment of the rotor and not the fluxing.
If [Brake assignment] (bLC) page 194
is not [No] (nO), the [Motor fluxing] (FLU) parameter has no effect.
FLI [Fluxing assignment]
[No] (nO)
g
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the flux current to be applied in order to avoid
overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
nO
LI1
...
Assignment is only possible if [Motor fluxing] (FLU) is set to [Not cont.] (FnC).
If an LI or a bit is assigned to the motor fluxing command, flux is built up when the assigned input or bit is at 1.
If an LI or a bit has not been assigned, or if the assigned LI or bit is at 0 when a run command is sent, fluxing occurs when the
motor starts.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
2 s
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > FLI-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
190 NVE41295 04/2018
(1) The parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
ASt [Angle setting type]
[PSIO align.] (PSIO)
g
Mode for measuring the phase-shift angle. Visible only if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [Sync. mot.] (SYn).
[PSI align] (PSI) and [PSIO align] (PSIO) are working for all type of synchronous motors. [SPM align] (SPMA) and
[IPM align] (IPMA) increase performances depending on the type of synchronous motor.
IPMA
SPMA
PSI
PSIO
nO
[IPM align] (IPMA): Alignment for IPM motor. Alignment mode for Interior-buried Permanent Magnet motor (usually, this kind
of motor has a high saliency level). It uses high frequency injection, which is less noisy than standard alignment mode.
[SPM align] (SPMA): Alignment for SPM motor. Mode for Surface-mounted Permanent Magnet motor (usually, this kind of
motor has a medium or low saliency level). It uses high frequency injection, which is less noisy than standard alignment mode.
[PSI align] (PSI): Pulse signal injection. Standard alignment mode by pulse signal injection.
[PSIO align] (PSIO): Pulse signal injection - Optimized. Standard optimized alignment mode by pulse signal injection. The
phase-shift angle measurement time is reduced after the first run order or tune operation, even if the drive has been turned off.
[No align] (nO): No alignment
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
2 s
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > FLI-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 191
BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL
Used to control an electromagnetic brake by the drive, for horizontal and vertical hoisting applications, and for
unbalanced machines.
Principle:
- Vertical hoisting movement:
Maintain motor torque in the driving load holding direction during brake opening and closing, in order to hold
the load, start smoothly when the brake is released and stop smoothly when the brake is engaged.
- Horizontal movement:
Synchronize brake release with the build-up of torque during startup and brake engage at zero speed on
stopping, to help to prevent jolting.
Instructions for brake logic control for a vertical hoisting application:
• [Brake impulse] (bIP): [Yes] (YES). Ensure that the direction of rotation FW corresponds to lifting the
load.
For applications in which the load being lowered is very different from the load being lifted, set bIP =
2 Ibr (for example, ascent always with a load and descent always without a load).
• Brake release current ([Brake release I FW] (Ibr) and [Brake release I Rev] (Ird) if [Brake impulse]
(bIP) = 2 Ibr): Adjust the brake release current to the rated current indicated on the motor.
During testing, adjust the brake release current in order to hold the load smoothly.
• Acceleration time: For hoisting applications, it is advisable to set the acceleration ramps to more than 0.5
seconds. Ensure that the drive does not exceed the current limit.
The same recommendation applies for deceleration.
Reminder: For a hoisting movement, a braking resistor should be used.
• [Brake Release time] (brt): Set according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical
brake to release.
• [Brake release frequency] (bIr), in open-loop mode only: Leave in [Auto] (AUtO), adjust if
necessary.
• [Brake engage frequency] (bEn): Leave in [Auto] (AUtO), adjust if necessary.
• [Brake engage time] (bEt): Set according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical
brake to engage.
Instructions for brake logic control for a horizontal hoisting application:
• [Brake impulse] (bIP): No
• [Brake release I FW] (Ibr): Set to 0.
• [Brake Release time] (brt): Set according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical
brake to release.
• [Brake engage frequency] (bEn), in open-loop mode only: Leave in [Auto] (AUtO), adjust if
necessary.
• [Brake engage time] (bEt): Set according to the type of brake. It is the time required for the mechanical
brake to engage.
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that the selected settings will not result in the loss of control
of the load being lifted.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Configuration Mode (ConF)
192 NVE41295 04/2018
Brake logic control, horizontal movement in open-loop mode
Key:
• (bEn): [Brake engage freq]
• (bEt): [Brake engage time]
• (brt): [Brake Release time]
• (Ibr): [Brake release I FW]
• (SdC1): [Auto DC inj. level 1]
• (tbE): [Brake engage delay]
• (ttr): [Time to restart]
Frequency
Reference
bEn
t
Flux current
Rated flux
current
SdC1
Torque current
Ibr
Direction of
operation
ReverseForward
Relay
or logic
output
Brake contact
State of brake
Engaged
Released
Type of motor
control
Flux
brt
ttrbEttbE
Frequency
Torque
Injection
Locking
0
t
t
t
t
t
t
Fluxed motor
Ibr attained
0 attained
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 193
Brake logic control, vertical movement in open-loop mode
Key:
• (bEn): [Brake engage freq]
• (bEt): [Brake engage time]
• (bIr): [Brake release freq]
• (brt): [Brake Release time]
• (Ibr): [Brake release I FW]
• (JdC): [Jump at reversal]
• (tbE): [Brake engage delay]
• (ttr): [Time to restart]
Frequency
Reference
bEn
t
Flux current
Rated flux
current
Torque current
Ibr
Direction of
operation
DescendingAscending
Relay
or logic
output
Brake contact
State of brake
Engaged
Released
Type of motor
control
brt
ttrbEttbE
0
t
t
t
t
t
t
Fluxed motor
Ibr attained
0 attained
bIr
JdC
JdC
Flux
Frequency
Torque
Injection
Locking
Configuration Mode (ConF)
194 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
bLC- [BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL]
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 163.
bLC [Brake assignment]
[No] (nO)
nO
r2
LO1
dO1
Logic output or control relay.
Note: If the brake is assigned, only a ramp stop is possible. Check the [Type of stop] (Stt) page 173
.
Brake logic control can only be assigned if [Motor control type] (Ctt) is not set to [Standard] (Std), [V/F 5pts] (UF5),
[V/F Quad.] (UFq) or [Sync. mot] (SYn). See Compatibility table page 165
to see the compatible functions.
[No] (nO): Function not assigned (in this case, none of the function parameters can be accessed)
[R2] (r2): Relay
[LO1] (LO1): Logic output
[dO1] (dO1): Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output. Selection can be made if [AO1 assignment] (AO1) page 144
is set to [No] (nO)
bSt [Movement type]
[Hoisting] (UEr)
g
HOr
UEr
[Traveling] (HOr): Resistive-load movement (translational motion of overhead crane, for example)
Note: If [Motor control type] (Ctt) is set to [Standard] (Std) or [V/F 5pts] (UF5), [Movement type] (bSt) is forced to
[Traveling] (HOr).
[Hoisting] (UEr): Driving-load movement (hoisting winch, for example)
Note: If [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) page 200
is not [No] (nO), [Movement type] (bSt) is forced to [Hoisting] (UEr).
bCI [Brake contact]
[No] (nO)
g
If the brake has a monitoring contact (closed for released brake).
nO
LI1
...
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
bIP [Brake impulse]
[Yes] (YES)
g
Brake impulse.
This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) is set to [No] (nO) (see page 200
). It is set to [Yes] (YES)
if [Movement type] (bSt) is set to [Hoisting] (UEr).
nO
YES
2Ibr
[No] (nO): The motor torque is given in the required operating direction, at current [Brake release I FW] (Ibr)
[Yes] (YES): The motor torque is in forward direction (check that this direction corresponds to ascending), at current
[Brake release I FW] (Ibr)
[2 IBR] (2Ibr): The torque is in the required direction, at current [Brake release I FW] (Ibr) for Forward and
[Brake release I Rev] (Ird) for Reverse, for certain specific applications
Ibr [Brake release I FW]
0 to 1.36 In (2) 0 A
g
(1)
Brake release current threshold for ascending or forward movement.
This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) is set to [No] (nO) page 200
.
Ird [Brake release I Rev]
0 to 1.36 In (2) 0 A
g
Brake release current threshold for descending or reverse movement.
This parameter can be accessed if [Brake impulse] (bIP) is set to [2 IBR] (2Ibr).
brt [Brake Release time]
0 to 5.00 s 0 s
g
(1)
Brake release time delay.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > BLC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 195
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
bIr [Brake release freq]
[Auto] (AUtO) to 10 Hz [Auto] (AUtO)
g
(1)
Brake release frequency threshold (initialization of acceleration ramp).
This parameter can be accessed if [Movement type] (bSt) page 194 is set to [Hoisting] (UEr).
AUtO [Auto] (AUtO): The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor, calculated using the drive parameters
0 to 10 Hz: Manual control.
bEn [Brake engage freq]
[Auto] (AUtO)
0 to 10 Hz
[Auto] (AUtO)
g
(1)
Brake engage frequency threshold.
Note: [Brake engage freq] (bEn) cannot be higher than [Low speed] (LSP).
AUtO [Auto] (AUtO): The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor, calculated using the drive parameters
0 to 10 Hz: Manual control.
tbE [Brake engage delay]
0 to 5.00 s 0 s
g
(1)
Time delay before request to engage brake.
bEt [Brake engage time]
0 to 5.00 s 0 s
g
(1)
Brake engage time (brake response time).
SdC1
g
(1)
[Auto DC inj. level 1]
0 to 1.2 In (2) 0.7 In (2)
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Level of standstill DC injection current.
Note: This parameter can be accessed if [Movement type] (bSt) page 194
is set to [Traveling] (HOr).
bEd [Engage at reversal]
[No] (nO)
g
Can be used to select whether or not the brake engages on transition to zero speed when the operating direction is reversed.
nO
YES
[No] (nO): The brake does not engage
[Yes] (YES): The brake engages
JdC [Jump at reversal]
[Auto] (AUtO) to 10 Hz [Auto] (AUtO)
g
(1)
This parameter can be accessed if [Movement type] (bSt) page 194
is set to [Hoisting] (UEr).
AUtO
-
[Auto] (AUtO): The drive takes a value equal to the rated slip of the motor, calculated using the drive parameters
0 to 10 Hz: Manual control
When the reference direction is reversed, this parameter can be used to avoid loss of torque (and consequential release of load)
on transition to zero speed. Parameter is not applicable if [Engage at reversal] (bEd) = [Yes] (YES).
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > BLC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
196 NVE41295 04/2018
(1) The parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate.
ttr [Time to restart]
0.00 to 15.00 s 0 s
g
(1)
Time between the end of a brake engage sequence and the start of a brake release sequence.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > BLC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 197
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Brake control logic expert parameters
Following parameters for brake logic sequence are accessible in expert mode only.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
brH0 [BRH b0]
0
g
Selection of the brake restart sequence if a run command is repeated while the brake is engaging.
0
1
[0] (0): The engage/release sequence is completely executed
[1] (1): The brake is released immediately
A run command may be requested during the brake engagement phase. Whether or not the brake release sequence is executed
depends on the value selected for [BRH b0] (brH0).
Note: If a run command is requested during the "ttr" phase, the complete brake control sequence is initialized.
brH1 [BRH b1]
0
g
Deactivation of the brake contact in steady state fault.
0
1
[0] (0): The brake contact in steady state fault is active (fault state if the contact is open during operation). The
[Brake feedback] (brF) brake contact fault is monitored in all operating phases.
[1] (1): The brake contact in steady state fault is inactive. The [Brake feedback] (brF) brake contact fault is only monitored
during the brake release and engage phases.
Frequency
Run command
Relay or
logic input
Frequency
Relay or
logic input
bEn
[BRH b0]
(brH0) = 1
[BRH b0] (brH0) = 0
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > BLC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
198 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
brH2 [BRH b2]
0
g
Taking the brake contact into account for the brake control sequence.
0
1
[0] (0): The brake contact is not taken into account
[1] (1): The brake contact is taken into account
If a logic input is assigned to the brake contact:
- [BRH b2] (brH2) = 0: During the brake release sequence, the reference is enabled at the end of the time
[Brake Release time] (brt). During the brake engage sequence, the current changes to 0 according to the ramp
[Current ramp time] (brr) at the end of the [Brake engage time] (bEt).
- [BRH b2] (brH2) = 1: When the brake is released, the reference is enabled when the logic input changes to 1. When
the brake is engaged, the current changes to 0 according to the ramp [Current ramp time] (brr) when the logic input
changes to 0.
brr [Current ramp time]
0 to 5.00 s 0 s
g
Torque current ramp time (increase and decrease) for a current variation equal to [Brake release I FW] (Ibr).
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
brt
brr
brr
bEt
blr
Frequency
Logic input
Brake contact
Frequency
Relay or
logic input
Run command
[BRH b2] (brH2) = 0
[BRH b2] (brH2) = 1
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > BLC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 199
EXTERNAL WEIGHT MEASUREMENT
Load measurement
This function uses the information supplied by a weight sensor to adapt the current
[Brake release I FW] (Ibr) of the [BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL] (bLC-) function. The signal from the
weight sensor can be assigned to an analog input (usually a 4 - 20 mA signal) or to the pulse-in input,
according to the type of weight sensor.
Example: Measurement of the total weight of a hoisting winch and its load
The current [Brake release I FW] (Ibr) is adapted in accordance with the curve below.
Weight sensor
signal
100%
[Point 2x]
LP2
Zero load
[Point 1x]
LP1
Ibr
[Point 2y]
(CP2)
[Point 1y]
(CP1)
0
Configuration Mode (ConF)
200 NVE41295 04/2018
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
ELM- [EXTERNAL WEIGHT MEAS.]
PES [Weight sensor ass.]
[No] (nO)
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
• Verify that [Point 1 X] (LP1), [Point 2x] (LP2), [Point 1Y] (CP1) and [Point 2Y] (CP2) are correctly
set to avoid loss of control of the load being lifted.
• Perform a comprehensive commissioning test to confirm the value given to the parameters [Point 1 X]
(LP1), [Point 2x] (LP2), [Point 1Y] (CP1) and [Point 2Y] (CP2).
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
nO
A11
A12
A13
PI
AIU1
AIU2
OA01
...
OA10
This parameter can be configured if [BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL] (bLC-) page 194
is not set to [No] (nO).
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[Al1] (A11): Analog input A1
[Al2] (A12): Analog input A2
[Al3] (A13): Analog input A3
[RP] (PI): Pulse input
[AI virtual 1] (AIU1): Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial
[AI virtual 2] (AIU2): Virtual analog input 2 by the communication bus
[OA01] (OA01): Function blocks: Analog Output 01
...
[OA10] (OA10): Function blocks: Analog Output 10
LP1 [Point 1 X]
0 to LP2-0.01% 0%
g
0 to 99.99% of signal on assigned input.
[Point 1x] (LP1) must be less than [Point 2x] (LP2).
This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) is assigned.
CP1 [Point 1Y]
-1.36 In to 1.36 In (1) -In (1)
g
Current corresponding to load [Point 1 X] (LP1), in A.
This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) is assigned.
LP2 [Point 2X]
LP1+0.01% to 100% 50%
g
0.01 to 100% of signal on assigned input.
[Point 2x] (LP2) must be greater than [Point 1x] (LP1).
This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) is assigned.
CP2 [Point 2Y]
-1.36 In to 1.36 In (1) 0 A
g
Current corresponding to load [Point 2x] (LP2), in A.
This parameter can be accessed if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES) is assigned.
IbrA [Ibr 4-20 mA loss]
0 to 1.36 In (1) 0
g
Brake release current in the event of the loss of the weight sensor information.
This parameter can be accessed if the weight sensor is assigned to an analog current input and the 4-20 mA loss is deactivated.
Recommended settings: Rated motor current for a hoisting application.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > ELM-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 201
HIGH SPEED HOISTING
This function can be used to optimize the cycle times for hoisting movements for zero or lightweight loads. It
authorizes operation at "constant power" in order to reach a speed greater than the rated speed without
exceeding the rated motor current.
The speed remains limited by the [High speed] (HSP) parameter page 87
.
The function acts on the speed reference pedestal and not on the reference itself.
Principle:
There are 2 possible operating modes:
• Speed reference mode: The maximum permissible speed is calculated by the drive during a speed step that
is set so that the drive can measure the load.
• Current limitation mode: The maximum permissible speed is the speed that supports current limitation in
motor mode, in the "ascending" direction only. For the "descending" direction, operation is in Speed
reference mode.
Frequency
High speed
HSP
Rated
motor
frequency FrS
Ascending
C
o
n
s
t
a
n
t
p
o
w
e
r
C
o
n
s
t
a
n
t
p
o
w
e
r
Descending
Tr: Rated
motor
torque
Torque
max.
Torque
High speed
HSP
Rated
motor
frequency FrS
0
Configuration Mode (ConF)
202 NVE41295 04/2018
Speed reference mode
OSP: Adjustable speed step for load measurement
tOS: Load measuring time
Two parameters are used to reduce the speed calculated by the drive, for ascending and descending.
Ascend or descend
command
Reference
Frequency
Calculated limit
t
t
t
tOS
HSP
FrS
OSP
0
HSP
FrS
OSP
0
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 203
Current limiting mode
SCL: Adjustable speed threshold, above which current limitation is active
CLO: Current limitation for high-speed function
Note: The speed reached for a specific current will be lower in case of network undervoltage in comparison
with nominal network voltage.
Ascend command
Reference
Frequency
t
t
t
HSP
FrS
SCL
0
HSP
FrS
SCL
0
Limit imposed
by current
limitation
Current
t
CLO
Configuration Mode (ConF)
204 NVE41295 04/2018
Rope slack
The Rope slack function can be used to help to prevent starting up at high speed when a load has been set
down ready for lifting but the rope is still slack (as illustrated below).
The speed step (OSP parameters) described on page 202 is used to measure the load. The effective
measurement cycle will not be triggered until the load reaches the adjustable threshold
[Rope slack trq level] (rStL), which corresponds to the weight of the hook.
A logic output or a relay can be assigned to the indication of the rope slack state in the
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu.
Speed
Load
rStL
OSP
tOS
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
HSH- [HIGH SPEED HOISTING]
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 163.
HSO [High speed hoisting]
[No] (nO)
nO
SSO
CSO
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Speed ref] (SSO): Speed reference mode
[I Limit] (CSO): Current limitation mode
COF [Motor speed coeff.]
0 to 100% 100%
g
Speed reduction coefficient calculated by the drive for Ascending direction.
This parameter can be accessed if [High speed hoisting] (HSO) is set to [Speed ref] (SSO).
COr [Gen. speed coeff]
0 to 100% 50%
g
Speed reduction coefficient calculated by the drive for Descending direction.
This parameter can be accessed if [High speed hoisting] (HSO) is not set to [No] (nO).
tOS [Load measuring tm.]
0.1 s to 65 s 0.5 s
g
Duration of speed step for measurement.
This parameter can be accessed if [High speed hoisting] (HSO) is not set to [No] (nO).
OSP [Measurement spd]
0 to [Rated motor freq.] (FrS) 40 Hz
g
Speed stabilized for measurement.
This parameter can be accessed if [High speed hoisting] (HSO) is not set to [No] (nO).
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 205
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate.
CLO [High speed I Limit]
0 to 1.5 In (1) In (1)
g
Current limitation at high speed.
This parameter can be accessed if [High speed hoisting] (HSO) is set to [I Limit] (CSO).
Note: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) fault mode if this has been enabled
(see page 256
).
SCL [I Limit. frequency]
0 to 599 Hz according to rating 40 Hz
g
Frequency threshold, above which the high-speed limitation current is active.
This parameter can be accessed if [High speed hoisting] (HSO) is set to [I Limit] (CSO).
rSd [Rope slack config.]
[No] (nO)
g
Rope slack function.
This parameter can be accessed if [High speed hoisting] (HSO) is not set to [No] (nO).
nO
drI
PES
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Drive estim.] (drI): Measurement of the load by estimating the torque generated by the drive
[Ext. sensor] (PES): Measurement of the load using a weight sensor, can only be assigned if [Weight sensor ass.] (PES)
page 200
is not [No] (nO)
rStL [Rope slack trq level]
0 to 100% 0%
g
Adjustment threshold corresponding to a load weighing slightly less than the hook when off-load, as a % of the rated load.
This parameter can be accessed if [Rope slack trq level] (rSd) has been assigned.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > HSH-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
206 NVE41295 04/2018
PID REGULATOR
Block diagram
The function is activated by assigning an analog input to the PID feedback (measurement).
(1) Ramp AC2 is only active when the PID function starts up and during PID "wake-ups".
PID feedback:
The PID feedback must be assigned to one of the analog inputs AI1 to AI3, to the pulse input, according to
whether any extension cards have been inserted.
PID reference:
The PID reference must be assigned to the following parameters: Preset references via logic inputs (rP2,
rP3, rP4)
In accordance with the configuration of [Act. internal PID ref.] (PII) page 210
:
Internal reference (rPI) or
Reference A ([Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b), see page 154
).
Combination table for preset PID references:
A predictive speed reference can be used to initialize the speed on restarting the process.
(manu)
nO
+
-
rP2
rP3
rP4
rIG
rPG
0
rSL
PIF1 / PIF2
PIP1 / PIP2
x(-1)
nO
nO
YES
nO
AI1
.....
LI
+
+
POH
POL
rdG
ACC DEC
x PSr
SP2
SP16
rPI
A
B
nO
YES
PrP
AC2
(1)
Internal
reference
Reference A
Pages 147
and 148
PID
feedback
Preset PID references
Error
inversion
Restart error
threshold
(wake-up)
Gains
Ramps
Parameter:
The black square
represents the factory
setting assignment
Key:
Ramp
Preset manual references
Scaling
RP
Network AIU2
Predictive
speed
reference
Manual
reference
Auto/Manual
Pages 147
and 148
LI (Pr4) LI (Pr2) Pr2 = nO Reference
rPI or A
0 0 rPI or A
01 rP2
10 rP3
11 rP4
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 207
Scaling of feedback and references:
• [Min PID feedback] (PIF1), [Max PID feedback] (PIF2) parameters can be used to scale the PID
feedback (sensor range). This scale MUST be maintained for all other parameters.
• [Min PID reference] (PIP1), [Max PID reference] (PIP2) parameters can be used to scale the
adjustment range, for example the reference. The adjustment range MUST remain within the sensor
range.
The maximum value of the scaling parameters is 32,767. To facilitate installation, we recommend using values
as close as possible to this maximum level, while retaining powers of 10 in relation to the actual values.
Example (see graph below): Adjustment of the volume in a tank, between 6 m
3
and 15 m
3
.
• Sensor used 4-20 mA, 4.5 m
3
for 4 mA and 20 m
3
for 20 mA, with the result that PIF1 = 4,500 and
PIF2 = 20,000.
• Adjustment range 6 to 15 m
3
, with the result that PIP1 = 6,000 (min. reference) and PIP2 = 15,000
(max. reference).
• Example references:
- rP1 (internal reference) = 9,500
- rP2 (preset reference) = 6,500
- rP3 (preset reference) = 8,000
- rP4 (preset reference) = 11,200
The [3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.] menu can be used to customize the name of the unit displayed and its format.
Other parameters:
• [PID wake up thresh.] (rSL) parameter: Can be used to set the PID error threshold, above which the
PID regulator will be reactivated (wake-up) after a stop due to the max. time threshold being exceeded at
low speed [Low speed time out] (tLS).
• Reversal of the direction of correction [PID correct. reverse] (PIC): If [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) is
set to [No] (nO), the speed of the motor will increase when the error is positive (for example: pressure
control with a compressor). If [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) is set to [Yes] (YES), the speed of the motor
will decrease when the error is positive (for example: temperature control using a cooling fan).
• The integral gain may be short-circuited by a logic input.
• An alarm on the PID feedback may be configured and indicated by a logic output.
• An alarm on the PID error may be configured and indicated by a logic output.
PID feedback
Adjustment range
(reference)
PIP2 (15,000)
PIP1 (6,000)
PIF1
(4,500)
PIF2
(20,000)
Configuration Mode (ConF)
208 NVE41295 04/2018
"Manual - Automatic" Operation with PID
This function combines the PID regulator, the preset speeds and a manual reference. Depending on the state
of the logic input, the speed reference is given by the preset speeds or by a manual reference input via the
PID function.
Manual reference [Manual reference] (PIM):
• Analog inputs AI1 to AI3
• Pulse input
Predictive speed reference [Speed ref. assign.] (FPI):
• [AI1] (AI1): Analog input
• [AI2] (AI2): Analog input
• [AI3] (AI3): Analog input
• [RP] (PI): Pulse input
• [HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal
• [Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
• [CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen®
• [Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
Setting up the PID regulator
1. Configuration in PID mode.
See the diagram on page 206.
2. Perform a test in factory settings mode.
To optimize the drive, adjust [PID prop. gain] (rPG) or [PID integral gain] (rIG) gradually and
independently, and observe the effect on the PID feedback in relation to the reference.
3. If the factory settings are unstable or the reference is incorrect.
• Perform a test with a speed reference in Manual mode (without PID regulator) and with the drive on load
for the speed range of the system:
- In steady state, the speed must be stable and comply with the reference, and the PID feedback signal
must be stable.
- In transient state, the speed must follow the ramp and stabilize quickly, and the PID feedback must
follow the speed. If this is not the case, see the settings for the drive and/or sensor signal and wiring.
• Switch to PID mode.
• Set [Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) to [No] (nO) (no auto-adaptation of the ramp).
• Set [PID ramp] (PrP) to the minimum permitted by the mechanism without triggering an
[Overbraking] (ObF).
• Set the integral gain [PID integral gain] (rIG) to minimum.
• Leave the derivative gain [PID derivative gain] (rdG) at 0.
• Observe the PID feedback and the reference.
• Switch the drive ON/OFF a number of times or vary the load or reference rapidly a number of times.
• Set the proportional gain [PID prop. gain] (rPG) in order to ascertain the compromise between response
time and stability in transient phases (slight overshoot and 1 to 2 oscillations before stabilizing).
• If the reference varies from the preset value in steady state, gradually increase the integral gain
[PID integral gain] (rIG), reduce the proportional gain [PID prop. gain] (rPG) in the event of instability
(pump applications), find a compromise between response time and static precision (see diagram).
• Lastly, the derivative gain may permit the overshoot to be reduced and the response time to be improved,
although this will be more difficult to obtain a compromise in terms of stability, as it depends on 3 gains.
• Perform in-production tests over the whole reference range.
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 209
The oscillation frequency depends on the system kinematics.
Parameter Rise time Overshoot Stabilization time Static error
rPG
=
rIG
rdG
==
Regulated
value
Proportional
gain
rPG high
Overshoot
Stabilization time
rPG low
Static error
Rise time
time
Integral
gain
rIG high
rIG low
rdG increased
time
time
Reference
Reference
Reference
rPG and rIG correct
Configuration Mode (ConF)
210 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
PId- [PID REGULATOR]
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 163.
PIF [PID feedback ass.]
[No] (nO)
nO
A11
A12
A13
PI
AIU1
AIU2
OA01
...
OA10
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[Al1] (A11): Analog input A1
[Al2] (A12): Analog input A2
[Al3] (A13): Analog input A3
[RP] (PI): Pulse input
[AI virtual 1] (AIU1): Virtual analog input 1 by the communication bus
[AI virtual 2] (AIU2): Virtual analog input 2 by the communication bus
[OA01] (OA01): Function blocks: Analog Output 01
...
[OA10] (OA10): Function blocks: Analog Output 10
AIC2 [AI2 net. channel]
[No] (nO)
g
This parameter can be accessed if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) is set to [AI virtual 2] (AIU2). This parameter can also be
accessed in the [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu.
nO
Mdb
CAn
nEt
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
[CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen®
[Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
PIF1 [Min PID feedback]
0 to [Max PID feedback] (PIF2) (2) 100
g
(1)
Value for minimum feedback.
PIF2 [Max PID feedback]
[Min PID feedback] (PIF1) to 32,767 (2) 1,000
g
(1)
Value for maximum feedback.
PIP1 [Min PID reference]
[Min PID feedback] (PIF1) to
[Max PID reference] (PIP2) (2)
150
g
(1)
Minimum process value.
PIP2 [Max PID reference]
[Min PID reference] (PIP1) to
[Max PID feedback] (PIF2) (2)
900
g
(1)
Maximum process value.
PII [Act. internal PID ref.]
[No] (nO)
g
Internal PID regulator reference.
nO
YES
[No] (nO): The PID regulator reference is given by [Ref.1 channel] (Fr1) or [Ref.1B channel] (Fr1b) with
summing/subtraction/multiplication functions (see the diagram on page 206
).
[Yes] (YES): The PID regulator reference is internal via [Internal PID ref.] (rPI).
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > PID-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 211
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
rPI [Internal PID ref.]
[Min PID reference] (PIP1) to
[Max PID reference] (PIP2)
150
g
Internal PID regulator reference.
This parameter can also be accessed in the [1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-) menu.
rPG [PID prop. gain]
0.01 to 100 1
g
Proportional gain.
rIG [PID integral gain]
0.01 to 100 1
g
Integral gain.
rdG [PID derivative gain]
0.00 to 100 0
g
Derivative gain.
PrP [PID ramp]
0 to 99.9 s 0 s
g
(1)
PID acceleration/deceleration ramp, defined to go from [Min PID reference] (PIP1) to [Max PID reference] (PIP2) and
vice versa.
PIC [PID correct. reverse]
[No] (nO)
g
Reversal of the direction of correction [PID correct. reverse] (PIC):
If [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) is set to [No] (nO), the speed of the motor will increase when the error is positive (example:
pressure control with a compressor)
If [PID correct. reverse] (PIC) is set to [Yes] (YES), the speed of the motor will decrease when the error is positive (example:
temperature control using a cooling fan).
nO
YES
[No] (nO): No
[Yes] (YES): Yes
POL [Min PID output]
- 599 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
g
(1)
Minimum value of regulator output in Hz.
POH [Max PID output]
0 to 599 Hz 60 Hz
g
(1)
Maximum value of regulator output in Hz.
PAL
g
(1)
[Min fbk alarm]
[Min PID feedback] (PIF1) to
[Max PID feedback] (PIF2) (2)
100
Minimum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > PID-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
212 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
PAH [Max fbk alarm]
[Min PID feedback] (PIF1) to
[Max PID feedback] (PIF2) (2)
1,000
g
(1)
Maximum monitoring threshold for regulator feedback.
PEr [PID error Alarm]
0 to 65,535 (2) 100
g
(1)
Regulator error monitoring threshold.
PIS [PID integral reset]
[No] (nO)
g
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the function is inactive (the PID integral is enabled).
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the function is active (the PID integral is disabled).
nO
LI1
...
No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
FPI [Speed ref. assign.]
[No] (nO)
g
PID regulator predictive speed input.
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
LCC
Mdb
CAn
nEt
PI
AIU1
OA01
...
OA10
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[Al1] (A11): Analog input A1
[Al2] (A12): Analog input A2
[Al3] (A13): Analog input A3
[HMI] (LCC): Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal source
[Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
[CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen®
[Com. card] (nEt): Communication option board source
[RP] (PI): Pulse input
[AI virtual 1] (AIU1): Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial
[OA01] (OA01): Function blocks: Analog Output 01
...
[OA10] (OA10): Function blocks: Analog Output 10
PSr [Speed input %]
1 to 100% 100%
g
(1)
Multiplying coefficient for predictive speed input.
This parameter cannot be accessed if [Speed ref. assign.] (FPI) is set to [No] (nO).
PAU [Auto/Manual assign.]
[No] (nO)
g
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the PID is active.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, manual operation is active.
nO
LI1
...
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
AC2 [Acceleration 2]
0.00 to 6,000 s (3) 5 s
g
(1)
Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Rated motor freq.] (FrS). To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this parameter must
be set according to the possibility of the application.
Ramp AC2 is only active when the PID function starts up and during PID "wake-ups".
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > PID-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 213
(1) The parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) If a graphic display terminal is not in use, values greater than 9,999 will be displayed on the 4-digit display with a period
mark after the thousand digit, for example, 15.65 for 15,650.
(3) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6,000 s according to [Ramp increment] (Inr) page 170
.
PIM [Manual reference]
[No] (nO)
g
Manual speed input. This parameter can be accessed if [Auto/Manual assign.] (PAU) is not set to [No] (nO).
The preset speeds are active on the manual reference if they have been configured.
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
PI
AIU1
OA01
...
OA10
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[Al1] (A11): Analog input A1
[Al2] (A12): Analog input A2
[Al3] (A13): Analog input A3
[RP] (PI): Pulse input
[AI virtual 1] (AIU1): Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial
[OA01] (OA01): Function blocks: Analog Output 01
...
[OA10] (OA10): Function blocks: Analog Output 10
tLS
(1)
[Low speed time out]
0 to 999.9 s 0 s
Maximum operating time at [Low speed] (LSP) (see [Low speed] (LSP) page 87
).
Following operation at [Low speed] (LSP) for a defined period, a motor stop is requested automatically. The motor will restart
if the reference is greater than [Low speed] (LSP) and if a run command is still present.
Note: A value of 0 indicates an unlimited period of time.
If [Low speed time out] (tLS) is not 0, [Type of stop] (Stt) page 173
is forced to [Ramp stop] (rMP) (only if a ramp stop
can be configured).
rSL [PID wake up thresh.]
0.0 to 100.0 0
g
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
If the "PID" and "Low speed operating time" [Low speed time out] (tLS) functions are configured at the same time, the PID
regulator may attempt to set a speed lower than [Low speed] (LSP).
This results in unsatisfactory operation, which consists of starting, operating at low speed then stopping, and so on…
Parameter [PID wake up thresh.] (rSL) (restart error threshold) can be used to set a minimum PID error threshold for
restarting after a stop at prolonged [Low speed] (LSP). [PID wake up thresh.] (rSL) is a percentage of the PID error (value
depends on [Min PID feedback] (PIF1) and [Max PID feedback] (PIF2), see [Min PID feedback] (PIF1) page 210
).
The function is inactive if [Low speed time out] (tLS) = 0 or if [PID wake up thresh.] (rSL) = 0.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
2 s
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
2 s
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > PID-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
214 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
PID PRESET REFERENCES
(1) The parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) If a graphic display terminal is not in use, values greater than 9,999 will be displayed on the 4-digit display with a period
mark after the thousand digit, for example, 15.65 for 15,650.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
PrI- [PID PRESET REFERENCES]
Function can be accessed if [PID feedback ass.] (PIF) page 210 is assigned.
Pr2 [2 preset PID ref.]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
...
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the function is inactive.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the function is active.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
Pr4 [4 preset PID ref.]
[No] (nO)
Check that [2 preset PID ref.] (Pr2) has been assigned before assigning this function.
Identical to [2 preset PID ref.] (Pr2) page 212
.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the function is inactive.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the function is active.
rP2 [Preset ref. PID 2]
[Min PID reference] (PIP1) to
[Max PID reference] (PIP2) (2)
300
g
(1)
This parameter can be accessed if [2 preset PID ref.2] (Pr2) is assigned.
rP3 [Preset ref. PID 3]
[Min PID reference] (PIP1) to
[Max PID reference] (PIP2) (2)
600
g
(1)
This parameter can be accessed if [3 preset PID ref.] (Pr3) is assigned.
rP4 [Preset ref. PID 4]
[Min PID reference] (PIP1) to
[Max PID reference] (PIP2) (2)
900
g
(1)
This parameter can be accessed if [4 preset PID ref.] (Pr4) is assigned.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > PRI-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 215
TORQUE LIMITATION
There are two types of torque limitation:
• With a value that is fixed by a parameter
• With a value that is set by an analog input (AI or pulse)
If both types are enabled, the lowest value is taken into account. The two types of limitation can be configured
or switched remotely using a logic input or via the communication bus.
[Yes]
(YES)
LI
[Motoring torque
lim] (tLIM)
[Gen. torque lim]
(tLIG)
Torque
limitation via
parameter
[Torque limit. activ.] (tLA)
[No]
(nO)
[LI]
[Yes]
(YES)
LI
[AI.] (AI.)
[RP] (PI)
Torque
limitation via
analog input,
RP
[Analog limit. act.] (tLC)
[No]
(nO)
[LI]
Lowest value
taken into account
Limitation
value
[Torque ref. assign.] (tAA)
[AI]
Configuration Mode (ConF)
216 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
tOL- [TORQUE LIMITATION]
tLA [Torque limit. activ.]
[No] (nO)
nO
YES
LI1
...
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the function is inactive.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the function is active.
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Yes] (YES): Function always active
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
IntP [Torque increment]
[1%] (1)
g
This parameter cannot be accessed if [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) is set to [No] (nO).
Selection of units for the [Motoring torque lim] (tLIM) and [Gen. torque lim] (tLIG) parameters.
0.1
1
[0,1%] (0.1): Unit 0.1%
[1%] (1): Unit 1%
tLIM [Motoring torque lim]
0 to 300% 100%
g
(1)
This parameter cannot be accessed if [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) is set to [No] (nO).
Torque limitation in motor mode, as a % or in 0.1% increments of the rated torque in accordance with the
[Torque increment] (IntP) parameter.
tLIG [Gen. torque lim]
0 to 300% 100%
g
(1)
This parameter cannot be accessed if [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) is set to [No] (nO).
Torque limitation in generator mode, as a % or in 0.1% increments of the rated torque in accordance with the
[Torque increment] (IntP) parameter.
tAA [Torque ref. assign.]
[No] (nO)
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
PI
AIU1
AIU2
OA01
...
OA10
If the function is assigned, the limitation varies between 0% and 300% of the rated torque on the basis of the 0% to 100% signal
applied to the assigned input.
Examples:
12 mA on a 4-20 mA input results in limitation to 150% of the rated torque.
2.5 V on a 10 V input results in 75% of the rated torque.
[No] (nO): Not assigned (function inactive)
[AI1] (AI1): Analog input
[AI2] (AI2): Analog input
[AI3] (AI3): Analog input
[RP] (PI): Pulse input
[AI Virtual 1] (AIU1): Virtual analog input 1 with the jog dial
[AI Virtual 2] (AIU2): Virtual input via communication bus, to be configured via [AI2 net. channel] (AIC2) page 135
.
[OA01] (OA01): Function blocks: Analog Output 01
...
[OA10] (OA10): Function blocks: Analog Output 10
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > TOL-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 217
(1) The parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
tLC [Analog limit. act.]
[Yes] (YES)
g
This parameter cannot be accessed if [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) is set to [No] (nO).
Identical to [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) page 216
.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0:
The limitation is specified by the [Motoring torque lim] (tLIM) and [Gen. torque lim.] (tLIG) parameters if
[Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) is not [No] (nO).
No limitation if [Torque limit. activ.] (tLA) is set to [No] (nO).
If the assigned input or bit is at 1:
The limitation depends on the input assigned by [Torque ref. assign.] (tAA).
Note: If [Torque limitation] (tLA) and [Torque ref. assign.] (tAA) are enabled at the same time, the lowest value will be
taken into account.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > TOL-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
218 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
2ND CURRENT LIMITATION
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
CLI- [2nd CURRENT LIMIT.]
LC2 [Current limit 2]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
...
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the first current limitation is active.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the second current limitation is active.
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
CL2 [I Limit. 2 value]
0 to 1.5 In (1) 1.5 In (1)
g
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
• Verify that the motor is properly rated for the maximum current to be applied to the motor.
• Consider the duty cycle of the motor and all factors of your application including derating requirements
in determining the current limit.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Second current limitation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Current limit 2] (LC2) is not set to [No] (nO).
The adjustment range is limited to 1.5 In.
Note: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) fault mode if this has been enabled
(see [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) page 256
). If it is less than the no-load motor current, the motor cannot run.
CLI [Current limitation]
0 to 1.5 In (1) 1.5 In (1)
g
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
• Verify that the motor is properly rated for the maximum current to be applied to the motor.
• Consider the duty cycle of the motor and all factors of your application including derating requirements
in determining the current limit.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
First current limitation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Current limit 2] (LC2) is not set to [No] (nO).
The adjustment range is limited to 1.5 In.
Note: If the setting is less than 0.25 In, the drive may lock in [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) fault mode if this has been
enabled (see [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) page 256
). If it is less than the no-load motor current, the motor cannot run.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > CLI-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 219
DYN CURRENT LIMIT
The DTM ATV320, is available with SoMove to set the BMP motors. To install the Altivar 320 DTM (device type manager),
you can download and install our FDT (field device tool): SoMove lite on www.schneider-electric.com.
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual or on the drive nameplate.
ΣI²t
Current
Current
InMotor
90%*max
ΣI²t
limitation
CLI
I2tM
[
I²t overload level]
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
I2t- [DYN CURRENT LIMIT]
I2tA [I²t model activation]
[No] (nO)
g
I²t model activation for current limitation
nO
YES
[No] (nO):
[Yes] (YES):
when i²t
u MaxΣi²t, [
I²t overload level]
(I2tM) = 100 and current limitation is set to InMotor
when i²t
y MaxΣi²t*90%, [
I²t overload level]
(I2tM) y 90 and the current limitation is set to CLI
This parameter can be accessed if [max time of I²tl] (
I2tt) is not set to [0.00 ] (0.00)
I2tI [max current of I²tl]
1.5 In +1 (1)
Maximum current of I²t model.
I2tt [max time of I²tl]
0.00 to 655.35 [0.00 ] (0.00)
Maximum time of I²t model.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > I2T-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
220 NVE41295 04/2018
LINE CONTACTOR COMMAND
The line contactor closes every time a run command (forward or reverse) is sent and opens after every stop,
as soon as the drive is locked. For example, if the stop mode is stop on ramp, the contactor will open when
the motor reaches zero speed.
Note: The drive control power supply must be provided via an external 24 V source.
Example circuit:
Note: The "Run/Reset" key must be pressed once the "Emergency stop" key has been released.
LI
p = Run command [Forward] (Frd) or [Reverse] (rrS)
LO-/LO+ =
[Line contactor ass.] (LLC)
LIn = [Drive lock] (LES)
NOTICE
DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE
Do not use this function at intervals of less than 60 s.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
UVW
L1 L2 L3
LInLIpP24 COM
LO-
LO+
+24
0 V
+24 V
ATVpp
M
3
KM1
K11
K11
K10
24 V source
_
---
K10
K11
3
a supply
mains
Emergency
stop
Run/Reset
24 V power supply
Forward
or
reverse
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 221
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
LLC- [LINE CONTACTOR COMMAND]
LLC [Line contactor ass.]
[No] (nO)
nO
LO1
r2
dO1
Logic output or control relay.
[No] (nO): Function not assigned (in this case, none of the function parameters can be accessed)
[LO1] (LO1): Logical output LO1
[R2] (r2): Relay r2
[d01] (dO1): Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output. Selection can be made if [AO1 assignment] (AO1) page 144
is set to [No] (nO)
LES [Drive lock]
[No] (nO)
g
This parameter can be accessed if [Line contactor ass.] (LLC) is not set to [No] (nO).
The drive locks when the assigned input or bit changes to 0.
nO
LI1
...
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
LCt [Mains V. time out]
5 to 999 s 5 s
g
Monitoring time for closing of line contactor. If, once this time has elapsed, there is no voltage on the drive power circuit, the
drive will lock with a [Line contactor] (
LCF) detected fault.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > LLC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
222 NVE41295 04/2018
OUTPUT CONTACTOR COMMAND
This allows the drive to control a contactor located between the drive and the motor. The contactor is closed
when a run command is applied. The contactor is opened when there is no longer any current in the motor.
Note: If the DC injection braking function is used, the output contactor does not close as long as DC injection
braking is active
Output contactor feedback
The corresponding logic input should be at 1 when there is no run command and at 0 during operation.
In the event of an inconsistency, the drive trips in FCF2 if the output contactor fails to close (LIx at 1) and in
FCF1 if it is stuck (LIx at 0).
The [Delay to motor run]
(dbS) parameter can be used to delay tripping in fault mode when a run command
is sent and the [Delay to open cont.]
(dAS) parameter delays the detected fault when a stop command is
set.
Note: FCF2 (contactor failing to close) can be reset by the run command changing state from 1 to 0 (0 --> 1 -
-> 0 in 3-wire control).
The [Out. contactor ass.] (OCC) and [Output contact. fdbk] (rCA) functions can be used individually or
together.
U
KM2
M
3
KM2
K20
KM2
K20
VW 0 LOp/Rp +24 LIp
Control
Feedback
ATV
ppp
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 223
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
OCC- [OUTPUT CONTACTOR CMD]
OCC [Out. contactor ass.]
[No] (nO)
nO
LO1
r2
dO1
Logic output or control relay.
[No] (nO): Function not assigned (in this case, none of the function parameters can be accessed)
[LO1] (LO1): Logical output LO1
[R2] (r2): Relay r2
[dO1] (dO1): Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output. Selection can be made if [AO1 assignment] (AO1) page 144
is set to [No] (nO)
rCA [Output contact. fdbk]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
...
The motor starts up when the assigned input or bit changes to 0.
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
dbS [Delay to motor run]
0.05 to 60 s 0.15 s
g
Time delay for:
Motor control following the sending of a run command
Output contactor state monitoring, if the feedback is assigned. If the contactor fails to close at the end of the set time, the drive
will lock in FCF2 mode.
This parameter can be accessed if [Out. contactor ass.] (OCC) is assigned or if [Output contact. fdbk] (rCA) is assigned.
The time delay must be greater than the closing time of the output contactor.
dAS [Delay to open cont.]
0 to 5.00 s 0.10 s
g
Time delay for output contactor opening command following motor stop.
This parameter can be accessed if [Output contact. fdbk] (rCA) is assigned.
The time delay must be greater than the opening time of the output contactor. If it is set to 0, the detected fault will not be
monitored.
If the contactor fails to open at the end of the set time, the drive will lock in FCF1 fault mode.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > OCC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
224 NVE41295 04/2018
POSITIONING BY SENSORS
This function is used for managing positioning using position sensors or limit switches linked to logic inputs or
using control word bits:
• Slowing down
• Stopping
The action logic for the inputs and bits can be configured on a rising edge (change from 0 to 1) or a falling edge
(change from 1 to 0). The example below has been configured on a rising edge:
The slowdown mode and stop mode can be configured.
The operation is identical for both directions of operation. Slowdown and stopping operate according to the
same logic, described below.
Forward run command
Reverse run command
[Slowdown forward]
[Stop FW limit sw.]
Speed
[Low speed]
(LSP)
0
0
0
0
0
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 225
Example: Forward slowdown, on rising edge
• Forward slowdown takes place on a rising edge (change from 0 to 1) of the input or bit assigned to forward
slowdown if this rising edge occurs in forward operation. The slowdown command is then stored, even in
the event of a power outage. Operation in the opposite direction is authorized at high speed. The slowdown
command is deleted on a falling edge (change from 1 to 0) of the input or bit assigned to forward slowdown
if this falling edge occurs in reverse operation.
• A bit or a logic input can be assigned to disable this function.
• Although forward slowdown is disabled while the disable input or bit is at 1, sensor changes continue to be
monitored and saved.
Example: Positioning on a limit switch, on rising edge
Operation with short cams:
In this instance, when operating for the first time or after restoring the factory settings, the drive must initially
be started outside the slowdown and stop zones in order to initialize the function.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
• Verify correct connection of the limit switches.
• Verify the correct installation of the limit switches. The limit switches must be mounted in a position far
enough away from the mechanical stop to allow for an adequate stopping distance.
• You must release the limit switches before you can use them.
• Verify the correct function of the limit switches
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Reverse
stop
Reverse
slowdown
Reverse
Forward
Forward
slowdown
Forward
stop
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
When operating for the first time or after a reset of the configuration to the factory settings, the motor must
always be started outside of the Slowdown and Stop ranges.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
When the drive is switched off, it stores the range which it is currently in.
If the system is moved manually while the drive is off, you must restore the original position before switching
it on again.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Forward slowdown
Forward stop
Forward slowdown zone
Forward stop zone
Configuration Mode (ConF)
226 NVE41295 04/2018
Operation with long cams:
In this instance, there is no restriction, which means that the function is initialized across the whole trajectory.
Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch
This function can be used to control the stopping of the moving part automatically once a preset distance has
been traveled after the slowdown limit switch.
On the basis of the rated linear speed and the speed estimated by the drive when the slowdown limit switch
is tripped, the drive will induce the stop at the configured distance.
This function is useful in applications where one manual-reset overtravel limit switch is common to both
directions. It will then only respond to help management if the distance is exceeded. The stop limit switch
retains priority in respect of the function.
The [Deceleration type] (dSF) parameter can be configured to obtain either of the functions described
below:
Note:
• If the deceleration ramp is modified while stopping at a distance is in progress, this distance will not be
observed.
• If the direction is modified while stopping at a distance is in progress, this distance will not be observed.
Forward slowdown
Forward stop
Forward slowdown zone
Forward stop zone
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
Verify that the configured distance is actually possible.
This function does not replace the limit switch.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
A
B
A
B
Frequency
Frequency
A: Slowdown limit switch reached
B: Automatic stop at a distance
Distance
Distance
Slowdown
frequency
Slowdown
frequency
[Stop distance] (Std)
[Deceleration type] (dSF) = [Standard] (Std)
[Deceleration type] (dSF) = [Optimized] (OPt)
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 227
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
LPO- [POSITIONING BY SENSORS]
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 163.
SAF [Stop FW limit sw.]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
...
Stop switch forward.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
(If [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [Not Separ.] (SIM) or [Separate] (SEP) then [CD11] (Cd11) up to [CD15] (Cd15), [C111] (C111)
up to [C115] (C115), [C211] (C211) up to [C215] (C215) and [C311] (C311) up to [C315] (C315) are not available).
SAr [Stop RV limit sw.]
[No] (nO)
Stop switch reverse.
Identical to [Stop FW limit sw.] (SAF) above.
SAL [Stop limit config.]
[Active low] (LO)
g
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If [Stop limit config.] (SAL) is set to [Active high] (HIG), the stop command will be activated on active
signal and the stop command will not be applied if the connection is removed.
Verify that using this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
LO
HIG
Stop switch activation level.
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one stop sensor has been assigned. It defines the positive or
negative logic of the bits or inputs assigned to the stop.
[Active low] (LO): Stop controlled on a falling edge (change from 1 to 0) of the assigned bits or inputs
[Active high] (HIG): Stop controlled on a rising edge (change from 0 to 1) of the assigned bits or inputs
dAF [Slowdown forward]
[No] (nO)
Slowdown attained forward.
Identical to [Stop FW limit sw.] (SAF) above.
dAr [Slowdown reverse]
[No] (nO)
Slowdown attained reverse.
Identical to [Stop FW limit sw.] (SAF) above.
dAL [Slowdown limit cfg.]
[Active low] (LO)
g
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If [Slowdown limit cfg.] (dAL) is set to [Active high] (HIG), the slowdown command will be activated on
active signal and the slowdown command will not be applied if the connection is removed.
Verify that using this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
LO
HIG
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one slowdown sensor has been assigned. It defines the positive
or negative logic of the bits or inputs assigned to the slowdown.
[Active low] (LO): Slowdown controlled on a falling edge (change from 1 to 0) of the assigned bits or inputs
[Active high] (HIG): Slowdown controlled on a rising edge (change from 0 to 1) of the assigned bits or inputs
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > LPO-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
228 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
CLS [Disable limit sw.]
[No] (nO)
g
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If [Disable limit sw.] (CLS) is set to an input and activated, the limit switch management will be inhibited.
Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
nO
LI1
...
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned.
The action of the limit switches is disabled when the assigned bit or input is at 1. If, at this time, the drive is stopped or being
slowed down by limit switches, it will restart up to its speed reference.
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
PAS [Stop type]
[Ramp stop] (rMP)
g
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned.
rMP
FSt
nSt
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Follow ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop (ramp time reduced by [Ramp divider] (dCF), see [Ramp divider] (dCF) page 93
)
[Freewheel] (nSt): Freewheel stop
dSF [Deceleration type]
[Standard] (Std)
g
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned.
Std
OPt
[Standard] (Std): Uses the [Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2) ramp (depending on which has been enabled)
[Optimized] (OPt): The ramp time is calculated on the basis of the actual speed when the slowdown contact switches, in order
to limit the operating time at low speed (optimization of the cycle time: the slowdown time is constant regardless of the initial
speed).
Std [Stop distance]
[No] (nO)
g
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned.
Activation and adjustment of the "Stop at distance calculated after the slowdown limit switch" function.
nO
-
[No] (nO): Function inactive (the next two parameters will, therefore, be inaccessible)
0.01 to 10.00: Stop distance range in meters
nLS [Rated linear speed]
0.20 to 5.00 m/s 1.00 m/s
g
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned and [Stop distance] (Std) is not
set to [No] (nO).
Rated linear speed in meters/second.
SFd [Stop corrector]
50 to 200% 100%
g
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned and [Stop distance] (Std) is not
set to [No] (nO).
Scaling factor applied to the stop distance to compensate, for example, a non-linear ramp.
MStP [Memo Stop]
[No] (nO)
g
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned.
With or whithout memorisation stop switch
nO
YES
[No] (nO): No memorisation of limit switch
[YES] (YES): Memorisation of limit switch
PrSt [Priority restart]
[No] (nO)
g
This parameter can be accessed if at least one limit switch or one sensor has been assigned.
Priority given to the starting even if switch stop is activated.
nO
YES
[No] (nO): No priority restart if stop switch is activated
[YES] (YES): Priority to restart even if stop switch is activated
This parameter is forced to [No] (nO) if [Memo Stop] (MStP) is set to [YES] (YES).
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > LPO-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 229
PARAMETER SET SWITCHING
A set of 1 to 15 parameters from the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu on page 89 can be selected and 2 or 3
different values assigned. These 2 or 3 sets of values can then be switched using 1 or 2 logic inputs or control
word bits. This switching can be performed during operation (motor running).
It can also be controlled on the basis of 1 or 2 frequency thresholds, whereby each threshold acts as a logic
input (0 = threshold not reached, 1 = threshold reached).
Note: Do not modify the parameters in the [SETTINGS]
(SEt-) menu, because any modifications made in
this menu ([SETTINGS]
(SEt-)) will be lost on the next power-up. The parameters can be adjusted during
operation in the [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (MLP-) menu, on the active configuration.
Note: Parameter set switching cannot be configured from the integrated display terminal.
Parameters can only be adjusted on the integrated display terminal if the function has been configured
previously via the graphic display terminal, by PC Software or via the bus or communication network. If the
function has not been configured, the [PARAM. SET SWITCHING]
(MLP-) menu and the
[SET 1] (PS1-), [SET 2] (PS2-), [SET 3] (PS3-) submenus will not appear.
Values 1 Values 2 Values 3
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4
Parameter 5
Parameter 6
Parameter 7
Parameter 8
Parameter 9
Parameter 10
Parameter 11
Parameter 12
Parameter 13
Parameter 14
Parameter 15
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4
Parameter 5
Parameter 6
Parameter 7
Parameter 8
Parameter 9
Parameter 10
Parameter 11
Parameter 12
Parameter 13
Parameter 14
Parameter 15
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4
Parameter 5
Parameter 6
Parameter 7
Parameter 8
Parameter 9
Parameter 10
Parameter 11
Parameter 12
Parameter 13
Parameter 14
Parameter 15
Parameter 1
Parameter 2
Parameter 3
Parameter 4
Parameter 5
Parameter 6
Parameter 7
Parameter 8
Parameter 9
Parameter 10
Parameter 11
Parameter 12
Parameter 13
Parameter 14
Parameter 15
Input LI or bit or frequency threshold
2 values
0 1 0 or 1
Input LI or bit or frequency threshold
3 values
001
Configuration Mode (ConF)
230 NVE41295 04/2018
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
MLP- [PARAM. SET SWITCHING]
CHA1 [2 parameter sets]
[No] (nO)
nO
FtA
F2A
LI1
...
Switching 2 parameter sets.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[Freq. Th.att.] (FtA): Switching via [Freq. threshold] (Ftd) page 253
[Freq. Th. 2 attained] (F2A): Switching via [Freq. threshold 2] (F2d) page 253
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
CHA2 [3 parameter sets]
[No] (nO)
Identical to [2 parameter sets] (CHA1) page 230
.
Switching 3 parameter sets.
Note: In order to obtain 3 parameter sets, [2 parameter sets] (CHA1) must also be configured.
SPS [PARAMETER SELECTION]
This parameter can only be accessed on the graphic display terminal if [2 parameter sets] (CHA1) is not set to [No] (nO).
Making an entry in this parameter opens a window containing all the adjustment parameters that can be accessed.
Select 1 to 15 parameters using ENT (a then appears next to the parameter). Parameter(s) can also be deselected using
ENT.
Example:
MLP- [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (continued)
PS1- [SET 1]
g
S101
...
S115
This parameter can be accessed if at least 1 parameter has been selected in [PARAMETER SELECTION].
Making an entry in this parameter opens a settings window containing the selected parameters in the order in which they were
selected.
With the graphic display terminal:
With the integrated display terminal:
Proceed as in the Settings menu using the parameters that appear.
MLP- [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (continued)
PS2- [SET 2]
g
S201
...
S215
This parameter can be accessed if at least 1 parameter has been selected in [PARAMETER SELECTION].
Identical to [SET 1] (PS1-) page 230
.
PARAMETER SELECTION
SETTINGS
Ramp increment
- - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - -
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
SET1
Acceleration : 9.51 s
Deceleration : 9.67 s
Acceleration 2 : 12.58 s
Deceleration 2 : 13.45 s
Begin Acc round: 2.3 s
Code Quick
ENT
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
Acceleration
9.51 s
Min = 0.1 Max = 999.9
<< >> Quick
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > MLP-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 231
Note: We recommend that a parameter set switching test is carried out while stopped and a check is made to
verify that it has been performed correctly.
Some parameters are interdependent and in this case may be restricted at the time of switching.
Interdependencies between parameters must be respected, even between different sets.
Example: The highest [Low speed] (LSP) must be below the lowest [High speed] (HSP).
MLP- [PARAM. SET SWITCHING] (continued)
PS3- [SET 3]
g
S301
...
S315
This parameter can be accessed if [3 parameter sets] (CHA2) is not [No] (nO) and if at least 1 parameter has been selected
in [PARAMETER SELECTION].
Identical to [SET 1] (PS1-) page 230
.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > MLP-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
232 NVE41295 04/2018
MULTIMOTORS / MULTICONFIGURATIONS
Motor or configuration switching [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.] (MMC-)
The drive may contain up to 3 configurations, which can be saved using the
[FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) menu, page 81.
Each of these configurations can be activated remotely, enabling adaptation to:
• 2 or 3 different motors or mechanisms (multimotor mode)
• 2 or 3 different configurations for a single motor (multiconfiguration mode)
The two switching modes cannot be combined.
Note: The following conditions MUST be observed:
• Switching may only take place when stopped (drive locked). If a switching request is sent during operation,
it will not be executed until the next stop.
• In the event of motor switching, the following additional conditions apply:
- When the motors are switched, the power and control terminals concerned must also be switched as
appropriate.
- The maximum power of the drive must not be exceeded by any of the motors.
• All the configurations to be switched must be set and saved in advance in the same hardware configuration,
this being the definitive configuration (option and communication cards). Failure to follow this instruction can
cause the drive to lock on an [Incorrect config.]
(CFF) state.
Menus and parameters switched in multimotor mode
• [SETTINGS] (SEt-)
• [MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-)
• [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-)
• [COMMAND] (CtL-)
• [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (Fun-) with the exception of the [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.] function (to be
configured once only)
• [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt)
• [MY MENU]
• [USER CONFIG.]: The name of the configuration specified by the user in the
[FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) menu
Menus and parameters switched in multiconfiguration mode
As in multimotor mode, except for the motor parameters that are common to the 3 configurations:
• Rated current
• Thermal current
• Rated voltage
• Rated frequency
• Rated speed
• Rated power
• IR compensation
• Slip compensation
• Synchronous motor parameters
• Type of thermal protection
• Thermal state
• The auto-tuning parameters and motor parameters that can be accessed in expert mode
• Type of motor control
Note: No other menus or parameters can be switched.
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 233
Transfer of a drive configuration to another one, with graphic display terminal, when the drive uses
[MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.] (MMC-) function
Let A be the source drive and B the drive addressed. In this example, switching is controlled by logic input.
1. Connect graphic display terminal to the drive A.
2. Put logic input LI ([2 Configurations] (CnF1)) and LI ([3 Configurations]
(CnF2)) to 0.
3. Download configuration 0 in a file of graphic display terminal (example: file 1 of the graphic display terminal).
4. Put logic input LI ([2 Configurations]
(CnF1)) to 1 and leave logic input LI ([3 Configurations] (CnF2))
to 0.
5. Download configuration 1 in a file of graphic display terminal (example: file 2 of the graphic display terminal).
6. Put logic input LI ([3 Configurations]
(CnF2)) to 1 and leave logic input LI ([2 Configurations] (CnF1))
to 1.
7. Download configuration 2 in a file of graphic display terminal (example: file 3 of the graphic display terminal).
8. Connect graphic display terminal to the drive B.
9. Put logic input LI ([2 Configurations] (CnF1)) and LI ([3 Configurations] (CnF2)) to 0.
10. Make a factory setting of the drive B.
11. Download the configuration file 0 in the drive (file 1 of graphic display terminal in this example).
12. Put logic input LI ([2 Configurations] (CnF1)) to 1 and leave logic input LI
([3 Configurations] (CnF2)) to 0.
13. Download the configuration file 1 in the drive (file 2 of graphic display terminal in this example).
14. Put logic input LI ([3 Configurations]
(CnF2)) to 1 and leave logic input LI
([2 Configurations] (CnF1)) to 1.
15. Download the configuration file 2 in the drive (file 3 of graphic display terminal in this example).
Note: Steps 6, 7, 14 et 15 are necessary only if [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.] (MMC-) function is used with
3 configurations or 3 motors.
Configuration 0
or motor 0
Configuration 1
or motor 1
Configuration 2
or motor 2
Current
configuration
Graphic display
terminal
Network
Terminal
CANopen®
Modbus
[2 Configurations] (CnF1)
[3 Configurations] (CnF2)
CnF1 = 0, CnF2 = 0
CnF1 = 1, CnF2 = 0 CnF1 = 0, CnF2 = 1
or
CnF1 = 1, CnF2 = 1
Configuration Mode (ConF)
234 NVE41295 04/2018
Switching command
Depending on the number of motors or selected configurations (2 or 3), the switching command is sent using
one or two logic inputs. The table below lists the possible combinations.
Schematic diagram for multimotor mode
Auto-tuning in multimotor mode
This auto-tuning can be performed:
• Manually using a logic input when the motor changes.
• Automatically each time the motor is activated for the 1
st
time after switching on the drive, if the
[Automatic autotune] (AUt) parameter on page 109 is set to [Yes] (YES).
Motor thermal states in multimotor mode:
The drive helps to protect the three motors individually. Each thermal state takes into account all stop times,
if the drive power is not switched off.
LI
2 motors or configurations
LI
3 motors or configurations
Number of configurations
or active motors
000
101
012
112
NOTICE
MOTOR OVERHEATING
The motor thermal state of each motor is not saved when drive is switched off.
When the drive is switched on, it is not aware of the thermal state of the connected motor or motors.
• To enable correct temperature monitoring of the motors, install an external temperature sensor for each
motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
LI
ATVppp
+ 24 V
LI
Configuration 0
if the 2 contacts
are open
Configuration 1
Configuration 2
Configuration 0
LO or R
Configuration 1
LO or R
Configuration 2
LO or R
M0
M1
M2
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 235
Configuration information output
In the [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu, a logic output can be assigned to each configuration or
motor (2 or 3) for remote information transmission.
Note: As the [INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu is switched, these outputs must be assigned in all
configurations in which information is required.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
MMC- [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.]
CHM [Multimotors]
[No] (nO)
NOTICE
MOTOR OVERHEATING
When the drive is switched off, the thermal states of the connected motors are not saved.
When the drive is switched on again, the drive is not aware of the thermal states of the connected motors.
• Use separate temperature sensors for each connected motor for thermal monitoring.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
nO
YES
[No] (nO): Multiconfiguration possible
[Yes] (YES): Multimotor possible
CnF1 [2 Configurations]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
...
Switching of 2 motors or 2 configurations.
[No] (nO): No switching
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
([CD00] (Cd00) up to [CD15] (Cd15), [C101] (C101) up to [C110] (C110), [C201] (C201) up to [C210] (C210)
and [C301] (C301) up to [C310] (C310) are not available).
CnF2 [3 Configurations]
[No] (nO)
Switching of 3 motors or 3 configurations.
Identical to [2 Configurations] (CnF1) page 235
.
Note: In order to obtain 3 motors or 3 configurations, [2 Configurations] (CnF1) must also be configured.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > MMC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
236 NVE41295 04/2018
AUTO TUNING BY LOGIC INPUT
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
tnL- [AUTO TUNING BY LI]
tUL [Auto-tune assign.]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
...
Auto-tuning is performed when the assigned input or bit changes to 1.
Note: Auto-tuning causes the motor to start up.
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > TNL-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 237
TRAVERSE CONTROL
Function for winding reels of yarn (in textile applications):
The speed of rotation of the cam must follow a precise profile to ensure that the reel is steady, compact and
linear:
The function starts when the drive has reached its base reference and the traverse control command has been
enabled.
When the traverse control command is disabled, the drive returns to its base reference, following the ramp
determined by the traverse control function. The function then stops, as soon as it has returned to this
reference.
Bit 15 of word LRS1 is at 1 while the function is active.
ATV320 ATV320
Main shaft
Traverse control
drive
Winding drive
Winding motor
Gearbox
Traverse control motor
Gearbox
Cam
Thread guide
Thread
Reel of yarn
t
t
t
t
LI or traverse
control bit
Run command
Motor speed
Bit 15 of word LRS1
(traverse control active)
Base reference
ACC
ramp
dEC ramp
Start of function
End of function
Configuration Mode (ConF)
238 NVE41295 04/2018
Function parameters
These define the cycle of frequency variations around the base reference, as shown in the diagram below:
Reel parameters:
trC [Yarn control] (trC): Assignment of the traverse control command to a logic input or to a communication bus
control word bit
trH [Traverse freq. high] (trH): in Hertz
trL [Traverse Freq. Low] (trL): in Hertz
qSH [Quick step High] (qSH): in Hertz
qSL [Quick step Low] (qSL): in Hertz
tUP [Traverse ctrl. accel.] (tUP): time, in seconds
tdn [Traverse ctrl. decel] (tdn): time, in seconds
tbO [Reel time] (tbO): Time taken to make a reel, in minutes.
This parameter is intended to signal the end of winding. When the traverse control operating time since
command [Yarn control] (trC) reaches the value of [Reel time] (tbO), the logic output or one of the relays
changes to state 1, if the corresponding function [End reel] (EbO) has been assigned.
The traverse control operating time EbOt can be monitored online by a communication bus.
dtF [Decrease ref. speed] (dtF): Decrease in the base reference.
In certain cases, the base reference has to be reduced as the reel increases in size. The
[Decrease ref. speed] (dtF) value corresponds to time [Reel time] (tbO). Once this time has elapsed, the
reference continues to fall, following the same ramp. If low speed [Low speed] (LSP)
is at 0, the speed
reaches 0 Hz, the drive stops and must be reset by a new run command.
If low speed [Low speed] (LSP) is not 0, the traverse control function continues to operate above
[Low speed] (LSP).
t
tUP
trH
tdn
qSH
qSL
trL
Motor speed
Base
reference
Frequency jump
Frequency jump
0
Base reference
Motor speed
With LSP = 0
tbO
dtF
Motor speed
Base reference
With LSP > 0
dtF
tbO
0
0
t
t
LSP
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 239
rtr [Init. traverse ctrl] Reinitialize traverse control.
This command can be assigned to a logic input or to a communication bus control word bit. It resets the EbO
alarm and the EbOt operating time to 0 and reinitializes the reference to the base reference. As long as rtr
remains at 1, the traverse control function is disabled and the speed remains the same as the base reference.
This command is used primarily when changing reels.
Base
reference
Motor speed
tbO
dtF
t
t
t
t
t
t
t
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Run
trC
EbOt
Bit 15 of
LRS1
EbO
rtr
tbO
Configuration Mode (ConF)
240 NVE41295 04/2018
Counter wobble
The Counter wobble function is used in certain applications to obtain a constant yarn tension when the
Traverse control function is producing considerable variations in speed on the yarn guide motor
([Traverse freq. high] (trH) and [Traverse Freq. low] (trL), see [Traverse freq. high] (trH) page
242
).
Two motors must be used (one master and one slave).
The master controls the speed of the yarn guide, the slave controls the winding speed. The function assigns
the slave a speed profile, which is in antiphase to that of the master. This means that synchronization is
required, using one of the master’s logic outputs and one of the slave’s logic inputs.
ATV320 ATV320
Main shaft
Master drive Slave drive
Winding motor
Gearbox
Thread guide motor
Gearbox
Cam
Thread guide
Thread
Reel of yarn
Synchronization
tSY SnC
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 241
Connection of synchronization I/O
The starting conditions for the function are:
• Base speeds reached on both drives
• [Yarn control] (trC) input activated
• Synchronization signal present
Note: The [Quick step High] (qSH) and [Quick step Low] (qSL) parameters should generally be kept at
0.
t
t
t
t
t
trH
trL
trH
trL
Traverse control
command on master
and slave
Run command on
master and slave
Yarn guide motor
speed
(master drive)
tSY/SnC synchronization
Winding motor speed
(slave drive)
(SnCO) LOp
COM
LIp (SnCI)
COM
ATV320 ATV320
Master drive Slave drive
Configuration Mode (ConF)
242 NVE41295 04/2018
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
tr0- [TRAVERSE CONTROL]
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 163.
trC [Yarn control]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
...
The Traverse control cycle starts when the assigned input or bit changes to 1 and stops when it changes to 0.
[No] (nO):
Function inactive, thereby helping to prevent access to other parameters
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
trH [Traverse freq. high]
0 to 10 Hz 4 Hz
g
(1)
Traverse frequency high.
trL [Traverse Freq. Low]
0 to 10 Hz 4 Hz
g
(1)
Traverse frequency low.
qSH [Quick step High]
0 to [Traverse freq. high] (trH) 0 Hz
g
(1)
Quick step high.
qSL [Quick step Low]
0 to [Traverse Freq. Low] (trL) 0 Hz
g
(1)
Quick step low.
tUP [Traverse ctrl. accel.]
0.1 to 999.9 s 4 s
g
Acceleration traverse control.
tdn [Traverse ctrl. decel]
0.1 to 999.9 s 4 s
g
Deceleration traverse control.
tbO [Reel time]
0 to 9,999 min 0 min
g
Reel execution time.
EbO [End reel]
[No] (nO)
g
The assigned output or relay changes to state 1 when the traverse control operating time reaches the [Reel time] (tbO).
nO
LO1
r2
dO1
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[LO1] (LO1): Logical output LO1
[R2] (r2): Relay R2
[dO1] (dO1): Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output. Selection can be made if [AO1 assignment] (AO1) page 144
is set to [No] (nO).
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > TR0-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 243
(1) The parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
SnC [Counter wobble]
[No] (nO)
g
Synchronization input.
To be configured on the winding drive (slave) only.
nO
LI1
...
[No] (nO):
Function inactive, thereby helping to prevent access to other parameters
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
tSY [Sync. wobble]
[No] (nO)
g
Synchronization output.
To be configured on the yarn guide drive (master) only.
nO
LO1
r2
dO1
[No] (nO): Function not assigned
[LO1] (LO1)
[R2] (r2)
[dO1] (dO1): Analog output AO1 functioning as a logic output. Selection can be made if [AO1 assignment] (AO1) page 144
is set to [No] (nO).
dtF [Decrease ref. speed]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
g
Decrease in the base reference during the traverse control cycle.
rtr [Init. traverse ctrl]
[No] (nO)
g
When the state of the assigned input or bit changes to 1, the traverse control operating time is reset to 0, along with
[Decrease ref. speed] (dtF).
nO
LI1
...
[No] (nO):
Function not assigned
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > TR0-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
244 NVE41295 04/2018
HIGH SPEED SWITCHING
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (continued)
CHS- [HSP SWITCHING]
SH2 [2 High speed]
[No] (nO)
nO
FtA
F2A
LI1
...
High Speed Switching.
[No] (nO): Function not assigned
[Freq. Th. attain.] (FtA): Frequency threshold attained
[Freq. Th. 2 attained] (F2A): Frequency threshold 2 attained
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
SH4 [4 High speed]
[No] (nO)
High Speed Switching.
Note: In order to obtain 4 High speed, [2 High speed] (SH2) must also be configured.
Identical to [2 High speed] (SH2) page 244
.
HSP
[High speed]
0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz
Motor frequency at maximum reference, can be set between [Low speed] (LSP) and [Max frequency] (tFr).
The factory setting changes to 60 Hz if [Standard mot. freq] (bFr) is set to [60Hz NEMA] (60).
HSP2 [High speed 2]
0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz
g
Visible if [2 High speed] (SH2) is not set to [No] (nO).
Identical to [High speed] (HSP) page 244
.
HSP3 [High speed 3]
0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz
g
Visible if [4 High speed] (SH4) is not set to [No] (nO).
Identical to [High speed] (HSP) page 244
.
HSP4 [High speed 4]
0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz
g
Visible if [4 High speed] (SH4) is not set to [No] (nO).
Identical to [High speed] (HSP) page 244
.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > CHS-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 245
DC Bus
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FUn- [APPLICATION FUNCT.]
dCC- [DC Bus]
dCCM [DC-Bus chaining]
DC Bus chaining configuration
[No] (nO)
nO
MAIn
bUS
[No] (nO): Not assigned
[Bus & Main] (MAIn): The drive is supplied by both DC Bus and supply mains.
[Only Bus] (bUS): The drive is supplied by DC Bus only.
DANGER
GROUND FAULT MONITORING DISABLED, NO ERROR DETECTION
Setting this parameter to
[Bus & Main] (Main) deactivates ground fault monitoring.
• Only use this parameter after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and standards
that apply to the device and to the application.
• Implement alternative ground fault monitoring functions that do not trigger automatic error responses of the
drive, but allow for adequate, equivalent responses by other means in compliance with all applicable
regulations and standards as well as the risk assessment.
• Commission and test the system with ground fault monitoring enabled.
• During commissioning, verify that the drive and the system operate as intended by performing tests and
simulations in a controlled environment under controlled conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
dCCC [DC-Bus compat.]
DC Bus chaining compatibility
[Altivar] (AtU)
AtU
LHM
g
Visible if [DC-Bus chaining] (dCCM) above is not set to [No] (nO).
[Altivar] (AtU): Only Altivar 320 drives are on the DC Bus chain.
[Lexium] (LHM): At least one Lexium 32 drive is on the DC Bus chain.
- For ATVpppM2 or ATV320pppM3 or ATV320pppS6, not depending on [DC-Bus compat.] (dCCC) the parameters
[Mains voltage] (UrES), [Braking level] (
Ubr) are forced to their default value.
- For ATVpppN4, if [DC-Bus compat.] (dCCC) is set to [Altivar] (AtU) the parameters [Mains voltage] (UrES),
[Braking level] (Ubr) are forced to their default value.
- For ATVpppN4, if [DC-Bus compat.] (dCCC) is set to [Lexium] (LHM), [Mains voltage] (UrES) is forced to its default
value, [Braking level] (Ubr) is forced to 780 Vdc and the drive will trigger in [Overbraking] (ObF) at a DC Bus level of
820 Vdc instead of 880 Vdc to be compatible with Lexium 32 drives.
IPL [Input phase loss]
Drive behaviour in case of input phase loss detected fault.
According to drive
rating.
g
Cannot be accessed if drive rating is ATVpppM2.
Visible if [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) is set to [Expert] (Epr) and [DC-Bus chaining] (dCCM) above is set to [No] (nO).
nO
YES
[Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored
[Freewheel] (YES): Detected fault with freewheel stop
[Input phase loss] (IPL) is forced to [Ignore] (nO) if [DC-Bus chaining] (dCCM) above is set to [Only Bus] (bUS).
See [Input phase loss] (IPL) in the Programming Manual (DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > IPL-).
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > DCC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
246 NVE41295 04/2018
SCL3 [Ground short circuit]
[Freewheel] (YES)
Direct ground short-circuit fault detection behaviour
Can be accessed for drives rating ATV320U55N4p … D15N4p.
Visible if [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) is set to [Expert] (Epr) and [DC-Bus chaining] (dCCM) above is not set to [No]
(nO).
nO
YES
[Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored
[Freewheel] (YES): Detected fault with freewheel stop
g
[Ground short circuit] (SCL3) is forced to [Ignore] (nO) for ATV320U55N4p … D15N4p drives if [DC-Bus chaining]
(dCCM) above is set to [Bus & Main] (MAIn).
Note: If [Ground short circuit] (SCL3) is set to [Ignore] (nO), integrated safety functions (except Safe Torque Off ) for
ATV320U55N4p … D15N4p drives cannot be used, otherwise the drive will trigger in [Safe function fault] (SAFF) state.
DANGER
GROUND FAULT MONITORING DISABLED, NO ERROR DETECTION
Setting this parameter to [Ignore] (nO) deactivates ground fault monitoring.
• Only use this parameter after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and standards
that apply to the device and to the application.
• Implement alternative ground fault monitoring functions that do not trigger automatic error responses of the
drive, but allow for adequate, equivalent responses by other means in compliance with all applicable
regulations and standards as well as the risk assessment.
• Commission and test the system with ground fault monitoring enabled.
• During commissioning, verify that the drive and the system operate as intended by performing tests and
simulations in a controlled environment under controlled conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
UrES [Mains Voltage]
Rated voltage of the supply mains in Vac.
According to drive
voltage rating
According to drive
voltage rating
g
Visible if [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) is set to [Expert] (Epr) and [DC-Bus chaining] (dCCM) above is set to [No] (nO).
200
220
230
240
LHM
For ATV320pppM2p or ATV320pppM3p:
[200V ac] (200): 200 Volts AC
[220V ac] (220): 220 Volts AC
[230V ac] (230): 230 Volts AC
[240V ac] (240): 240 Volts AC (factory setting)
[Lexium] (LHM): [Mains voltage] (UrES), [Undervoltage level] (USL), [Braking level] (Ubr) are forced to their default
value.
380
400
440
460
500
LHM
525
600
LHM
For ATV320pppN4p:
[380V ac] (380): 380 Volts AC
[400V ac] (400): 400 Volts AC
[440V ac] (440): 440 Volts AC
[460V ac] (460): 460 Volts AC
[500V ac] (500): 500 Volts AC (factory setting)
[Lexium] (LHM): [Mains voltage] (UrES), [Undervoltage level] (USL) are forced to their default value, [Braking level]
(Ubr) is forced to 780 Vdc and the drive will trigger in [Overbraking] (ObF) at a DC Bus level of 820 Vdc instead of 880 Vdc.
For ATV320pppS6p:
[525V ac] (525): 525 Volts AC
[600V ac] (600): 600 Volts AC (Factory setting)
[Lexium] (LHM): [Mains voltage] (UrES), [Undervoltage level] (USL)
, [Braking level] (Ubr) are forced to their default
value.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FUN- > DCC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 247
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
USL [Undervoltage level]
Undervoltage fault level setting in Volts.
100 to 304 Vac According to drive
rating
g
Visible if [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) is set to [Expert] (Epr).
The factory setting is the maximal value of the adjustment range (see the table below).
The adjustment range is determined by the the following table:
This parameter is also visible in (DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > USB-).
Ubr [Braking level]
Braking transistor command level.
335 to 995 Vdc According to drive
rating
g
Visible if [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) is set to [Expert] (Epr).
The factory setting is determined by the drive voltage rating :
- For ATV320pppM2p : 395 Vdc
- For ATV320pppM3p : 395 Vdc
- For ATV320pppN4p : 820 Vdc
- For ATV320pppS6p : 995 Vdc
The adjustment range is determined by the the following table:
This parameter is also visible in (DRI- > CONF > FULL > DRC-).
[Mains voltage] (urES)
[DC-Bus chaining] (dCCM)
=
[No] (nO)
[DC-Bus chaining] (dCCM)
=
[MAin](Bus & Main) or [buS] (Only Bus)
[200V ac] (200) 100 Vac
[220V ac] (220) 120 Vac
[230V ac] (230) 131 Vac
[240V ac] (240) or [Lexium] (LHM) 141 Vac
[380V ac] (380) 190 Vac
[400V ac] (400) 204 Vac
[440V ac] (440) 233 Vac
[460V ac] (460) 247 Vac
[500V ac] (500) or [Lexium] (LHM) 276 Vac
[525V ac] (525) 266 Vac
[600V ac] (600) or [Lexium] (LHM) 304 Vac
Drive voltage rang
ATV320●●●M2●
ATV320●●●M3●
ATV320●●●N4●
Maximum value
Adjustement range
Minimum Value
ATV320●●●S6●
100 Vac 141 Vac
276 Vac
304 Vac
190 Vac
266 Vac
[Mains voltage](urES) minimum value maximal value
[200V ac](200) 335 Vdc
[220V ac](220) 365 Vdc
[230V ac](230) 380 Vdc
[240V ac](240) or
[Lexium](LHM)
395 Vdc
[380V ac](380) 698 Vdc
[400V ac](400) 718 Vdc
[440V ac](440) 759 Vdc
[460V ac](460) 779 Vdc
[500V ac](500) 820 Vdc
[Lexium](LHM) 780 Vdc 780 Vdc
[525V ac](525) 941 Vdc
[600V ac](600) or
[Lexium](LHM)
995 Vdc
Adjustement range
ATV320pppN4p
ATV320pppS6p 995 Vdc
820 Vdc
Drive voltage rang
ATV320pppM2p
ATV320pppM3p
395 Vdc
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters
can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description
is detailed in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming
.
DRI- > CONF > FULL > DCC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
248 NVE41295 04/2018
Fault Management
With integrated display terminal:
Summary of functions:
Code Name Page
PtC [PTC MANAGEMENT] 250
rSt [FAULT RESET] 251
Atr [AUTOMATIC RESTART] 252
AlS [ALARMS SETTING] 252
FLr [CATCH ON THE FLY] 253
tHt [MOTOR THERMAL PROT.] 255
OPL [OUTPUT PHASE LOSS] 256
IPL [INPUT PHASE LOSS] 256
OHL [DRIVE OVERHEAT] 257
SAt [THERMAL ALARM STOP] 258
EtF [EXTERNAL FAULT] 258
USb [UNDERVOLTAGE MGT] 259
tIt [IGBT TESTS] 260
LFL [4-20mA LOSS] 260
InH [FAULT INHIBITION] 261
CLL [COM. FAULT MANAGEMENT] 261
Sdd [ENCODER FAULT] 263
tId [TORQUE OR I LIM. DETECT] 264
FqF [FREQUENCY METER] 266
dLd [DYNAMIC LOAD DETECT.] 267
tnF [AUTO TUNING FAULT] 268
PPI [CARDS PAIRING] 269
ULd [PROCESS UNDERLOAD] 270
OLd [PROCESS OVERLOAD] 272
LFF [FALLBACK SPEED] 272
FSt [RAMP DIVIDER] 272
dCI [DC INJECTION] 273
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 249
The parameters in the [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (FLt-) menu can only be modified when the drive is
stopped and there is no run command, except for parameters with a
symbol in the code column, which can
be modified with the drive running or stopped.
FULL
FUn-
SIM-
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
LAC
CON-
FLt-
ESC
ESC
ENT
ESC
= ENT
ESC
= ES
C
FAULT MANAGEMENT
From
ConF menu
Configuration Mode (ConF)
250 NVE41295 04/2018
PTC probe
1 set of PTC probe can be managed by the drive in order to help to protect the motor: on logic input LI6
converted for this use by switch SW2 on the control block.
The PTC probe is monitored for the following detected faults:
• Motor overheating
• Sensor break
• Sensor short-circuit
Protection via PTC probe does not disable protection via I
2
t calculation performed by the drive (the two types
of protection can be combined).
RJ45
R1A
R1B
R1C
COM
AQ1
COM
AI3
AI2
10V
AI1
COM
+24
P24
STO
DQ+
DQ-
DI6
DI5
DI4
DI3
DI2
DI1
R2C
R2A
SW1
SW2
DI6
PTC
Source
Sink ext.
Sink int.
ATV320pppppB ATV320pppppC
RJ45
10V AI1 COM COM AQ1 R1A R1B R1C R2A R2CAI2 AI3
+24 DI1 DI2 DI5 DI6 STO P24DI3 DI4
DQ- DQ+ PE
SW1SW2
Source
Sink ext.
Sink int.
DI6
PTC
Note:
DIx =LX
DQx = LOx
AQ1 = AO1
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FULL [FULL] (continued)
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT]
PtC- [PTC MANAGEMENT]
PtCL [LI6 = PTC probe]
[No] (nO)
nO
AS
rdS
rS
Check first that the switch SW2 on the control block is set to PTC.
[No] (nO): Not used
[Always] (AS): PTC probe are monitored permanently, even if the power supply is not connected (as long as the control remains
connected to the power supply)
[Power ON] (rdS): PTC probe are monitored while the drive power supply is connected
[Motor ON] (rS): PTC probe are monitored while the motor power supply is connected
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > PTC-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 251
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
rSt- [FAULT RESET]
rSF [Fault reset]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
...
Detected faults are cleared manually when the assigned input or bit changes to 1, if the cause of the detected fault has
disappeared.
The STOP/RESET key on the graphic display terminal performs the same function.
Following detected faults can be cleared manually : ASF, brF, bLF, CnF, COF, dLF, EPF1, EPF2, FbES,
FCF2, InF9, InFA, InFb, LCF, LFF3, ObF, OHF, OLC, OLF, OPF1, OPF2, OSF, OtFL, PHF,
PtFL, SCF4, SCF5, SLF1, SLF2, SLF3, SOF, SPF, SSF, tJF, tnF and ULF.
Note: If [Reset restricted fault configuration] (HrFC) is set to [Yes] (YES), the additional following detected fault can be
cleared manually: OCF
, SCF1, SCF3. See page 252
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[LI1] (Li1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
(If [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [Not Separ.] (SIM) or [Separate] (SEP) then [CD11] (Cd11) up to [CD15] (Cd15), [C111] (C111)
up to [C115] (C115), [C211] (C211) up to [C215] (C215) and [C311] (C311) up to [C315] (C315) are not available).
rPA [Product reset assig.]
[No] (nO)
g
The Restart function performs a Fault Reset and then restarts the drive. During this Restart procedure, the drive goes through
the same steps as if it had been switched off and on again. Depending on the wiring and the configuration of the drive, this may
result in immediate and unanticipated operation. The Restart function can be assigned to a digital input.
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The Restart function performs a Fault Reset and restarts the drive.
• Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage
nO
LI1
...
LI6
LAI1
LAI2
OL01
...
OL10
This parameter can only be modified if [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) is set to [Expert] (EPr) mode.
Drive reinitialization via logic input. Can be used to reset all detected faults without having to disconnect the drive from the power
supply. The drive is reinitialized on a rising edge (change from 0 to 1) of the assigned input. The drive can only be reinitialized
when locked.
To assign reinitialization, press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s.
[No] (nO):
Function inactive
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
...
[LI6] (LI6): Logical input LI6
[LAI1] (LAI1): Logical input AI1
[LAI2] (LAI2): Logical input AI2
[OL01] (OL01): Function blocks: Logical Output 01
...
[OL10] (OL10): Function blocks: Logical Output 10
rP [Product reset]
[No] (nO)
g
The Restart function performs a Fault Reset and then restarts the drive. During this Restart procedure, the drive goes through
the same steps as if it had been switched off and on again. Depending on the wiring and the configuration of the drive, this may
result in immediate and unanticipated operation.
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The Restart function performs a Fault Reset and restarts the drive.
• Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.
.Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage
nO
YES
This parameter can only be accessed if [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) is set to [Expert] (EPr) mode.
Drive reinitialization. Can be used to reset all detected faults without having to disconnect the drive from the power supply.
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Yes] (YES): Reinitialization. Press and hold down the ENT key for 2 s. The parameter changes back to [No] (nO)
automatically as soon as the operation is complete. The drive can only be reinitialized when locked.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > RST-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
252 NVE41295 04/2018
HrFC [Reset restricted fault configuration]
[No] (nO)
g
This parameter can only be accessed if [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC) is set to [Expert] (EPr) mode.
Can be used to select the access level of [Fault reset] (rSF) to reset detected faults without having to disconnect the drive
from the power supply. see page 251
Note: If [Reset restricted fault configuration] (HrFC) is set to [Yes] (YES), the additional following detected fault can be
cleared manually: OCF, SCF1, SCF3.
nO
YES
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Yes] (YES): Function active
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
Atr- [AUTOMATIC RESTART]
Atr [Automatic restart]
[No] (nO)
This function can be used to automatically perform individual or multiple Fault Resets.
If the cause of the error that has triggered the transition to the operating state Fault disappears within while this function is active,
the drive resumes normal operation. While the Fault Reset attempts are performed automatically, the output signal "Operating
state Fault" is not available.
If the attempts to perform the Fault Reset are not successful, the drive remains in the operating state Fault and the output signal
"Operating state Fault" becomes active.
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
• Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.
• Verify that the fact that the output signal "Operating state Fault" is not available while this function is active
does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage
nO
YES
The error relay remains activated if this function is active. The speed reference and the operating direction must be maintained.
Use 2-wire control ([2/3 wire control] (tCC) is set to [2 wire] (2C) and [2 wire type] (tCt) is set to [Level] (LEL), see
[2/3 wire control] (tCC) page 85
).
If the restart has not taken place once the configurable time tAr has elapsed, the procedure is aborted and the drive remains
locked until it is turned off and then on again.
The error codes, which permit this function, are listed on page 313
.
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Yes] (YES): Automatic restart, after locking in fault state, if the detected fault has disappeared and the other operating
conditions permit the restart. The restart is performed by a series of automatic attempts separated by increasingly longer waiting
periods: 1 s, 5 s, 10 s, then 1 minute for the following attempts.
tAr [Max. restart time]
[5 minutes] (5)
g
This parameter appears if [Automatic restart] (Atr) is set to [Yes] (YES). It can be used to limit the number of consecutive
restarts on a recurrent detected fault.
5
10
30
1h
2h
3h
Ct
[5 min] (5): 5 minutes
[10 minutes] (10): 10 minutes
[30 minutes] (30): 30 minutes
[1 hour] (1h): 1 hour
[2 hours] (2h): 2 hours
[3 hours] (3h): 3 hours
[Unlimited] (Ct): Unlimited
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
ALS- [ALARM SETTING]
Ctd
(1)
[Current threshold]
0 to 1.5 In (1) INV
Motor current threshold.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
2 s
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > RST-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 253
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate.
Ftd
[Freq. threshold]
0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz
Motor frequency threshold.
F2d
[Freq. threshold 2]
0 to 599 Hz 50 Hz
Motor frequency threshold.
ttH
[High torque thd.]
-300 to 300% 100%
High torque frequency threshold.
ttL
[Low torque thd.]
-300 to 300% 50%
Low torque frequency threshold.
FqL [Pulse warning thd.]
0 to 20,000 Hz 0 Hz
g
Frequency level.
Visible if [Frequency meter] (FqF) is not [No] (nO).
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
FLr- [CATCH ON THE FLY]
Note: This function cannot be used with certain other functions. Follow the instructions on page 162.
FLr [Catch on the fly]
[No] (nO)
nO
YES
Used to enable a smooth restart if the run command is maintained after the following events:
- Loss of supply mains or disconnection.
- Clearance of current detected fault or automatic restart.
- Freewheel stop.
The speed given by the drive resumes from the estimated speed of the motor at the time of the restart, then follows the ramp to
the reference speed.
This function requires 2-wire level control.
When the function is operational, it activates at each run command, resulting in a slight delay of the current (0.5 s max).
[Catch on the fly] (FLr) is forced to [No] (nO) if brake logic control [Brake assignment] (bLC) is assigned (page 194
) or
if [Auto DC injection] (AdC) is set to [Continuous] (Ct) page 176
.
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Yes] (YES): Function active
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
2 s
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > ALS-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
254 NVE41295 04/2018
Motor thermal protection
Function
Thermal protection by calculating the I²t.
Note: The motor thermal state is not saved when the drive is switched off.
• Self-cooled motors: The tripping curves depend on the motor frequency.
• Force-cooled motors: Only the 50 Hz tripping curve needs to be considered, regardless of the motor
frequency.
The following curves represent the triggering time in seconds:
10, 000
1, 000
100
0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6
50 Hz20 Hz10 Hz
1 Hz
3 Hz
5 Hz
Triggering time in seconds
Motor current / ItH
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
External protection against overloads is required under the following circumstances:
• When the product is being switched on again, as there is no memory to record the motor thermal state
• When supplying more than one motor
• When supplying motors with ratings less than 0.2 times the nominal drive current
• When using motor switching
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 255
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
tHt- [MOTOR THERMAL PROT.]
tHt [Motor protect. type]
[Self cooled] (ACL)
nO
ACL
FCL
Note: .An error will occur when the thermal state reaches 118% of the rated state and reactivation will occur when the state falls
back below 100%.
[No] (nO): No protection
[Self cooled] (ACL): For self-cooled motors
[Force-cool] (FCL): For force-cooled motors
ttd [Motor therm. level]
0 to 118% 100%
(1)
Threshold for motor thermal alarm (logic output or relay).
ttd2 [Motor2 therm. level]
0 to 118% 100%
Threshold for motor 2 thermal alarm (logic output or relay).
ttd3 [Motor3 therm. level]
0 to 118% 100%
Threshold for motor 3 thermal alarm (logic output or relay).
OLL [Overload fault mgt]
[Freewheel] (YES)
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Depending on the settings of this parameter, the error response to detected errors is disabled or the
transition to the operating state Fault is suppressed if an error is detected.
• Verify that the settings of this parameter do not result in equipment damage.
• Implement alternative monitoring functions for disabled monitoring functions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
Type of stop in the event of a motor thermal error.
[Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored
[Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
[Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 173
, without tripping. In this case, the fault
relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears, according to the restart conditions
of the active command channel (for example, according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt) page
125 if
control is via the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended (assigned to a logic output, for example)
in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
[fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has
not been removed (2)
[Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred, as long as the detected
fault is present and the run command has not been removed (2)
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
[DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions. See table on page 165
MtM [Mot THR memo]
[No] (nO)
nO
YES
Motor thermal state memorization.
[No] (nO): Motor thermal state is not stored at power off
[Yes] (YES): Motor thermal state is stored at power off
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > THT-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
256 NVE41295 04/2018
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
OPL- [OUTPUT PHASE LOSS]
OPL [Output Phase Loss]
[Yes] (YES)
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
If output phase monitoring is disabled, phase loss and, by implication, accidental disconnection of cables, are
not detected.
• Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
nO
YES
OAC
Note: [Output phase loss] (OPL) is set to [No] (nO) when [Motor control type] (Ctt) page 105
is set to
[Sync. mot.] (SYn). For other [Motor control type] (Ctt) configurations, [Output phase loss] (OPL) is forced to [Yes]
(YES) if brake logic control is configured.
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[Yes] (YES): Tripping on [Output phase loss] (OPL) with freewheel stop
[Output cut] (OAC): No fault triggered, but management of the output voltage in order to avoid an overcurrent when the link
with the motor is re-established and catch on the fly performed (even if this function has not been configured).
The drive switches to [Output cut] (SOC) state after [OutPh time detect] (Odt) time. Catch on fly is possible as soon as the
drive is in Stand by output cut [Output cut] (SOC) state.
Odt [OutPh time detect]
0.5 to 10 s 0.5 s
Time delay for taking the [Output Phase Loss] (OPL) detected fault into account.
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
IPL- [INPUT PHASE LOSS]
IPL [Input phase loss]
According to drive rating
g
Cannot be accessed if drive rating is ATVpppM2.
In this case, no factory settings value.
Factory setting : [Freewheel] (YES) for drive rating ATV320pppN4p.
If 1 phase disappears and if this leads to performance decrease, the drive switches to fault mode [Input phase loss] (PHF).
If 2 or 3 phases disappear, the drive trips in [Input phase loss] (PHF).
nO
YES
[Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored
[Freewheel] (YES): Detected fault with freewheel stop
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
2 s
2 s
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > OPL-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 257
(1) The parameter can also be accessed in the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu.
(2) Because, in this case, the detected fault does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output to
its indication.
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
OHL- [DRIVE OVERHEAT]
OHL [Overtemp fault mgt]
[Freewheel] (YES)
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Depending on the settings of this parameter, the error response to detected errors is disabled or the
transition to the operating state Fault is suppressed if an error is detected.
• Verify that the settings of this parameter do not result in equipment damage.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
Behavior in the event of the drive overheating.
Note: An error will occur when the thermal state reaches 118% of the rated state and reactivation will occur when the state falls
back below 90%.
[Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored
[Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
[Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 173
, without tripping. In this case, the fault
relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears, according to the restart conditions
of the active command channel (for example, according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt) page 125
if
control is via the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended (assigned to a logic output, for example)
in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
[fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has
not been removed (2)
[Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred, as long as the detected
fault is present and the run command has not been removed (2)
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
[DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions. See table on page 163
tHA [Drv therm. state al]
0 to 118% 100%
Threshold for drive thermal alarm (logic output or relay).
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
2 s
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > OHL-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
258 NVE41295 04/2018
Deferred stop on thermal alarm
This function helps to prevent the drive stopping between two steps of the process if the drive or motor
overheats, by authorizing operation until the next stop. At the next stop, the drive is locked until the thermal
state falls back to a value, which undershoots the set threshold by 20%. Example: A threshold set at 80%
enables reactivation at 60%.
One thermal state threshold must be defined for the drive, and one thermal state threshold for the motor(s),
which will trigger the deferred stop.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
SAt- [THERMAL ALARM STOP]
SAt [Thermal alarm stop]
[No] (nO)
nO
YES
Thermal alarm stop function allow to set a custom alarm thermal level for the drive or the motor. When one of these levels is
reached, the drive trips in freewheel stop.
[No] (nO): Function inactive (in this case, the following parameters cannot be accessed)
[Yes] (YES): Freewheel stop on drive or motor thermal alarm
tHA
[Drv therm. state al]
0 to 118% 100%
Thermal state threshold of the drive tripping the deferred stop.
ttd
[Motor therm. level]
0 to 118% 100%
Thermal state threshold of the motor tripping the deferred stop.
ttd2
[Motor2 therm. level]
0 to 118% 100%
Thermal state threshold of the motor 2 tripping the deferred stop.
ttd3
[Motor3 therm. level]
0 to 118% 100%
Thermal state threshold of the motor 3 tripping the deferred stop.
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
EtF- [EXTERNAL FAULT]
EtF [External fault ass.]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
...
If the assigned bit is at 0, there is no external fault.
If the assigned bit is at 1, there is an external fault.
Logic can be configured via [External fault config] (LEt) if a logic input has been assigned.
[No] (nO):
Function inactive
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
LEt [External fault config]
[Active high] (HIG)
g
Parameter can be accessed if the external fault has been assigned to a logic input. It defines the positive or negative logic of
the input assigned to the detected fault.
LO
HIG
[Active low] (LO): Triggering on falling edge (change from 1 to 0) of the assigned input
[Active high] (HIG): Triggering on rising edge (change from 0 to 1) of the assigned input
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > SAT-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 259
EPL [External fault mgt]
[Freewheel] (YES)
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
Type of stop in the event of an external fault.
[Ignore] (nO): External fault ignored
[Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
[Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 173
, without tripping. In this case, the fault
relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears, according to the restart
conditions of the active command channel (for example, according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt)
page
125 if control is via the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended (assigned to a logic
output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
[fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has
not been removed (1)
[Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred, as long as the detected
fault is present and the run command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
[DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions. See table on page 165
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
USb- [UNDERVOLTAGE MGT]
USb [UnderV. fault mgt]
[Std fault] (0)
0
1
2
Behavior of the drive in the event of an undervoltage.
[Std fault] (0): The drive trips and the external fault signal is triggered (the fault relay assigned to [No drive flt] (FLt) will
be opened)
[Flt wo relay] (1): The drive trips but the external fault signal is not triggered (the fault relay assigned to [No drive flt] (FLt)
remains closed)
[Alarm] (2): Alarm and fault relay remain closed. The alarm can be assigned to a logic output or a relay
UrES [Mains voltage]
According to drive voltage
rating
According to drive voltage
rating
Rated voltage of the supply mains in V.
See [Mains voltage] (urES) page 246
USL [Undervoltage level]
100 to 304 V According to drive rating
Undervoltage fault level setting in Volts. The factory setting is determined by the drive voltage rating.
See [Undervoltage level] (uSL) page 247
USt [Undervolt. time out]
0.2 s to 999.9 s 0.2 s
Time delay for taking undervoltage detected fault into account.
StP [UnderV. prevention]
[No] (nO)
nO
MMS
rMP
LnF
Behavior in the event of the undervoltage prevention level being reached.
[No] (nO): No action
[DC Maintain] (MMS): This stop mode uses the inertia to maintain the DC bus voltage as long as possible
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop following an adjustable ramp [Max stop time] (StM)
[Lock-out] (LnF): Lock (freewheel stop) without error
tSM [UnderV. restart tm]
1.0 s to 999.9 s 1.0 s
g
Time delay before authorizing the restart after a complete stop for [UnderV. prevention] (StP) = [Ramp stop] (rMP), if
the voltage has returned to normal.
UPL [Prevention level]
141 to 368 V According to drive rating
g
Undervoltage prevention level setting in Volts, which can be accessed if [UnderV. prevention] (StP) is not [No] (nO). The
adjustment range and factory setting are determined by the drive voltage rating and the [Mains voltage] (UrES) value.
StM [Max stop time]
0.01 to 60.00 s 1.00 s
g
Ramp time if [UnderV. prevention] (StP) is set to [Ramp stop] (rMP).
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > ETF-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
260 NVE41295 04/2018
(1) Because, in this case, the detected fault does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output to
its indication.
tbS [DC bus maintain tm]
1 to 9,999 s 9,999 s
g
DC bus maintain time if [UnderV. prevention] (StP) is set to [DC Maintain] (MMS).
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
tIt- [IGBT TESTS]
Strt [IGBT test]
[No] (nO)
nO
YES
[No] (nO): No test
[Yes] (YES): The IGBTs are tested on power up and every time a run command is sent. These tests cause a slight delay (a
few ms). In the event of a detected fault, the drive will lock. The following faults can be detected:
- Drive output short-circuit (terminals U-V-W): SCF display.
- IGBT inoperable: xtF, where x indicates the number of the IGBT concerned.
- IGBT short-circuited: x2F, where x indicates the number of the IGBT concerned.
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
LFL- [4-20mA LOSS]
LFL3 [AI3 4-20mA loss]
[Ignore] (nO)
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
[Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored. This is the only possible configuration if [AI3 min. value] (CrL3) page 134 is not
greater than 3 mA
[Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
[Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 173
, without fault tripping. In this case, the
fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears, according to the restart
conditions of the active command channel (for example, according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt)
page
125 if control is via the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended (assigned to a logic
output, for example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop
[Fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command
has not been removed (1)
[Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred, as long as the detected
fault is present and the run command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
[DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions. See table on page 163
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > USB-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 261
Parameter can be accessed in [Expert] mode
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
InH- [FAULT INHIBITION]
InH [Fault inhibit assign.]
[No] (nO)
g
In rare cases, the monitoring functions of the drive may be unwanted because they impede the purpose of the application. A
typical example is a smoke extractor fan operating as a part of a fire protection system. If a fire occurs, the smoke extractor fan
should operate as long as possible, even if, for example, the permissible ambient temperature of the drive is exceeded. In such
applications, damage to or destruction of the device may be acceptable as collateral damage, for example, to keep other damage
from occurring whose hazard potential is assessed to be more severe.
A parameter is provided to disable certain monitoring functions in such applications so that automatic error detection and
automatic error responses of the device are no longer active. You must implement alternative monitoring functions for disabled
monitoring functions that allow operators and/or master control systems to adequately respond to conditions which correspond
to detected errors.
For example, if overtemperature monitoring of the drive is disabled, the drive of a smoke extractor fan may itself cause a fire if
errors go undetected. An overtemperature condition can be, for example, signaled in a control room without the drive being
stopped immediately and automatically by its internal monitoring functions.
DANGER
MONITORING FUNCTIONS DISABLED, NO ERROR DETECTION
• Only use this parameter after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and standards
that apply to the device and to the application.
• Implement alternative monitoring functions for disabled monitoring functions that do not trigger automatic
error responses of the drive, but allow for adequate, equivalent responses by other means in compliance
with all applicable regulations and standards as well as the risk assessment.
• Commission and test the system with the monitoring functions enabled.
• During commissioning, verify that the drive and the system operate as intended by performing tests and
simulations in a controlled environment under controlled conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, detected fault monitoring is active. If the assigned input or bit is at 1, fault monitoring is inactive.
Active detected faults are cleared on a rising edge (change from 0 to 1) of the assigned input or bit.
Note: The Safe Torque Off function and any detected faults that help to prevent any form of operation are not affected by this
function.
Following faults can be inhibited:
AnF, CnF, COF, CrF1, dLF, EnF, EPF1, EPF2, FCF2, InFA, InFb, LFF3, ObF, OHF, OLC,
OLF, OPF1, OPF2, OSF, OtFL,PHF, PtFL, SLF1, SLF2, SLF3, SOF, SPF, SSF, tJF, tnF and
ULF.
nO
LI1
...
[No] (nO):
Function inactive
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
[...] (...): See the assignment conditions on page 153
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
CLL- [COM. FAULT MANAGEMENT]
CLL [Network fault mgt]
[Freewheel] (YES)
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If this parameter is set to [Ignore] (nO), fieldbus module communication monitoring is disabled.
• Only use this setting after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and standards
that apply to the device and to the application.
• Only use this setting for tests during commissioning.
• Verify that communication monitoring has been re-enabled before completing the commissioning
procedure and performing the final commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
2 s
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > INH-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
262 NVE41295 04/2018
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication interruption with a communication card.
[Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored
[Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
[Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 173
, without fault tripping. In this case, the
fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears, according to the restart
conditions of the active command channel (for example, according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt) page
125 if control is via the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended (assigned to a logic output, for
example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop
[Fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has
not been removed (1)
[Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred, as long as the detected
fault is present and the run command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
[DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions. See table on page 163
COL [CANopen fault mgt]
[Freewheel] (YES)
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If this parameter is set to [Ignore] (nO), CANopen communication monitoring is disabled.
• Only use this setting after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and standards
that apply to the device and to the application.
• Only use this setting for tests during commissioning.
• Verify that communication monitoring has been re-enabled before completing the commissioning
procedure and performing the final commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication interruption with integrated CANopen®.
[Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored
[Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
[Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 173
, without fault tripping. In this case, the
fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears, according to the restart
conditions of the active command channel (for example, according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt) page
125 if control is via the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended (assigned to a logic output, for
example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
[fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has
not been removed (1)
[Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred, as long as the detected
fault is present and the run command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
[DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions. See table on page 165
.
SLL [Modbus fault mgt]
[Freewheel] (YES)
WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If this parameter is set to [Ignore] (nO), Modbus communication monitoring is disabled.
• Only use this setting after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and standards
that apply to the device and to the application.
• Only use this setting for tests during commissioning.
• Verify that communication monitoring has been re-enabled before completing the commissioning
procedure and performing the final commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > CLL-
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 263
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication interruption with integrated Modbus.
[Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored
[Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
[Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 173
, without fault tripping. In this case, the
fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears, according to the restart
conditions of the active command channel (for example, according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt) page
125 if control is via the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended (assigned to a logic output, for
example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
[fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has
not been removed (1)
[Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred, as long as the detected
fault is present and the run command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
[DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions. See table on page 165
.
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
Sdd- [ENCODER FAULT]
Sdd [Load slip detection]
[Yes] (YES)
Load slip detection activation
nO
YES
[No] (nO): Detected fault ignored
[Yes] (YES): Freewheel stop
The event is triggered by comparison with the output frequency and the speed feedback according to the related parameters
configuration FAnF, LAnF, dANF and tAnF.
The event is also triggered as soon as a RUN order is received, if the sign of the output frequency and the speed feedback are
in opposite way during tAnF.
In case of a detected fault, the drive switch to a freewheel stop, and if the brake logic control function has been configured, the
brake command will be set to 0.
FAnF [ANF Frequency Thd.]
-
g
Visible if [Encoder usage] (EnU) is set to [Fdbk monit.] (SEC).
See page 136
LAnF [ANF Detection level]
-
g
Visible if [Encoder usage] (EnU) is set to [Fdbk monit.] (SEC).
See page 136
dAnF [ANF Direction check]
-
g
Visible if [Encoder usage] (EnU) is set to [Fdbk monit.] (SEC).
See page 137
tAnF [ANF Time Thd.]
-
g
Visible if [Encoder usage] (EnU) is set to [Fdbk monit.] (SEC).
See page 137
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > CLL-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 264
(1) Because, in this case, the detected fault does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output to
its indication.
tId- [TORQUE OR I LIM. DETECT]
SSb [Trq/I limit. stop]
[Ignore] (nO)
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
dCI
Behavior in the event of switching to torque or current limitation.
[Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored
[Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
[Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 173
, without fault tripping. In this case, the
fault relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears, according to the restart
conditions of the active command channel (for example, according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt) page
125 if control is via the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended (assigned to a logic output, for
example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop
[fallback spd] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has
not been removed (1)
[Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed being applied when the detected fault occurred, as long as the detected
fault is present and the run command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
[DC injection] (dCI): DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used with certain other functions. See table on page 165
StO
[Trq/I limit. time out]
0 to 9,999 ms 1,000 ms
(If [Trq/I limit. stop] (SSb) has been configured)
Time delay for taking SSF limitation into account.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
To change the assignment of this parameter, press the ENT key for 2 s.
2 s
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > TID-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 265
Use of the "Pulse input" input to measure the speed of rotation of the motor
This function uses the "Pulse input" input and can only be used if the "Pulse input" input is not being used for
another function.
Example of use
An indexed disk driven by the motor and connected to a proximity sensor can be used to generate a frequency
signal that is proportional to the speed of rotation of the motor.
When applied to the "Pulse input" input, this signal supports:
• Measurement and display of the motor speed: signal frequency = 1/T. This frequency is displayed by means
of the [Pulse in. work. freq.] (FqS) parameter, page 50.
• Overspeed detection (if the measured speed exceeds a preset threshold, the drive will trigger an error).
• Brake failure detection, if brake logic control has been configured: If the speed does not drop sufficiently
quickly following a command to engage the brake, the drive will trigger an error. This function can be used
to detect worn brake linings.
• Detection of a speed threshold that can be adjusted using [Pulse warning thd.] (FqL) page 102 and is
assignable to a relay or logic output, see page 138.
T
Time, in seconds
Configuration Mode (ConF)
266 NVE41295 04/2018
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
FqF- [FREQUENCY METER]
FqF [Frequency meter]
[No] (nO)
nO
YES
Activation of the speed measurement function.
[No] (nO): Function inactive. In this case, none of the function parameters can be accessed
[Yes] (YES): Function active, assignment only possible if no other functions have been assigned to the "Pulse input" input
FqC
[Pulse scal. divisor]
1.0 to 100.0 1.0
Scaling factor for the "Pulse input" input (divisor). The frequency measured is displayed by means of the
[Pulse in. work. freq.] (FqS) parameter, page
50.
FqA [Overspd. pulse thd.]
[No] (nO)
nO
-
Activation and adjustment of overspeed monitoring: [Overspeed] (SOF).
[No] (nO): No overspeed monitoring
1 Hz to 20.00 kHz: Adjustment of the frequency tripping threshold on the "Pulse input" input divided by
[Pulse scal. divisor] (FqC).
tdS [Pulse overspd delay]
0.0 s to 10.0 s 0.0 s
Time delay for taking overspeed detected fault into account.
Fdt [Level fr. pulse ctrl]
[No] (nO)
nO
-
Activation and adjustment of monitoring for the Pulse input (speed feedback): [Speed fdback loss] (SPF).
[No] (nO): No monitoring of speed feedback
0.1 Hz to 599 Hz: Adjustment of the motor frequency threshold for tripping a speed feedback detected fault (difference between
the estimated frequency and the measured speed).
Fqt [Pulse thd. wo Run]
[No] (nO)
nO
-
Activation and adjustment of brake monitoring: [Brake feedback] (brF).
If brake logic control [Brake assignment] (bLC) page 194
is not configured, this parameter is forced to [No] (nO).
[No] (nO): No brake monitoring
1 Hz to 1,000 Hz: Adjustment of the motor frequency threshold.
tqb [Pulse wo Run delay]
0.0 s to 10.0 s 0.0 s
Time delay for taking brake monitoring into account.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > FQF-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 267
Load variation detection
This detection is only possible with the High-speed hoisting function. It can be used to detect if an obstacle
has been reached, triggering a sudden (upward) increase or (downward) decrease in the load.
Load variation detection triggers a [Dynamic load fault] (dLF). The [Dyn. load Mgt.] (dLb) parameter can
be used to configure the response of the drive in the event of this detected
fault.
Load variation detection can also be assigned to a relay or a logic output.
There are two possible detection modes, depending on the configuration of high-speed hoisting:
• Speed reference mode
[High speed hoisting] (HSO) page 204 is set to [Speed ref] (SSO).
Torque variation detection.
During high-speed operation, the load is compared to that measured during the speed step. The
permissible load variation and its duration can be configured. If exceeded, the drive switches to fault mode.
• Current limitation mode
[High speed hoisting] (HSO) page 204 is set to [Current Limit] (CSO).
On ascend, during high-speed operation, an increase in load will result in a drop in speed. Even if high-
speed operation has been activated, if the motor frequency drops below the [I Limit Frequency] (SCL)
threshold page 205
, the drive will switch to fault mode. The detection is realised only for a positive variation
of the load and only in the high speed area (area upper to [I Limit Frequency] (SCL)).
On descend, operation takes the form of Speed reference mode.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
dLd- [DYNAMIC LOAD DETECT.]
Load variation detection. This can be accessed if [High speed hoisting] (HSO) page 204 is not [No] (nO).
tLd [Dynamic load time]
[No] (nO)
nO
-
Activation of load variation detection and adjustment of time delay for taking load variation detected fault
[Dynamic load fault] (dLF) into account.
[No] (nO): No load variation detection
0.00 s to 10.00 s: Adjustment of the time delay for taking detected fault into account.
dLd [Dynamic load threshold]
1 to 100% 100%
Adjustment of the threshold for load variation detection, as a % of the load measured during the speed step.
dLb [Dyn. load Mgt.]
[Freewheel] (YES)
nO
YES
Stt
LFF
rLS
rMP
FSt
Behavior of the drive in the event of a load variation detected fault.
[Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored
[Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
[Per STT] (Stt): Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop] (Stt) page 173
, without tripping. In this case, the fault
relay does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon as the detected fault disappears, according to the restart conditions
of the active command channel, (for example, according to [2/3 wire control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt) page
125 if
control is via the terminals). Configuring an alarm for this detected fault is recommended (assigned to a logic output, for example)
in order to indicate the cause of the stop
[Fallback spd.] (LFF): Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the detected fault persists and the run command has
not been removed (1)
[Spd maint.] (rLS): The drive maintains the speed at the time the detected fault occurred, as long as the detected fault persists
and the run command has not been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > DLD-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
268 NVE41295 04/2018
(1) Because, in this case, the detected fault does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic output to
its indication.
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
tnF- [AUTO TUNING FAULT]
tnL [Autotune fault mgt]
[Freewheel] (YES)
nO
YES
[Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored
[Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > TNF-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 269
Card pairing
Function can only be accessed in [Expert]
(EPr) mode.
This function is used to detect whenever a card has been replaced or the software has been modified in any
way.
When a pairing password is entered, the parameters of the card currently inserted are stored. On every
subsequent power-up, these parameters are verified and, in the event of a discrepancy, the drive locks in HCF
fault mode. Before the drive can be restarted, you must revert to the original situation or re-enter the pairing
password.
The following parameters are verified:
• The type of card for: all cards.
• The software version for: the control block, the communication cards.
• The serial number for: the control block.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
PPI- [CARDS PAIRING]
PPI
[Pairing password]
[OFF] (OFF) to 9,999 [OFF] (OFF)
g
OFF
-
The [OFF] (OFF) value signifies that the card pairing function is inactive
The [ON] (On) value signifies that card pairing is active and that an access code must be entered in order to start the drive in
the event of a card pairing detected fault
As soon as the code has been entered, the drive is unlocked and the code changes to [ON] (On).
The PPI code is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > PPI-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
270 NVE41295 04/2018
Process underload detected fault
A process underload is detected when the next event occurs and remains pending for a minimum time
[Unld T. Del. Detect] (ULt), which is configurable:
• The motor is in steady state and the torque is below the set underload limit ([Unld. Thr. 0. Speed.] (LUL),
[Unld. Thr. Nom. Speed.]
(LUn), [Unld. Freq. Thr. Det.] (rMUd) parameters).
• The motor is in steady state when the offset between the frequency reference and motor frequency falls
below the configurable threshold [Hysteresis Freq. Att.] (Srb).
Between zero frequency and the rated frequency,
the curve reflects the following equation:
torque = LUL +
The underload function is not active for
frequencies below
[Unld. Freq. Thr. Det.] (rMUd).
A relay or a logic output can be assigned to the signaling of this detected fault in the
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu.
0
Frequency
Torque as a % of
the rated torque
Underload
zone
(LUn - LUL) x (frequency)
2
(rated frequency)
2
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
ULd- [PROCESS UNDERLOAD]
ULt [Unld T. Del. Detect.]
0 to 100 s 0 s
Underload detection time delay.
A value of 0 deactivates the function and makes the other parameters inaccessible.
LUn [Unld. Thr. Nom. Speed.]
20 to 100% 60%
g
Underload threshold at rated motor frequency ([Rated motor freq.] (FrS) page 86), as a % of the rated motor torque.
LUL [Unld. Thr. 0. Speed.]
0 to [Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed]
(LUn)
0%
g
Underload threshold at zero frequency, as a % of the rated motor torque.
rMUd [Unld. Freq. Thr. Det.]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
g
Minimum frequency underload detection threshold.
Srb [Hysteresis Freq. Att.]
0.3 to 599 Hz 0.3 Hz
g
Maximum deviation between the frequency reference and the motor frequency, which defines steady state operation.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > ULD-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 271
UdL [Underload Managmt.]
[Freewheel] (YES)
g
Behavior on switching to underload detection.
nO
YES
rMP
FSt
[Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored
[Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
FtU [Underload T.B. Rest.]
0 to 6 min 0 min
g
This parameter cannot be accessed if [Underload Mangmt.] (UdL) is set to [Ignore] (nO).
Minimum time permitted between an underload being detected and any automatic restart.
In order to allow an automatic restart, the value of [Max. restart time] (tAr) page 252
must exceed this parameter by at least
one minute.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > ULD-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
272 NVE41295 04/2018
Process overload detected fault
A process overload is detected when the next event occurs and remains pending for a minimum time
[Ovld Time Detect.] (tOL), which is configurable:
• The drive is in current limitation mode.
• The motor is in steady state and the current is above the set overload threshold
[Ovld Detection Thr.] (LOC).
The motor is in steady state when the offset between the frequency reference and motor frequency falls below
the configurable threshold [Hysteresis Freq. Att.] (Srb).
A relay or a logic output can be assigned to the signaling of this detected fault in the
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG] (I_O-) menu.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
OLd- [PROCESS OVERLOAD]
tOL [Ovld Time Detect.]
0 to 100 s 0 s
Overload detection time delay.
A value of 0 deactivates the function and makes the other parameters inaccessible.
LOC [Ovld Detection Thr.]
70 to 150% 110%
g
(1)
Overload detection threshold, as a % of the rated motor current [Rated mot. current] (nCr) page 86
. This value must be less
than the limit current in order for the function to work.
Srb [Hysteresis Freq.Att.]
0 to 599 Hz 0.3 Hz
g
(1)
Maximum deviation between the frequency reference and the motor frequency, which defines steady state operation.
OdL [Ovld.Proces.Mngmt]
[Freewheel] (YES)
g
Behavior on switching to overload detection.
nO
YES
rMP
FSt
[Ignore] (nO): Detected fault ignored
[Freewheel] (YES): Freewheel stop
[Ramp stop] (rMP): Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] (FSt): Fast stop
FtO [Overload T.B.Rest.]
0 to 6 min 0 min
g
(1)
This parameter cannot be accessed if [Ovld.Proces.Mngmt] (OdL) is set to [Ignore] (nO).
Minimum time permitted between an overload being detected and any automatic restart.
In order to allow an automatic restart, the value of [Max. restart time] (tAr) page 252
must exceed this parameter by at least
one minute.
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
LFF- [FALLBACK SPEED]
LFF [Fallback speed]
0 to 599 Hz 0 Hz
Selection of the fallback speed.
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
FSt- [RAMP DIVIDER]
dCF [Ramp divider]
0 to 10 4
g
(1)
The ramp that is enabled ([Deceleration] (dEC) or [Deceleration 2] (dE2)) is then divided by this coefficient when stop
requests are sent.
Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > OLD-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 273
FLt- [FAULT MANAGEMENT] (continued)
dCI- [DC INJECTION]
IdC [DC inject. level 1]
0.1 to 1.41 In (2) 0.64 In (2)
g
(1) (3)
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Level of DC injection braking current activated via logic input or selected as stop mode.
tdI [DC injection time 1]
0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
g
(1) (3)
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Maximum current injection time [DC inject. level 1] (IdC). After this time, the injection current becomes
[DC inject. level 2] (IdC2).
IdC2 [DC inject. level 2]
0.1 In (2) to [DC inject. level 1] (IdC) 0.5 In (2)
g
(1) (3)
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Injection current activated by logic input or selected as stop mode, once period of time [DC injection time 1] (tdI) has
elapsed.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > DCI-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
274 NVE41295 04/2018
(1) The parameter can also be accessed in the[SETTINGS] (SEt-) and [APPLICATION FUNCT.] (FUn-) menus.
(2) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation manual and on the drive nameplate.
(3) These settings are independent of the [AUTO DC INJECTION] (AdC-) function.
tdC [DC injection time 2]
0.1 to 30 s 0.5 s
g
(1) (3)
NOTICE
OVERHEATING AND DAMAGE TO THE MOTOR
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms of amount
and time in order to avoid overheating and damage to the motor.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Maximum injection time [DC inject. level 2] (IdC2) for injection, selected as stop mode only.
This parameter can be accessed if [Type of stop] (Stt) is set to [DC injection] (dCI).
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > DCI-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 275
Communication
With integrated display terminal:
SIM-
ESC
ESC
ENT
COM-
LAC
FLt-
FUn-
ESC
ESC
ESC
ENT
ESC
= ENT
ESC
= ESC
FULL
COMMUNICATION
From
COnF menu
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
FULL [FULL] (continued)
COM- [COMMUNICATION]
ICS- [COM. SCANNER INPUT]
[Scan. IN1 address] (nMA1) to [Scan. IN4 address] (nMA4) could be used for Fast Task of the communication scanner
(see Modbus & CANopen® communication manual).
nMA1 [Scan. IN1 address]
3,201
Address of the 1st input word.
nMA2 [Scan. IN2 address]
8,604
Address of the 2nd input word.
nMA3 [Scan. IN3 address]
0
Address of the 3rd input word.
nMA4 [Scan. IN4 address]
0
Address of the 4th input word.
nMA5 [Scan. IN5 address]
0
Address of the 5th input word.
nMA6 [Scan. IN6 address]
0
Address of the 6th input word.
nMA7 [Scan. IN7 address]
0
Address of the 7th input word.
nMA8 [Scan. IN8 address]
0
Address of the 8th input word.
Configuration Mode (ConF)
276 NVE41295 04/2018
COM- [COMMUNICATION] (continued)
OCS- [COM. SCANNER OUTPUT]
[Scan. Out1 address ] (nCA1) to [Scan. Out4 address] (nCA4) could be used for Fast Task of the communication scanner
(see Modbus & CANopen® communication manual).
nCA1 [Scan.Out1 address]
8,501
Address of the 1st output word.
nCA2 [Scan.Out2 address]
8,602
Address of the 2nd output word.
nCA3 [Scan.Out3 address]
0
Address of the 3rd output word.
nCA4 [Scan.Out4 address]
0
Address of the 4th output word.
nCA5 [Scan.Out5 address]
0
Address of the 5th output word.
nCA6 [Scan.Out6 address]
0
Address of the 6th output word.
nCA7 [Scan.Out7 address]
0
Address of the 7th output word.
nCA8 [Scan.Out8 address]
0
Address of the 8th output word.
COM- [COMMUNICATION] (continued)
Md1- [MODBUS NETWORK]
Add [Modbus Address]
[OFF] (OFF) to 247 [OFF] (OFF)
OFF
-
[OFF] (OFF)
1 to 247
AMOC [Modbus add Com. C.]
[OFF] (OFF) to 247 [OFF] (OFF)
g
OFF
-
[OFF] (OFF)
1 to 247
tbr [Modbus baud rate]
[19.2 Kbps] (19 2)
4 8 - 9 6 - 19 2 - 38 4 kbps on the integrated display terminal.
4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bauds on the graphic display terminal.
tFO [Modbus format]
[8-E-1] (8E1)
8O1 - 8E1 - 8n1, 8n2
ttO [Modbus time out]
0.1 to 30 s 10.0 s
0.1 to 30 s
COM1 [Mdb com stat]
r0t0
r0t1
r1t0
r1t1
[r0t0] (r0t0): Modbus no reception, no transmission = communication idle
[r0t1] (r0t1): Modbus no reception, transmission
[r1t0] (r1t0): Modbus reception, no transmission
[r1t1] (r1t1): Modbus reception and transmission
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > COMM- > OCS-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
NVE41295 04/2018 277
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
COM- [COMMUNICATION] (continued)
CnO- [CANopen]
AdCO [CANopen address]
[OFF] (OFF) to 127 [OFF] (OFF)
OFF
-
[OFF] (OFF): OFF
1 to 127
bdCO [CANopen bit rate]
[250 kbps] (250)
50
125
250
500
IM
[50 kbps] (50): 50,000 Bauds
[125 kbps] (125): 125,000 Bauds
[250 kbps] (250): 250,000 Bauds
[500 kbps] (500): 500,000 Bauds
[1 Mbps] (1M): 1 MBauds
ErCO [Error code]
0 to 5 -
Read-only parameter, cannot be modified.
COM- [COMMUNICATION] (continued)
Cbd- [COMMUNICATION CARD]
See the specific documentation for the card used.
LCF- [FORCED LOCAL]
FLO [Forced local assign.]
[No] (nO)
nO
LI1
...
LI6
LAI1
LAI2
OL01
...
OL10
Forced local assignment.
Forced local mode is active when the input is at state 1.
[Forced local assign.] (FLO) is forced to [No] (nO) if [Profile] (CHCF) is set to [I/O profile] (IO) page 154
.
[No] (nO): Function inactive
[LI1] (LI1): Logical input LI1
...
[LI6] (LI6): Logical input LI6
[LAI1] (LAI1): Logical input AI1
[LAI2] (LAI2): Logical input AI2
[OL01] (OL01): Function blocks: Logical Output 01
...
[OL10] (OL10): Function blocks: Logical Output 10
FLOC [Forced local Ref.]
[No] (nO)
nO
AI1
AI2
AI3
LCC
PI
OA01
...
OA10
Forced local reference source assignment.
[No] (nO): Not assigned (control via the terminals with zero reference)
[AI1] (AI1): Analog input
[AI2] (AI2): Analog input
[AI3] (AI3): Analog input
[HMI] (LCC): Assignment of the reference and command to the graphic display terminal or remote display terminal.
Reference: [HMI Frequency ref.] (LFr) page 50
.
Command: RUN/STOP/FWD/REV keys.
[RP] (PI): Pulse input
[OA01] (OA01): Function blocks: Analog Output 01
...
[OA10] (OA10): Function blocks: Analog Output 10
FLOt [Time-out forc. local]
0.1 to 30 s 10.0 s
g
0.1 to 30 s.
This parameter can be accessed if [Forced local assign.] (FLO) is not set to [No] (nO).
Time delay before communication monitoring is resumed on leaving forced local mode.
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
DRI- > CONF > FULL > FLT- > CNO-
Configuration Mode (ConF)
278 NVE41295 04/2018
COM- [COMMUNICATION] (continued)
NTID [Fieldbus Identifier Sel]
-
320
32
• This parameter allows to the ATV320 drive to be identified as an ATV320 or an ATV32 drive by the network.
• The modification of the setting value is effective when you restart the drive.
• This parameter is not part of a drive configuration. This parameter cannot be transfered.
• A factory setting does not modify the setting value of this parameter.
[ATV320] (320): Network identifies the drive as an ATV320.
[ATV32] (32): Network identifies the drive as an ATV32.
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
Configuration Mode (ConF)
280 NVE41295 04/2018
Interface (ItF)
282 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Access Level (LAC)
With integrated display terminal:
ItF-
ESC
ESC
ENT
dCF-
ESC
ENT
ESC
NCF-
= ENT
ESC
= ESC
LAC
ACCESS LEVEL
From ItF- menu
Code Name / Description Factory setting
ItF- [3 INTERFACE]
LAC [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL]
[Standard] (Std)
bAS
Std
AdU
Epr
[Basic] (bAS): Limited access to [SIMPLY START] (SIM-), [1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-), [SETTINGS] (SEt-),
[FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-), [5 PASSWORD] (COd) and [3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC-) menus. Only one function can be
assigned to each input.
[Standard] (Std): Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal. Only one function can be assigned to each input.
[Advanced] (AdU): Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal. Several functions can be assigned to each input.
[Expert] (EPr): Access to all menus on the integrated display terminal and access to additional parameters. Several functions can
be assigned to each input.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
ITF-
Interface (ItF)
NVE41295 04/2018 283
Comparison of the menus that can be accessed on the graphic display terminal/integrated display terminal
(1) Can be accessed only with graphic display terminal.
Access level
[1 DRIVE MENU] (drI-)
Standard Std
Advanced AdU
Expert EPr
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE] (rEF-)
Basic bAS
[1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-)
MMO- (Monitoring motor)
IOM- (I/O MAP)
SAF- (Monitoring Safety)
MFb- (Monitoring Function Blocks)
CMM- (Communication Map)
MPI- (Monitoring PI)
PEt- (Monitoring Power time)
ALr- (Alarms) (1)
SSt- (Other state) (1)
COd- (Password)
[1.3 CONFIGURATION] (COnF)
MYMn- (My Menu)
FCS- (Factory Settings)
FULL (Full)
SIM- (Simply Start)
SEt- (Settings)
FbM- (Function
Blocks)
[2 IDENTIFICATION] (OId-) (1)
[3 INTERFACE] (ItF-) (1)
[3.1 ACCESS LEVEL] (LAC)
[3.2 LANGUAGE] (LnG)
[4 OPEN / SAVE AS] (trA-) (1)
[5 PASSWORD] (COd-) (1)
A single function can be assigned to each input.
[1 DRIVE MENU] (drI-) [1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-) dGt- (Diagnostics)
[1.3 CONFIGURATION] (COnF) FULL (Full)
drC- (Motor Control)
I_O- (Inputs /
Outputs Configuration)
CtL- (Command)
FUn- (Application
function)
FLt- (Fault
Management)
COM-
(Communication)
[3 INTERFACE] (ItF-)
(1)
[3.3 MONITORING CONFIG.] (MCF-)
A single function can be assigned to each input.
[3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.] (dCF-) (1)
Several functions can be assigned to each input.
Expert parameters
Several functions can be assigned to each input.
Interface (ItF)
284 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Language (LnG)
When only one selection is possible, the selection made is indicated by
Example: Only one language can be chosen.
Code Name / Description Factory setting
LnG
[3.2 LANGUAGE]
[Language 0] (LnG0)
Current language index.
LnG0
...
LnG9
[Language 0] (LnG0)
...
[Language 9] (LnG9)
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
3.2 LANGUAGE
English
Français
Deutsch
Español
Italiano
<< >> Quick
Chinese
Русский
Türkçe
ITF-
Interface (ItF)
NVE41295 04/2018 285
Monitoring Configuration (MCF)
This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal.
This can be used to configure the information displayed on the graphic display screen during operation.
RDY Term +0 .0 Hz 0.0 A
3 INTERFACE
3.1 ACCESS LEVEL
3.2 LANGUAGE
3.3 MONITORING CONFIG.
Code << >> Quick
ENT
RUN Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
3.3 MONITORING CONFIG.
PARAM. BAR SELECT
MONITOR SCREEN TYPE
COM. MAP CONFIG.
Code << >> Quick
[PARAM. BAR SELECT]: Selection of 1 to 2 parameters displayed on the top line (the first 2 cannot
be modified).
[MONITOR SCREEN TYPE]: Selection of parameters displayed in the centre of the screen and the
display mode (digital values or bar graph format).
[COM. MAP CONFIG.]: Selection of the words displayed and their format.
RUN Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
3.3 MONITORING CONFIG.
PARAM. BAR SELECT
MONITOR SCREEN TYPE
COM. MAP CONFIG.
Code << >> Quick
Interface (ItF)
286 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Code Name / Description
MCF- [3.3 MONITORING CONFIG]
Code Name / Description
PbS- [PARAM. BAR SELECT]
[AI1]
[AI2]
[AI3]
[AO1]
[ETA state world]
[Alarm groups]
[Frequency ref.]
[Output frequency]
[Motor current]
[Motor speed]
[Motor voltage]
[Motor power]
[Motor torque]
[Mains voltage]
[Motor thermal state]
[Drv. thermal state]
[Consumption]
[Run time]
[Power on time]
[IGBT alarm counter]
[Min. freq time]
[PID reference]
[PID feedback]
[PID error]
[PID Output]
[Config. active]
[Utilised param. set]
in V
in V
in mA
in V
in Hz: parameter displayed in factory configuration
in Hz
in A: parameter displayed in factory configuration
in rpm
in V
in W
as a %
in V
as a %
as a %
in Wh or kWh depending on drive rating
in hours (length of time the motor has been switched on)
in hours (length of time the drive has been switched on)
in seconds (total time of IGBT overheating alarms)
in seconds
as a %
as a %
as a %
in Hz
CNF0, 1 or 2 (see page
232)
SET1, 2 or 3 (see page
230)
Select the parameter using ENT (a then appears next to the parameter). Parameter(s) can also be
deselected using ENT.
1 or 2 parameters can be selected.
Example:
PARAM. BAR SELECT
MONITORING
- - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - -
ITF- > MCF-
Interface (ItF)
NVE41295 04/2018 287
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Monitor screen type
Code Name / Description Factory setting
MSC- [MONITOR SCREEN TYPE]
Mdt [Display value type]
[Digital] (dEC)
[Digital] (dEC)
[Bar graph] (bAr)
[List] (LISt)
MPC
[PARAMETER SELECTION]
g
[AI1]
[AI2]
[AI3]
[AO1]
[ETA state world]
[Alarm groups]
[Frequency ref.]
[Output frequency]
[Pulse in. work. freq.]
[Motor current]
[Motor speed]
[Motor voltage]
[Motor power]
[Motor torque]
[Mains voltage]
[Motor thermal state]
[Drv. thermal state]
[Consumption]
[Run time]
[Power on time]
[IGBT alarm counter]
[Min. freq time]
[PID reference]
[PID feedback]
[PID error]
[PID Output]
in V
in V
in mA
in V
in Hz: parameter displayed in factory configuration
in Hz
in A: parameter displayed in factory configuration
in Hz
in rpm
in V
in W
as a %
in V
as a %
as a %
in Wh or kWh depending on drive rating
in hours (length of time the motor has been switched on)
in hours (length of time the drive has been switched on)
in seconds (total time of IGBT overheating alarms)
in seconds
as a %
as a %
as a %
in Hz
Select the parameter(s) using ENT (a then appears next to the parameter). Parameter(s) can also be deselected using ENT.
Examples include:
g
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another menu. When the parameters can
also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed
in these menus, on the pages indicated, to aid programming.
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
PARAMETER SELECTION
MONITORING
- - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - -
Display of 2 digital values Display of 2 bar graphs Display of a list of 5 values
RUN Term +35.0 Hz 80.0 A RUN Term +35.0 Hz 80.0 A RUN Term +35.0 Hz 80.0 A
Motor speed Min Motor speed max 1.2 MONITORING
1250 rpm
0 1250 rpm 1500 Frequency ref. : 50.1Hz
Motor current: 80 A
Motor current Min Motor current max Motor speed: 1250 rpm
80 A
0 80 A 150 Motor thermal state: 80%
Drv thermal state : 80%
Quick Quick Quick
ITF- > MCF- > MSC-
Interface (ItF)
288 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Communication map configuration
Code Name / Description Factory setting
AdL- [COM. MAP CONFIG.]
IAd1 [Word 1 add. select.]
0
Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the << and >> (F2 and F3) keys and rotating the jog dial.
FAd1 [Format word 1]
[Hex] (HE )
Format of word 1.
HE
SIG
nSG
[Hex] (HE )
[Signed] (SIG)
[Unsigned] (nSG)
IAd2 [Word 2 add. select.]
0
Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the << and >> (F2 and F3) keys and rotating the jog dial.
FAd2 [Format word 2]
[Hex] (HE )
Format of word 2.
HE
SIG
nSG
[Hex] (HE )
[Signed] (SIG)
[Unsigned] (nSG)
IAd3 [Word 3 add. select.]
0
Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the << and >> (F2 and F3) keys and rotating the jog dial.
FAd3 [Format word 3]
[Hex] (HE )
Format of word 3.
HE
SIG
nSG
[Hex] (HE )
[Signed] (SIG)
[Unsigned] (nSG)
IAd4 [Word 4 add. select.]
0
Select the address of the word to be displayed by pressing the << and >> (F2 and F3) keys and rotating the jog dial.
FAd4 [Format word 4]
[Hex] (HE )
Format of word 4.
HE
SIG
nSG
[Hex] (HE )
[Signed] (SIG)
[Unsigned] (nSG)
Then, it will be possible to view the selected words in the [COMMUNICATION MAP] submenu of the [1.2 MONITORING] menu.
Example:
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
RUN Term +35.0 Hz 80.0 A
COMMUNICATION MAP
- - - - - - - -- -
- - - - -- - - - -
W3141: F230 Hex
<< >> Quick
ITF- > MCF- > ADL-
Interface (ItF)
NVE41295 04/2018 289
Display configuration (dCF)
This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal. It can be used to customize parameters or
a menu and to access parameters.
• USER PARAMETERS: Customization of 1 to 15 parameters.
• MY MENU: Creation of a customized menu.
• PARAMETER ACCESS: Customization of the visibility and protection mechanisms of menus and
parameters.
• KEYPAD PARAMETERS: Adjustment of the contrast and stand-by mode of the graphic display terminal
(parameters stored in the terminal rather than in the drive).
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 IDENTIFICATION
3 INTERFACE
4 OPEN / SAVE AS
5 PASSWORD
Code Quick
ENT
R D Y Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.
USER PARAMETERS
MY MENU CONFIG.
PARAMETER ACCESS
KEYPAD PARAMETERS
Code << >> Quick
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
3 INTERFACE
3.1 ACCESS LEVEL
3.2 LANGUAGE
3.3 MONITORING CONFIG.
3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.
Code << >> Quick
ENT
Code Name / Description
dCF- [3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG]
Interface (ItF)
290 NVE41295 04/2018
User parameters
If [Return std name] is set to [Yes], the display reverts to standard but the custom settings remain stored.
Selection of 1 to 15
parameters to be
customized.
Note: The 1
st
line is [PARAMETER SELECTION] or
[RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A] depending on the path (ENT or
List).
List of customized parameters.
If no custom settings have
been made, the standard
values appear (names, units,
etc.).
Display on 1 or 2 lines of
characters.
Offsets and coefficients are
numerical values. Do not use
a too high multiplier
(99,999 - max display).
Use F1 to change to ABC, abc, 123, *[-.
Use the jog dial to increment the character (alphabetical order),
and << and >> (F2 and F3) to switch to the next or previous
character respectively.
Standard: use of the
factory set unit.
Customized: customization
of the unit.
%, mA, etc.: select from
drop-down list.
Once you have entered the unit,
if you press ENT, the Ramp
increment screen will re-appear
in order to display the name.
Press ESC to return to Unit.
The message entered appears
while the View key is pressed.
Names (USER MENU NAME, DRIVE NAME, configuration, serial no., lines of messages,
names of units, etc.) are customized as in the example of the parameter name shown
opposite.
If no custom settings have been made, the standard values appear (names, units, etc.).
Display on 1 or 2 lines of characters.
Use F1 to change to ABC, abc, 123, *[-.
Use the jog dial to increment the character (alphabetical order), and
<< and >> (F2 and F3) to switch to the next or previous character respectively.
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
USER PARAMETERS
Return std name : No
PARAMETER SELECTION
CUSTOMIZED SELECTION
MY MENU
DEVICE NAME
Code << >> Quick
SERVICE MESSAGE
CONFIGURATION 0
CONFIGURATION 1
CONFIGURATION 2
SERIAL NUMBER
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
ENT
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
Unit
Standard
Customized
%
mA
Quick
List
PARAMETER SELECTION
SETTINGS
Ramp increment
Acceleration
Deceleration
Acceleration 2
Deceleration 2
List
PARAMETER SELECTION
FULL
SIMPLY START
SETTINGS
MOTOR CONTROL
INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
COMMAND
List
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
CUSTOMIZED SELECTION
Ramp increment
Acceleration
Deceleration 2
Delete
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
Ramp increment
User name
Unit
Multiplier
Divisor
Offset
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
User name
1 DRIVE MENU
FLOW REFERENCE
Nb characters max. 13
ABC << >>
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
SERVICE MESSAGE
LINE 1
LINE 2
LINE 3
LINE 4
LINE 5
View Quick
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
Customized
1 DRIVE MENU
LBS
Nb characters max. 3
ABC << >>
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
LINE 2
1 DRIVE MENU
For any service, dial:
Nb characters max. 23
ABC << >> Quick
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
USER MENU NAME
1 DRIVE MENU
FLOW REFERENCE
Nb characters max. 18
ABC << >> Quick
ENT
Interface (ItF)
NVE41295 04/2018 291
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Code Name / Description Factory setting
CUP- [USER PARAMETERS]
GSP [Return std name]
[No] (nO)
Display standard parameters instead of customised ones.
nO
YES
[No] (nO)
[Yes] (YES)
MYMN [MY MENU]
PAn [DEVICE NAME]
SEr- [SERVICE MESSAGE]
SML01 [LINE 1]
SML02 [LINE 2]
SML03 [LINE 3]
SML04 [LINE 4]
SML05 [LINE 5]
CFN01 [CONFIGURATION 0]
CFN02 [CONFIGURATION 1]
CFN03 [CONFIGURATION 2]
PSn [SERIAL NUMBER]
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
ITF- > DCF- > CUP-
Interface (ItF)
292 NVE41295 04/2018
My Menu config.
Selection of parameters
included in the user menu.
Note: The 1st line is
[PARAMETER
SELECTION] or
[RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A]
depending on the path (ENT
or List).
Parameter list making up the
user menu.
Use the F2 and F3 keys to
arrange the parameters in
the list (example below using
F3).
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
MY MENU CONFIG.
PARAMETER SELECTION
SELECTED LIST
Code << >> Quick
ENT
ENT
ENT
PARAMETER SELECTION
FULL
SIMPLY START
SETTINGS
MOTOR CONTROL
INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG
COMMAND
List
PARAMETER SELECTION
SETTINGS
Ramp increment
Acceleration
Deceleration
Acceleration 2
Deceleration 2
List
List
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
SELECTED LIST
Ramp increment
Acceleration
Deceleration 2
Del Up Down
RDY Term +0.0 Hz 0.0 A
SELECTED LIST
Acceleration
Ramp increment
Speed prop. gain
Del Up Down
Code Name / Description
MYC- [MY MENU CONFIG.]
Interface (ItF)
NVE41295 04/2018 293
Parameter access
Note: The protected parameters are no longer accessible and are not, therefore, displayed for the selected
channels.
Selection to display all
parameters or only the
active parameters.
Press ESC to exit this
screen.
You remain exclusively
in the [1 DRIVE MENU]
menu. All menus are
selected by default.
Press ENT to deselect a
menu.
Press ENT to reselect a
menu.
Note: The protected channel (or channels) must be
selected, as a protected parameter on a selected channel
remains accessible on the channels that are not selected.
In these screens, all
parameters in the
[1 DRIVE MENU] menu
can be protected and are
displayed for selection,
except for the Expert
parameters.
Press the All key to
select all the parameters.
Press the All key again to
deselect all the
parameters.
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
PARAMETER ACCESS
PROTECTION
VISIBILITY
Code << >> Quick
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
VISIBILITY
PARAMETERS
MENUS
Code Quick
ENT
ENT
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
PARAMETERS
Active
All
Quick
ENT
MENUS
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SPEED REFERENCE
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 CONFIGURATION
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
PROTECTION
PROTECTED CHANNELS
PROTECTED PARAMS
Code Quick
ENT
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
PROTECTED CHANNELS
HMI
PC TOOL
MODBUS
CANopen
COM. CARD
Code Quick
ENT
ENT
PROTECTED PARAMS
1 DRIVE MENU
1.1 SPEED REFERENCE
1.2 MONITORING
1.3 CONFIGURATION
All None
PROTECTED PARAMS
1.3 CONFIGURATION
MY MENU
FACTORY SETTINGS
Macro configuration
FULL
All None
ENT
PROTECTED PARAMS
APPLICATION FUNCT.
REF. OPERATIONS
RAMP
STOP CONFIGURATION
AUTO DC INJECTION
JOG
PROTECTED PARAMS
JOG
JOG
Jog frequency
Jog delay
ENT
No selections can be made in this
screen if there are no parameters.
Interface (ItF)
294 NVE41295 04/2018
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Code Name / Description Factory setting
pAC- [PARAMETER ACCESS]
prO- [PROTECTION]
pCd- [PROTECTED CHANNELS]
COn
PS
Mdb
CAn
nEt
[HMI] (COn): Graphic display terminal or remote display terminal
[PC Tool] (PS): PC Software
[Modbus] (Mdb): Integrated Modbus
[CANopen] (CAn): Integrated CANopen®
[Com. card] (nEt): Communication card (if inserted)
UIS- [VISIBILITY]
PUIS [PARAMETERS]
[Active] (ACt)
Parameter visibility: only active ones, or all parameters.
ACt
ALL
[Active] (ACt)
[All] (ALL)
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
ITF- > DCF- > PAC- > PRO- > PCD-
Interface (ItF)
NVE41295 04/2018 295
Parameters described in this page can be accessed by:
Keypad parameters
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
KEYPAD PARAMETERS
Keypad contrast : 50%
Keypad stand-by : 5 min
Code << >> Quick
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
CnL- [KEYPAD PARAMETERS]
CrSt [Keypad contrast]
0 to 100% 50%
Contrast of the keypad.
CSbY [Keypad stand-by]
[No] (nO) to 10 min 5 min
Graphic keypad standby delay.
nO [No] (nO): No
Parameter that can be modified during operation or when stopped.
ITF- > DCF- > CNL-
Interface (ItF)
296 NVE41295 04/2018
NVE41295 04/2018 297
Open / Save as (trA)
7
Open / Save as (trA)
This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal.
[4.1 OPEN]: To download one of the 4 files from the graphic display terminal to the drive.
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 IDENTIFICATION
3 INTERFACE
4 OPEN / SAVE AS
5 PASSWORD
Code Quick
ENT
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
4 OPEN / SAVE AS
4.1 OPEN
4.2 SAVE AS
Code << >> Quick
Open / Save as (trA)
298 NVE41295 04/2018
[4.2 SAVE AS]: To download the current drive configuration to the graphic display terminal.
Various messages may appear when the download is requested:
• [TRANSFER IN PROGRESS]
• [DONE]
• Error messages if download not possible
• [Motor parameters are NOT COMPATIBLE. Do you want to continue?]: In this case, the download is
possible, but the parameters will be restricted.
See details on the
next page.
ENT
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
4. OPEN / SAVE AS
4.1 OPEN
4.2 SAVE AS
Code << >> Quick
ENT
ENT
ENT
...
ENT
Note: Opening an empty file
has no effect.
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
4.1 OPEN
File 1 Used
File 2 Empty
File 3 Empty
File 4 Empty
Code << >> Quick
ENT
Saving to a used file deletes
and replaces the
configuration contained in this
file.
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
4.2 SAVE AS
File 1 Used
File 2 Free
File 3 Free
File 4 Free
Code Quick
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
DOWNLOAD GROUP
None
All
Drive configuration
Motor parameters
Communication
Code Quick
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
DOWNLOAD
PLEASE CHECK THAT
THE DRIVE WIRING IS OK
ESC = abort ENT = continue
Code Quick
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
DOWNLOAD
TRANSFER IN PROGRESS
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
DOWNLOAD
DONE
ENT or ESC to continue
Open / Save as (trA)
NVE41295 04/2018 299
DOWNLOAD GROUP
[None]: No parameters
[All]: All parameters in all menus
[Drive configuration]: The entire [1 DRIVE MENU] without
[COMMUNICATION]
[Motor parameters]: [Rated motor volt.] (UnS) In the [MOTOR CONTROL] (drC-) menu
[Rated motor freq.] (FrS)
[PSI align curr. max] (NCr)
[Rated motor speed] (nSP)
[Motor 1 Cosinus phi] (COS)
[Rated motor power] (nPr)
[Motor param choice] (MPC)
[Tune selection] (StUn)
[Mot. therm. current] (ItH)
[IR compensation] (UFr)
[Slip compensation] (SLP)
[Cust stator resist.] (rSA)
[Lfw] (LFA)
[Cust. rotor t const.] (trA)
[Nominal I sync.] (nCrS)
[Nom motor spdsync] (nSPS)
[Pole pairs] (PPnS)
[Syn. EMF constant] (PHS)
[Autotune L d-axis] (LdS)
[Autotune L q-axis]
(LqS)
[Nominal freq sync.] (FrSS)
[Cust. stator R syn] (rSAS)
[Motor torque] (tqS)
[U1] (U1)
[F1] (F1)
[U2] (U2)
[F2] (F2)
[U3] (U3)
[F3] (F3)
[U4] (U4)
[F4] (F4)
[U5] (U5)
[F5] (F5)
The motor parameters that can be accessed in [Expert] (EPr)
mode, page 261
.
[Mot. therm. current] (ItH) In the [SETTINGS] (SEt-) menu
[Communication] : All the parameters in the [COMMUNICATION] menu
Open / Save as (trA)
300 NVE41295 04/2018
NVE41295 04/2018 301
Password (COd)
8
Password (COd)
With graphic display terminal
With integrated display terminal
Enables the configuration to be protected with an access code or a password to be entered in order to access
a protected configuration.
Example with graphic display terminal:
• The drive is unlocked when the PIN codes are set to [Unlocked] (OFF) (no password) or when the correct
code has been entered. All menus are visible.
• Before protecting the configuration with an access code, you must:
- Define the [Upload rights] (ULr) and [Download rights] (dLr).
- Make a careful note of the code and keep it in a place where you will be able to find it.
RDY Term 0.0 Hz 0.0 A
MAIN MENU
1 DRIVE MENU
2 IDENTIFICATION
3 INTERFACE
4 OPEN / SAVE AS
5 PASSWORD
Code Quick
ENT
RUN Term +50.0 Hz 0.0 A
5 PASSWORD
State : Unlocked
PIN code 1 : OFF
PIN code 2 : OFF
Upload rights : Permitted
Download rights : Unlock. drv
Code << >> Quick
drI-
COd-
trA-
= ENT
ESC
= ES
C
ItF-
ENT
ESC
PASSWORD
RUN Term +50.0 Hz 0.0 A
5 PASSWORD
State : Unlocked
PIN code 1 : OFF
Upload rights : Permitted
Download rights : Unlock. drv
Code << >> Quick
ENT
RUN Term +50.0 Hz 0.0 A
PIN 1ode 1
9520
Min =OFF Max =9999
<< >> Quick
Password (COd)
302 NVE41295 04/2018
• The drive has 2 access codes, enabling 2 access levels to be set up:
- PIN code 1 is a public unlock code: 6969.
- PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support. It can only be
accessed in [Expert] (EPr) mode.
- Only one PIN1 or PIN2 code can be used, the other must remain set to [OFF] (OFF).
Note: When the unlock code is entered, the user access code appears.
The following items are access-protected:
• Return to factory settings ([FACTORY SETTINGS] (FCS-) menu.
• The channels and parameters protected by the [MY MENU] (MYMn-) as well as the menu itself.
• The custom display settings ([3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.] (dCF-) menu).
Code Name / Description Adjustment range Factory setting
COd- [5 PASSWORD]
CSt [State]
[Unlocked] (ULC)
LC
ULC
Information parameter, cannot be modified.
[Locked] (LC): The drive is locked by a password
[Unlocked] (ULC): The drive is not locked by a password
COd [PIN code 1]
[OFF] (OFF) to 9,999 [OFF] (OFF)
1st access code. The value [OFF] (OFF) indicates that no password has been set [Unlocked] (ULC). The value [ON] (On)
indicates that the drive is protected and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it. Once the correct code has been
entered, it remains on the display and the drive is unlocked until the next time the power supply is disconnected.
PIN code 1 is a public unlock code: 6969.
COd2 [PIN code 2]
[OFF] (OFF) to 9,999 [OFF] (OFF)
This parameter can only be accessed in [Expert] (EPr) mode.
2nd access code. The value [OFF] (OFF) indicates that no password has been set [Unlocked] (ULC). The value [ON] (On)
indicates that the drive is protected and an access code must be entered in order to unlock it. Once the correct code has been
entered, it remains on the display and the drive is unlocked until the next time the power supply is disconnected.
PIN code 2 is an unlock code known only to Schneider Electric Product Support.
When [PIN code 2] (COd2) is not set to [OFF] (OFF), the [1.2 MONITORING] (MOn-) menu is the only one visible. Then if
[PIN code 2] (COd2) is set to [OFF] (OFF) (drive unlocked), all menus are visible.
If the display settings are modified in [3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.] (dCF-) menu, and if [PIN code 2] (COd2) is not set to
[OFF] (OFF), the visibility configured is kept. Then if [PIN code 2] (COd2) is set to OFF (drive unlocked), the visibility
configured in [3.4 DISPLAY CONFIG.] (dCF-
) menu is kept.
ULr [Upload rights]
[Permitted] (ULr0)
ULr0
ULr1
Reads or copies the current configuration to the drive.
[Permitted] (ULr0): The current drive configuration can be uploaded to the graphic display terminal or PC Software.
[Not allowed] (ULr1): The current drive configuration can only be uploaded to the graphic display terminal or PC Sofware if
the drive is not protected by an access code or if the correct code has been entered.
dLr [Download rights]
[Unlock. drv] (dLr1)
dLr0
dLr1
dLr2
dLr3
Writes the current configuration to the drive or downloads a configuration to the drive.
[Locked drv] (dLr0): A configuration file can only be downloaded to the drive if the drive is protected by an access code,
which is the same as the access code for the configuration to be downloaded.
[Unlock. drv] (dLr1): A configuration file can be downloaded to the drive or a configuration in the drive can be modified if the
drive is unlocked (access code entered) or is not protected by an access code.
[Not allowed] (dLr2): Download not authorized.
[Lock/unlock] (dLr3): Combination of [Locked drv.] (dLr0) and [Unlock. drv] (dLr1).
NVE41295 04/2018 303
Multipoint Screen
9
Multipoint Screen
Multipoint Screen
Communication is possible between a graphic display terminal and a number of drives connected on the same
bus. The addresses of the drives must be configured in advance in the [COMMUNICATION] (COM-) menu
using the [Modbus Address] (Add) parameter, page 276.
When a number of drives are connected to the same graphic display terminal, it automatically displays the
following screens:
In multipoint mode, the command channel is not displayed. From left to right, the state, then the 2 selected
parameters, and finally the drive address appear.
All menus can be accessed in multipoint mode. Only drive control via the graphic display terminal is not
authorized, apart from the Stop key, which locks all the drives.
If there is an error on a drive, this drive is displayed.
Selection of drives for multipoint dialog (select each address and
check the box by pressing ENT).
This screen only appears the first time the drive is powered up, or if
the "Cfg Add" function key on the MULTIPOINT SCREEN is pressed
(see below).
Selection of a drive for multipoint dialog.
CONNECTION IN PROGRESS
Vxxxxxx
MULTIPOINT ADDRESSES
Address 1
Address 2
Address 3
Address 4
Address 5
Address 6
ESC
MULTIPOINT SCREEN
Rdy 0 Rpm 0 A 2
RUN +952 Rpm 101 A 3
NLP +1500 Rpm 1250 A 4
Not connected 5
Rdy + 0 Rpm 0 A 6
Cfg Add
Cfg Add
RUN +952 Rpm 101 A 3
Motor speed
Motor current
HOME T/K
ESC
ENT
+952 rpm
101 A
Multipoint Screen
304 NVE41295 04/2018
306 NVE41295 09/2017
NVE41295 04/2018 307
Maintenance
10
Maintenance
Limitation of Warranty
The warranty does not apply if the product has been opened, except by Schneider Electric services.
Servicing
It is recommended to do the following in order to optimize continuity of operation.
Note: The fan operation depends on the drive thermal state. The drive may be running and the fan not.
Spares and repairs
Serviceable product. Please refer to your Customer Care Centre.
Long time storage
If the drive was not connected to mains for an extended period of time, the capacitors must be restored to their
full performance before the motor is started. See page 39
.
Fan replacement
It is possible to order a new fan for the ATV320 maintenance, see the commercial references on
www.schneider-electric.com.
Fans may continue to run for a certain period of time even after power to the product has been disconnected.
CAUTION
RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE
Adapt the following recommendations according to the environment conditions: temperature, chemical, dust.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Environment Part concerned Action Periodicity
Knock on the product Housing - control block
(led - display)
Check the drive visual aspect At least each year
Corrosion Terminals - connector - screws -
EMC plate
Inspect and clean if required
Dust Terminals - fans - blowholes
Temperature Around the product Check and correct if required
Cooling Fan Check the fan operation
Replace the fan After 3 to 5 years, depending
on the operating conditions
Vibration Terminal connections Check tightening at recom-
mended torque
At least each year
CAUTION
RUNNING FANS
Verify that fans have come to a complete standstill before handling them.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Maintenance
308 NVE41295 04/2018
NVE41295 04/2018 309
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
11
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
What's in this Chapter?
This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Error code 310
Clearing the detected fault 310
Fault detection codes which require a power reset after the detected fault is cleared 311
Fault detection codes that can be cleared with the automatic restart function after the cause has
disappeared
313
Fault detection codes that are cleared as soon as their cause disappears 316
Option card changed or removed 316
Control block changed 316
Fault detection codes displayed on the remote display terminal 317
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Read and understand the instructions in "Safety Information" chapter before performing any procedure in this
chapter.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
310 NVE41295 04/2018
Error code
•
If the display does not light up, check the power supply to the drive.
• The assignment of the Fast stop or Freewheel functions will help to prevent the drive starting if the
corresponding logic inputs are not powered up. The ATV320 then displays [Freewheel] (nSt) in
freewheel stop and [Fast stop] (FSt) in fast stop. This is normal since these functions are active at zero
so that the drive will be stopped if there is a wire break.
• Check that the run command input is activated in accordance with the selected control mode
([2/3 wire control] (tCC) and [2 wire type] (tCt) parameters, page 85
).
• If an input is assigned to the limit switch function and this input is at zero, the drive can only be started up
by sending a command for the opposite direction (see page 224
).
• If the reference channel or command channel is assigned to a communication bus, when the power supply
is connected, the drive will display [Freewheel] (nSt) and remain in stop mode until the communication
bus sends a command.
Clearing the detected fault
In the event of a non resettable detected fault:
• Disconnect all power, including external control power that may be present.
• Lock all power disconnects in the open position.
• Wait 15 minutes to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge (the drive LEDs are not indicators of the
absence of DC bus voltage).
• Measure the voltage of the DC bus between the PA/+ and PC/– terminals to ensure that the voltage is less
than 42 Vdc.
• If the DC bus capacitors do not discharge completely, contact your local Schneider Electric representative.
Do not repair or operate the drive.
• Find and correct the detected fault.
• Restore power to the drive to confirm the detected fault has been rectified.
In the event of a resettable detected fault, the drive can be reset after the cause is cleared:
- By switching off the drive until the display disappears completely, then switching on again.
- Automatically in the scenarios described for the [AUTOMATIC RESTART] (Atr-) function, page
252
.
- By means of a logic input or control bit assigned to the [FAULT RESET] (rSt-) function, page 251
.
- By pressing the STOP/RESET key on the graphic display keypad if the active channel command is
the HMI (see [Cmd channel 1] (Cd1) page 155
).
Code Name / Description
dGt- [DIAGNOSTICS]
This menu can only be accessed with the graphic display terminal. It displays detected faults and their cause in plain text and can
be used to carry out tests, see page 64
.
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
NVE41295 04/2018 311
Fault detection codes which require a power reset after the detected fault is cleared
The cause of the detected fault must be removed before resetting by turning off and then back on.
ASF, brF, SOF, SPF and tnF detected faults can also be cleared remotely by means of a logic input
or control bit ([Fault reset] (rSF) parameter, page 251
).
Detected Fault Name Probable cause Remedy
AnF
[Load slipping]
• The difference between the output
frequency and the speed feedback is not
correct.
• Check the motor, gain and stabillity parameters.
• Add a braking resistor.
• Check the size of the motor/drive/load.
• Check the encoder's mechanical coupling and its wiring.
• Check the setting of parameters
ASF
[Angle Error]
• This occurs during the phase-shift angle
measurement, if the motor phase is
disconnected or if the motor inductance is
too high.
• Check the motor phases and the maximum current allowed
by the drive.
brF
[Brake feedback]
• The brake feedback contact does not
match the brake logic control.
• The brake does not stop the motor quickly
enough (detected by measuring the
speed on the "Pulse input" input).
• Check the feedback circuit and the brake logic control
circuit.
• Check the mechanical state of the brake.
• Check the brake linings.
CrF1
[Precharge]
• Charging relay control detected fault or
charging resistor damaged.
• Turn the drive off and then turn on again.
• Check the internal connections.
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
EEF1
[Control Eeprom]
• Internal memory detected fault, control
block.
• Check the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
• Turn off, reset, return to factory settings.
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
EEF2
[Power Eeprom]
• Internal memory detected fault, power
card.
FCF1
[Out. contact.
stuck]
• The output contactor remains closed
although the opening conditions have
been met.
• Check the contactor and its wiring.
• Check the feedback circuit.
HdF
[IGBT desaturation]
• Short-circuit or grounding at the drive
output.
• Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the
motor insulation.
ILF
[internal com. link]
• Communication interruption between
option card and drive.
• Check the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
• Check the connections.
• Replace the option card.
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
InF1
[Rating error]
• The power card is different from the card
stored.
• Check the reference of the power card.
InF2
[Incompatible PB]
• The power card is incompatible with the
control block.
• Check the reference of the power card and its compatibility.
InF3
[Internal serial link]
• Communication interruption between the
internal cards.
• Check the internal connections.
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
InF4
[Internal-mftg zone]
• Internal data inconsistent. • Recalibrate the drive (performed by Schneider Electric
Product Support).
InF6
[Internal - fault
option]
• The option installed in the drive is not
recognized.
• Check the reference and compatibility of the option.
• Check that the option is well inserted into the ATV320.
InF9
[Internal- I
measure]
• The current measurements are incorrect. • Replace the current sensors or the power card.
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
InFA
[Internal-mains
circuit]
• The input stage is not operating correctly. • Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
InFb
[Internal- th.
sensor]
• The drive temperature sensor is not
operating correctly.
• Replace the drive temperature sensor.
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
InFE
[internal- CPU ]
• Internal microprocessor detected fault. • Turn off and reset.
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
SAFF
[Safety fault]
• Debounce time exceeded.
• SS1 threshold exceeded.
• Wrong configuration.
• SLS type overspeed detected.
• Check the safety functions configuration.
• Check the ATV320 Integrated safety Functions manual
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
312 NVE41295 04/2018
SOF
[Overspeed]
• Instability or driving load too high. • Check the motor, gain and stability parameters.
• Add a braking resistor.
• Check the size of the motor/drive/load.
• Check the parameters settings for the
[FREQUENCY METER] (FqF-) function page 266
, if it is
configured.
SPF
[Speed fdback
loss]
• Signal on "Pulse input" missing, if the
input is used for speed measurement.
• Encoder feedback signal missing
• Check the wiring of the input cable and the detector used.
• Check the configuration parameters of the encoder.
• Check the wiring between the encoder and the drive.
• Check the encoder.
Detected Fault Name Probable cause Remedy
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
NVE41295 04/2018 313
Fault detection codes that can be cleared with the automatic restart function after the cause has
disappeared
These detected faults can also be cleared by turning on and off or by means of a logic input or control bit
([Fault reset] (rSF) parameter page 251).
Detected Fault Name Probable cause Remedy
bLF
[Brake control]
• Brake release current not reached.
• Brake engage frequency threshold
[Brake engage freq] (bEn) only
regulated when brake logic control is
assigned.
• Check the drive/motor connection.
• Check the motor windings.
• Check the [Brake release I FW] (Ibr) and
[Brake release I Rev] (Ird) settings page 194
.
• Apply the recommended settings for
[Brake engage freq] (bEn).
CnF
[Com. network]
• Communication interruption on
communication card.
• Check the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
• Check the wiring.
• Check the time-out.
• Replace the option card.
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
COF
[CANopen com.]
• Communication interruption on the
CANopen® bus.
• Check the communication bus.
• Check the time-out.
• Refer to the CANopen® User's manual.
EPF1
[External flt-LI/Bit]
• Event triggered by an external
device, depending on user.
• Check the device which caused the triggering and reset.
EPF2
[External fault com.]
• Event triggered by a communication
network.
• Check for the cause of the triggering and reset.
FbES
[FB stop flt.]
• Function blocks have been stopped
while motor was running.
• Check [Stop FB Stop motor] (FbSM) configuration.
FCF2
[Out. contact. open.]
• The output contactor remains open
although the closing conditions have
been met.
• Check the contactor and its wiring.
• Check the feedback circuit.
LCF
[input contactor]
• The drive is not turned on even
though [Mains V. time out ] (LCt)
has elapsed.
• Check the contactor and its wiring.
• Check the time-out.
• Check the supply mains/contactor/drive connection.
LFF3
[AI3 4-20mA loss]
• Loss of the 4-20 mA reference on
analog input AI3.
• Check the connection on the analog inputs.
ObF
[Overbraking]
• Braking too sudden or driving load.
• Supply voltage too high.
• Increase the deceleration time.
• Install a braking resistor if necessary.
• Activate the [Dec ramp adapt.] (brA) function page 172, if
it is compatible with the application.
• Check the supply voltage.
OCF
[Overcurrent]
• Parameters in the [SETTINGS]
(SEt-) and [MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-) menus are not correct.
• Inertia or load too high.
• Mechanical locking.
• Check the parameters.
• Check the size of the motor/drive/load.
• Check the state of the mechanism.
• Decrease [Current limitation] (CLI).
• Increase the switching frequency.
OHF
[Drive overheat]
• Drive temperature too high. • Check the motor load, the drive ventilation and the ambient
temperature. Wait for the drive to cool down before restarting.
OLC
[Proc. overload flt]
• Process overload. • Check and remove the cause of the overload.
• Check the parameters of the
[PROCESS OVERLOAD] (OLd-) function, page 272
.
OLF
[Motor overload]
• Triggered by excessive motor
current.
• Check the setting of the motor thermal protection, check the
motor load. Wait for the motor to cool down before restarting.
OPF1
[1 output phase loss]
• Loss of one phase at drive output. • Check the connections from the drive to the motor.
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
314 NVE41295 04/2018
OPF2
[3 motor phase loss]
• Motor not connected or motor power
too low.
• Output contactor open.
• Instantaneous instability in the motor
current.
• Check the connections from the drive to the motor.
• If an output contactor is being used, set
[Output Phase Loss] (OPL) to [Output cut] (OAC), page
256
.
• Test on a low power motor or without a motor: In factory
settings mode, motor phase loss detection is active
[Output Phase Loss] (OPL) = [Yes] (YES). To check the
drive in a test or maintenance environment, without having to
use a motor with the same rating as the drive (in particular for
high power drives), deactivate motor phase loss detection
[Output Phase Loss] (OPL) = [No] (nO), see instructions
given page 256
.
• Check and optimize the following parameters:
[IR compensation] (UFr) page 90
, [Rated motor volt.]
(UnS) and [Rated mot. current] (nCr) page 86
and
perform [Auto tuning] (tUn) page 87
.
OSF
[Mains overvoltage]
• Supply voltage too high.
• Disturbed mains supply.
• Check the supply voltage.
OtFL
[LI6=PTC overheat]
• Overheating of PTC probes detected
on input LI6.
• Check the motor load and motor size.
• Check the motor ventilation.
• Wait for the motor to cool before restarting.
• Check the type and state of the PTC probes.
PtFL
[LI6=PTC probe]
• PTC probe on input LI6 open or
short-circuited.
• Check the PTC probe and the wiring between it and the
motor/drive.
SCF1
[Motor short circuit]
• Short-circuit or grounding at the drive
output.
• Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the
motor insulation.
• Reduce the switching frequency.
• Connect chokes in series with the motor.
• Check the adjustment of speed loop and brake.
• Increase the [Time to restart] (ttr), page 101.
• Increase the switching frequency.
SCF3
[Ground short
circuit]
• Significant earth leakage current at
the drive output if several motors are
connected in parallel.
• Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the
motor insulation.
• Reduce the switching frequency.
• Connect chokes in series with the motor.
• Check the adjustment of speed loop and brake.
• Increase the [Time to restart] (ttr), page 101.
• Reduce the switching frequency.
SCF4
[IGBT short circuit]
• Power component detected fault. • Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
SCF5
[Motor short circuit]
• Short-circuit at drive output. • Check the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the
motor’s insulation.
• Contact Schneider Electric Product Support.
SLF1
[Modbus com.]
• Communication interruption on the
Modbus bus.
• Check the communication bus.
• Check the time-out.
• Refer to the Modbus User's manual.
SLF2
[PC com.]
• Communication interruption with PC
Software.
• Check the PC Software connecting cable.
• Check the time-out.
SLF3
[HMI com.]
• Communication interruption with the
graphic display terminal or remote
display terminal.
• Check the terminal connection
• Check the time-out.
SSF
[Torque/current lim]
• Switch to torque or current limitation. • Check if there are any mechanical problems.
• Check the parameters of [TORQUE LIMITATION] (tOL-)
page 216
and the parameters of the
[TORQUE OR I LIM. DETECT.] (tId-), page 264
.
tJF
[IGBT overheat]
• Drive overheated. • Check the size of the load/motor/drive.
• Reduce the switching frequency.
• Wait for the motor to cool before restarting.
Detected Fault Name Probable cause Remedy
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
NVE41295 04/2018 315
tnF
[Auto-tuning]
• Special motor or motor whose power
is not suitable for the drive.
• Motor not connected to the drive.
• Motor not stopped
• Check that the motor/drive are compatible.
• Check that the motor is present during auto-tuning.
• If an output contactor is being used, close it during auto-tuning.
• Check that the motor is stopped during tune operation.
ULF
[Proc. underload Flt]
• Process underload. • Check and remove the cause of the underload.
• Check the parameters of the
[PROCESS UNDERLOAD] (Uld-) function, page 270
.
Detected Fault Name Probable cause Remedy
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
316 NVE41295 04/2018
Fault detection codes that are cleared as soon as their cause disappears
Option card changed or removed
When an option card is removed or replaced by another, the drive locks in [Incorrect config.] (CFF) fault
mode on power-up. If the card has been deliberately changed or removed, the detected fault can be cleared
by pressing the ENT key twice, which causes the factory settings to be restored (see page 81
) for the
parameter groups affected by the card. These are as follows:
Card replaced by a card of the same type
• Communication cards: only the parameters that are specific to communication cards
Control block changed
When a control block is replaced by a control block configured on a drive with a different rating, the drive locks
in [Incorrect config.] (CFF) fault mode on power-up. If the control block has been deliberately changed, the
detected fault can be cleared by pressing the ENT key twice, which causes all the factory settings to be
restored.
Detected Fault Name Probable cause Remedy
CFF
[Incorrect config.]
• Option card changed or removed.
• Control block replaced by a control block
configured on a drive with a different
rating.
• The current configuration is inconsistent.
• Check that there are no card errors.
• In the event of the option card being changed/removed
deliberately, see the remarks below.
• Check that there are no card errors.
• In the event of the control block being changed
deliberately, see the remarks below.
• Return to factory settings or retrieve the backup
configuration, if it is valid (see page 81
).
CFI
[Invalid config.]
• Invalid configuration.
The configuration loaded in the drive via
the bus or communication network is
inconsistent.
• Check the configuration loaded previously.
• Load a compatible configuration.
CFI2
CSF
[Ch. Sw. fault]
• Switch to not valid channels. • Check the function parameters.
dLF
[Dynamic load fault]
• Abnormal load variation. • Check that the load is not blocked by an obstacle.
• Removal of a run command causes a reset.
FbE
[FB fault]
• Function blocks error. • See [FB Fault] (FbFt) for more details.
HCF
[Cards pairing]
• The [CARDS PAIRING] (PPI-)
function page 269
has been configured
and a drive card has been changed.
• In the event of a card error, reinsert the original card.
• Confirm the configuration by entering the
[Pairing password] (PPI) if the card was changed
deliberately.
PHF
[Input phase loss]
• Drive incorrectly supplied or a fuse
blown.
• One phase missing.
• 3-phase ATV320 used on a single-phase
supply mains.
• Unbalanced load.
This protection only operates with the drive
on load.
• Check the power connection and the fuses.
• Use a 3-phase supply mains.
• Disable the detected fault by [Input phase loss] (IPL) =
[No] (nO) page 86
.
USF
[Undervoltage]
• Supply mains too low.
• Transient voltage dip.
• Check the voltage and the parameters of
[UNDERVOLTAGE MGT] (USb-), page 259
.
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
NVE41295 04/2018 317
Fault detection codes displayed on the remote display terminal
(1) Flashing
Code Name Description
InIt
[Initialization in
progress]
The microcontroller is initializing.
Search underway for communication configuration.
COM.E
(1)
[Communication error] Time out detected fault (50 ms).
This message is displayed after 20 attempts at communication.
A-17
(1)
[Alarm button] A key has been held down for more than 10 seconds.
The keypad is disconnected.
The keypad wakes up when a key is pressed.
CLr
(1)
[Confirmation of
detected fault reset]
This is displayed when the STOP key is pressed once if the active command channel is the remote
display terminal.
dEU.E
(1)
[Drive disparity] The drive brand does not match that of the remote display terminal.
rOM.E
(1)
[ROM anomaly] The remote display terminal detects a ROM anomaly on the basis of checksum calculation.
rAM.E
(1)
[RAM anomaly] The remote display terminal detects a RAM anomaly.
CPU.E
(1)
[Other detected faults] Other detected faults.
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
318 NVE41295 04/2018
320 NVE41295 04/2018
NVE41295 04/2018 321
Index of Functions
12
Index of Functions
The following table represents the parameter codes:
Function Page
[2 wire] (2C) 85
[2nd CURRENT LIMIT.] 218
[3 wire] (3C) 85
[+/- SPEED] 185
[+/-SPEED AROUND REF.] 187
[AUTO DC INJECTION] 176
[AUTOMATIC RESTART] 252
[Auto tuning] 87
[AUTO TUNING BY LI] 236
DC Bus 245
[BRAKE LOGIC CONTROL] 194
[CATCH ON THE FLY] 253
Command and reference channels 146
Deferred stop on thermal alarm 258
[DRIVE OVERHEAT] 257
[ENCODER FAULT] 263
[ENCODER CONFIGURATION] 135
[FACTORY SETTINGS] 81
[Fault reset] 251
[FLUXING BY LI] 189
[HIGH SPEED HOISTING] 204
[DYN CURRENT LIMIT] 219
[JOG] 178
LINE CONTACTOR COMMAND 220
Load measurement 199
[Load sharing] 122
Load variation detection 267
Motor or configuration switching [MULTIMOTORS/CONFIG.] (MMC-) 232
Motor thermal protection 254
[Noise reduction] 120
[OUTPUT CONTACTOR CMD] 223
[Ovld.Proces.Mngmt] 272
[PARAM. SET SWITCHING] 230
[5 PASSWORD] 302
[PID REGULATOR] 210
POSITIONING BY SENSORS 224
PRESET SPEEDS 180
PTC probe 250
[RAMP] 170
[REFERENCE SWITCH.] 167
Rope slack 204
Index of Functions
322 NVE41295 04/2018
[RP assignment] 128
REFERENCE MEMORIZING 188
[STOP CONFIGURATION] 173
Stop at distance calculated after deceleration limit switch 226
Summing input / Subtracting input / Multiplier 168
Synchronous motor parameters 112
TORQUE LIMITATION 215
TRAVERSE CONTROL 237
[Underload Managmt.] 271
Use of the "Pulse input" input to measure the speed of rotation of the motor 265
Function Page
NVE41295 04/2018 323
Index of Parameter Codes
13
Index of Parameter Codes
The following table represents the parameter codes:
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
AC2 89 171
187
212
ACC 87 89 170
AdC 176
AdCO 277
Add 276
AI1A 52 133
AI1C 52
A11E 134
A11F 52 134
AI1S 133
A11t 133
A12A 52 133
A12C 52
A12E 134
A12F 52 134
A12S 134
A12t 133
A13A 53 134
A13C 53
A13E 134
A13F 53 134
A13L 134
A13S 135
A13t 134
AIC2 135 210
AIU1 46 50
ALGr 63
AMOC 276
AO1 53 144
AO1C 53
AO1F 53 144
Index of Parameter Codes
324 NVE41295 04/2018
AO1t 144
AOH1 53 144
AOL1 53 144
APH 62
ASH1 53 144
ASL1 53 144
ASt 114 190
Atr 252
AUt 109
114
AU1A 135
AU2A 135
bCI 194
bdCO 277
bEd 195
bEn 101 195
bEt 101 195
bFr 86 105
bIP 194
bIr 101 195
bLC 194
bMp 157
bnS 55 158
bnU 56 158
bOA 120
bOO 120
brA 172
brH0 197
brH1 197
brH2 198
brr 198
brt 101 194
bSP 131
bSt 194
bUEr 55 158
CCFG 86
CCS 155
Cd1
155
Cd2
155
CFG 82 85
CFPS 62
CHA1 230
CHA2 230
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
NVE41295 04/2018 325
CHCF 154
CHM 235
CL2 95 218
CLI 94 119 218
CLL 261
CLO 205
CLS 228
CMdC 56
CnF1 235
CnF2 235
CnFS 62
COd 75
COd2 75
COF 204
COL 262
COP 156
COr 204
COS 107
CP1 200
CP2 200
CrH3 53 134
CrL3 53 134
CrSt 295
CrtF 118
CSbY 295
CSt 75 302
Ctd 102 252
Ctt 105
CtU 56 158
dA2 168
dA3 169
dAF 227
dAL 227
dAnF 137 263
dAr 227
dAS 223
dbS 223
dCCC 245
dCCM 245
dCC1 66
dCC2 67
dCC3 67
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
326 NVE41295 04/2018
dCC4 67
dCC5 67
dCC6 67
dCC7 67
dCC8 67
dCF 93 173 272
dCI 174
dE2 89 171
187
dEC 87 89 170
dLb 267
dLd 267
dLr 75 302
dO1 141
dO1d 141
dO1H 141
dO1S 141
dP1 64
dP2 67
dP3 67
dP4 67
dP5 67
dP6 67
dP7 67
dP8 67
drC1 66
drC2 66
drC3 66
drC4 66
drC5 66
drC6 66
drC7 66
drC8 66
dSF 228
dSI 187
dSP 187
dtF 243
EbO 242
EPL 259
EnU 135
EnS 135
ErCO 277
EtF 258
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
NVE41295 04/2018 327
F1 118
F2 118
F2d 102
F3 119
F4 119
F5 119
FAb 120
FAd1 288
FAd2 288
FAd3 288
FAd4 288
FAnF 136 263
FbCd 158
FbdF 159
FbFt 55 158
FbrM 159
FbSN 159
FbSt 55 158
FCS1 81
Fdt 266
FFH 118
FFM 104
FFt 102 173
FLI 189
FLO 277
FLOC 277
FLOt 277
FLr 253
FLU 95 109 189
Fn1 157
Fn2 157
Fn3 157
Fn4 157
FPI 212
FqA 266
FqC 266
FqF 266
FqL 102 253
FqS 50
Fqt 266
Fr1 154
Fr1b 167
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
328 NVE41295 04/2018
Fr2 155
FrH 50 50
57
FrI 116
FrS 86 107
FrSS 116
Frt 171
FSt 173
Ftd 102 253
FtO 103 272
FtU 103 271
FtY 81
GFS 81
GSP 291
HF1 116
H1r 116
HrFC 252
HSO 204
HSP 87 89 244
HSP2 90 244
HSP3 90 244
HSP4 90 244
I2tA 219
I2tM 51
I2tI 219
I2tt 219
IA01 160
IA02 160
IA03 160
IA04 160
IA05 160
IA06 160
IA07 160
IA08 160
IA09 160
IA10 160
IAd1 288
IAd2 288
IAd3 288
IAd4 288
Ibr 101 194
IbrA 200
IdA 111
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
NVE41295 04/2018 329
IdC 93 174 273
IdC2 93 175 273
IL01 159
IL02 159
IL03 159
IL04 159
IL05 159
IL06 159
IL07 159
IL08 159
IL09 159
IL10 159
ILr 116
InH 261
Inr 89 170
IntP 216
IPL 86 245 256
Ird 101 194
ItH 87 90
JdC 101 195
JF2 103 183
JF3 103 183
JFH 103 183
JGF 95 178
JGt 96 179
JOG 178
JPF 102 183
L1A 51 127
L1d 128
L2A 51 128
L2d 128
L3A 51 127
L3d 128
L4A 51 128
L4d 128
L5A 51 127
L5d 128
L6A 51 128
L6d 128
LA01 160
LA02 160
LA03 160
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
330 NVE41295 04/2018
LA04 160
LA05 160
LA06 160
LA07 160
LA08 160
LA1A 51 128
LA1d 128
LA2A 51 128
LA2d 128
LAnF 136 263
LAC 282
LbA 122
LbC 103 122
LbC1 124
LbC2 124
LbC3 124
LbF 124
LC2 218
LCr 50
LCt 221
LdS 116
LES 221
LEt 258
LFA 111
LFF 272
LFL3 260
LFr 46 50
LFr1 59
LFr2 59
LFr3 59
LIS1 51
LIS2 51
LLC 221
LnG 284
LO1 139
LO1d 139
LO1H 140
LO1S 140
LOC 103 272
LP1 200
LP2 200
LqS 116
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
NVE41295 04/2018 331
LSP 87 89
LUL 103 270
LUn 103 270
M001 161
M002 161
M003 161
M004 161
M005 161
M006 161
M007 161
M008 161
M1Ct 58
M1EC 58
MStP 228
MA2 169
MA3 169
MCr 116
Mdt 287
MFr 46 50 98
MMF 50
MPC 110
MtM 255
nbrP 61
nbtP 61
nC1 58
nC2 58
nC3 58
nC4 58
nC5 58
nC6 59
nC7 59
nC8 59
nCA1 276
nCA2 276
nCA3 276
nCA4 276
nCA5 276
nCA6 276
nCA7 276
nCA8 276
nCr 86 107
nCrS 113
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
332 NVE41295 04/2018
nLS 228
nM1 58
nM2 58
nM3 58
nM4 58
nM5 58
nM6 58
nM7 58
nM8 58
nMA1 275
nMA2 275
nMA3 275
nMA4 275
nMA5 275
nMA6 275
nMA7 275
nMA8 275
nMtS 61
nPr 86 107
nrd 120
nSP 86 107
nSPS 113
nSt 173
ntJ 74
OCC 223
OdL 272
Odt 256
OHL 257
OLL 255
OPL 256
OPr 50
OSP 204
Otr 50
PAH 99 212
PAL 99 211
PAS 228
PAU 212
PCd 294
PEr 99 212
PES 200
PFI 54 128
PFr 54 128
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
NVE41295 04/2018 333
PG1 135
PHS 116
PIA 54 128
PIC 211
PIF 210
PIF1 210
PIF2 210
PII 210
PIL 54 128
PIM 213
PIP1 210
PIP2 210
PIS 212
POH 99 211
POL 99 211
PPI 269
PPnS 113
Pr2 214
Pr4 214
prSt 228
PrP 99 211
PS16 181
PS2 181
PS4 181
PS8 181
PSr 99 212
PSt 154
PtCL 250
PtH 62
PUIS 294
qSH 102 242
qSL 102 242
r1 138
r1d 138
r1F 139
r2F 139
r1H 139
r1S 138
r2 139
r2d 139
r2H 139
r2S 139
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
334 NVE41295 04/2018
rCA 223
rCb 167
rdAE 117
rdG 99 211
rEC1 61
rFC 155
rFCC 56
rFLt 74
rFr 50
rIG 99 211
rIn 154
rMUd 103 270
rP 251
rP11 59
rP12 59
rP13 59
rP14 59
rP2 99 214
rP21 60
rP22 60
rP23 60
rP24 60
rP3 100 214
rP31 60
rP32 60
rP33 60
rP34 60
rP4 100 214
rPA 251
rPC 46 62
rPE 62
rPF 62
rPG 99 211
rPI 46 62 211
rPO 62
rPr 62
rPS 171
rPt 170
rrS 126
rSA 111
rSAS 116
rSd 205
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
NVE41295 04/2018 335
rSF 251
rSL 213
rStL 205
rtH 62
rtr 243
rUn 126
S101 230
S102 230
S103 230
S104 230
S105 230
S106 230
S107 230
S108 230
S109 230
S110 230
S111 230
S112 230
S113 230
S114 230
S115 230
S201 230
S202 230
S203 230
S204 230
S205 230
S206 230
S207 230
S208 230
S209 230
S210 230
S211 230
S212 230
S213 230
S214 230
S215 230
S301 231
S302 231
S303 231
S304 231
S305 231
S306 231
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
336 NVE41295 04/2018
S307 231
S308 231
S309 231
S310 231
S311 231
S312 231
S313 231
S314 231
S315 231
SA2 168
SA3 168
SAF1 69
SAF2 70
SAL 227
SAr 227
SAt 258
SCL 205
SCL3 246
SCSI 81
SdC1 93 176
195
SdC2 94 177
Sdd 263
SdS 104
SF00 70
SF01 70
SF02 71
SF03 71
SF04 71
SF05 72
SF06 72
SF07 72
SF08 73
SF09 73
SF10 73
SF11 74
SFC 90 118
SFd 228
SFFE 55
69
SFr 94 119
SFt 119
SH2 244
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
NVE41295 04/2018 337
SH4 244
SIr 117
SIt 90 118
SLL 262
SLP 90 118
SLSS 54
SMOt 114
SnC 243
SOP 120
SP10 97 182
SP11 97 182
SP12 97 182
SP13 98 182
SP14 98 182
SP15 98 182
SP16 98 182
SP2 97 181
SP3 97 181
SP4 97 181
SP5 97 181
SP6 97 181
SP7 97 181
SP8 97 182
SP9 97 182
SPb 116
SPd1 63
SPd2 63
SPd3 63
SPF 116
SPG 90 118
SPGU 90 118
SPM 188
Sr11 64
Sr12
to
Sr18
67
Sr21 64
Sr22
to
Sr28
67
SrA1 64
SrA2
to
SrA8
67
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
338 NVE41295 04/2018
Srb1 64
Srb2
to
Srb8
67
SrC1 64
SrC2
to
SrC8
67
Srd1 64
Srd2
to
Srd8
67
SrE1 64
SrE2
to
SrE8
67
SrF1 64
SrF2
to
SrF8
67
SrG1 64
SrG2
to
SrG8
67
SrH1 64
SrH2
to
SrH8
67
SrI1 64
SrI2
to
SrI8
67
SrJ1 64
SrJ2
to
SrJ8
67
Sr 1 64
SrK2
to
SrK8
67
SrL1 64
SrL2
to
SrL8
67
Srb 103 270
272
SrP 98 187
SSIS 54
SSb 264
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
NVE41295 04/2018 339
Std 228
StFr 50
StM 259
StO 264
StOS 54
StP 259
Str 185
Strt 260
Stt 173
StUn 87 108
114
SUL 120
tA1 89 170
tA2 89 171
tA3 89 171
tA4 89 171
tAA 216
tAC 74
tAC2 74
tAnF 136 263
tAr 252
tbE 101 195
tbO 242
tbr 276
tbS 260
tCC 85 125
tCt 125
tdC 93 175 274
tdC1 93 176
tdC2 94 177
tdI 93 174 273
tdn 242
tdS 266
tEC1 61
tFO 276
tFr 87 105
tHA 257
258
tHd 50
tHr 50
tHt 255
tLA 216
tLC 217
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
340 NVE41295 04/2018
tLd 267
tLIG 102 216
tLIM 101 216
tLS 95 213
tnL 268
tOL 272
tOS 204
tP11 59
tP12 60
tP13 60
tP14 60
tP21 60
tP22 60
tP23 60
tP24 60
tP31 61
tP32 61
tP33 61
tP34 61
tqb 266
tqS 113
trA 111
trC 242
trH 102 242
trL 102 242
tSM 259
tSY 243
ttd 102 255
258
ttd2 255
258
ttd3 255
258
ttH 102 253
ttL 102 253
ttO 276
ttr 101 196
tUL 236
tUn 87 108
113
tUnU 108
114
tUP 242
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
NVE41295 04/2018 341
tUS 87 108
113
U1 118
U2 118
U3 119
U4 119
U5 119
Ubr 247 122
UdL 271
UFr 90 118
UIH1 52 133
UIH2 52 134
UILI 52 133
UIL2 52 133
ULn 50
ULr 75
ULt 270
UnS 86 107
UOH1 53 144
UOL1 53 144
UOP 50
UPL 259
UrES 246 259
USb 259
USI 187
USL 247 259
USP 185
USt 259
Code CUSTOMER
SETTING
[1.1 SPEED REFERENCE]
(rEF-)
[1.2 MONITORING]
(MOn-)
[FACTORY SETTINGS]
(FCS-)
[Macro configuration]
(CFG)
[SIMPLY START]
(SIM-)
[SETTINGS]
(SEt-)
[MOTOR CONTROL]
(drC-)
[INPUTS / OUTPUTS CFG]
(I_O-)
[COMMAND]
(CtL-)
[FUNCTION BLOCKS]
(FbM-)
[APPLICATION FUNCT.]
(FUn-)
[FAULT MANAGEMENT]
(FLt-)
[COMMUNICATION]
(COM-)
[3 INTERFACE]
(ItF-)
Index of Parameter Codes
342 NVE41295 04/2018
NVE41295 04/2018 343
Index of Parameter Codes
14
Glossary
D
Display terminal
The display terminal menus are shown in square brackets.
For example: [Communication]
The codes are shown in round brackets.
For example: COM-
Parameter names are displayed on the display terminal in square brackets.
For example: [Fallback Speed]
Parameter codes are displayed in round brackets.
For example: LFf
E
Error
Discrepancy between a detected (computed, measured, or signaled) value or condition and the
specified or theoretically correct value or condition.
F
Factory setting
Factory settings when the product is shipped
Fault
Fault is an operating state. If the monitoring functions detect an error, a transition to this operating
state is triggered, depending on the error class. A "Fault reset" is required to exit this operating
state after the cause of the detected error has been removed. Further information can be found in
the pertinent standards such as IEC 61800-7, ODVA Common Industrial Protocol (CIP).
Fault Reset
A function used to restore the drive to an operational state after a detected error is cleared by
removing the cause of the error so that the error is no longer active.
M
Monitoring function
Monitoring functions acquire a value continuously or cyclically (for example, by measuring) in order
to check whether it is within permissible limits. Monitoring functions are used for error detection.
Glossary
P
Parameter
Device data and values that can be read and set (to a certain extent) by the user.
Index of Parameter Codes
344 NVE41295 04/2018
PELV
Protective Extra Low Voltage, low voltage with isolation. For more information: IEC 60364-4-41
PLC
Programmable logic controller
Power stage
The power stage controls the motor. The power stage generates current for controlling the motor.
W
Warning
If the term is used outside the context of safety instructions, a warning alerts to a potential problem
that was detected by a monitoring function. A warning does not cause a transition of the operating
state.
ATV320_Programming_Manual_EN_NVE41295_03
04/2018
